GIAO AN ANH 7

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (1.2 MB, 268 trang )

(1)Pre: 16/8/2015 Tea: 17/8/2015 Period: 1 Unit 1 : «n tËp, kiÓm tra. A. OBJECTIVES : Helps Ss to consolidate the first final semester test By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to complete their test & consolidate the grammar in the test . I. Knowlege : Vocabulary : . Grammar: II. Skills: Speaking, writing, reading and listening. B. TEACHING PROCEDURE : I. Greeting & checking absence ( 1 M ): - Greeting in English. II. Revision (M ) : III. New lesson : TEACHER’S WORKS STUDENTS’ WORKS PRESENTATION Time: 15 M. 1. Multiple choice: - Completing the exercise. - Gives the content of the exercise & helps Ss - Giving the answer keys & explaining to complete. the reason how to choose the keys. - Asks Ss to give the answer keys & explains the reason how to choose the keys. - Corrects & comments. Exercise * Answer keys: 1. He...............a student. 1. is 2. who.......they? 2. are 3. What...........he do in his free time? 3. does 4. She stays...................at 6 o’clock. 4. up 5. What................this? It’s a pen. 5. is PRACTICE Time 10 M . 2. Matching: Exercise 1-P44. -Working in pairs to match the - Introduces the requirement & Asks Ss to questions work in pairs to match the questions in column in column A with the answer in A with the answer in column B column B - Asks Ss to compare the keys. - Comparing the keys & give the keys. - Corrects & comments. - Correcting the keys. * Answer key: 1:b; 2: e; 3: d; 4: a; 5: c. A B 1. How are you ? a. I’m in grade 6.. 2. Where do you live ? b. I’m fine. Thank you.. 3. How do you go to school ? c. It’s a book. 4. Which grade are you in ? d. By bicycle. 5. What is that ? e. In the city. PRODUCTION Time: (15 Ms) 1. Write the answer in the words: -Working in pairs to write the write the -Introduces the requirement & the exercise & answer in the words: Asks Ss to work in pairs to write the write the - Comparing the keys & Giving the answer in the words: keys - Asks Ss to compare the keys. - Correcting the keys & the mistakes. - Asks Ss to give the keys - Corrects & comments..

(2) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.. 8 20 33 54 7. + 9 – 13 + 15 : 3 x 5. = = = =. =. ( Seventeen ) ( Seven ) ( Forty-eight ) ( Eighteen ) ( Thirty-five ). 2. Write the complete sentences: -Working in pairs to do write the -Introduces the requirement & the exercise & complete sentences. Asks Ss to work in pairs to do write the - Comparing the keys & Giving the complete sentences. keys - Asks Ss to compare the keys. - Correcting the keys & the mistakes. - Asks Ss to give the keys - Corrects & comments. * Cues: 1. There / a river / near / my school.. 2. My father / engineer. 3. What / you / do / after school. 4. We / waiting / for / a train.. 5.There / rice paddy / in front of / my house.. * Answer keys: 1. There is a river near my school.. 3. My father is an engineer. 3. What do you do after school. 4. We are waiting for a train.. 5.There is a rice paddy in front of my house... IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2ms ): - Asks Ss to summarize the lesson. V.Homework:(2ms) - Study the grammar & the modal sentence re-do the test at home. - Prepare vocabulary & the pictures on page 96.. Pre: 18/8/2015 Tea: 19/8/2015 Period: 2 Unit 1 : Lesson 1 : Friends < A1, A4-5 > P.10-12 A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to make greeting and introduction with their friends. I. Knowledge . -Revision of simple present with : -. "Nice to meet you" "How is everything?" "just fine" / "not bad"/ "Pretty good". II. Skills - Speaking and reading skill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting - Check attendence. II- Revision.(5ms).

(3) My name’s Hoa a.What’s your name? b.How are you today ? c.What class are you in ? d.goodbye e.Are you a new student? III- New lesson .. Good bye. yes,I am. Class 7A. Teacher’s activities 1. Practice.(20ms) a.Matching -Put the poster on the board and ask Ss to match the words or phrases in column A to column B . A B a.Pretty good 1.Kh«ng tèt l¾m b.How is everything 2.T«i còng vËy c.Nice to see you 3.Kh¸ tèt d.So am I/ me, too 4.Mäi viÖc nh thÕ nµo e.Just fine 5.RÊt vui khi gÆp b¹n f.Not bad 6.B×mh thêng th«i -Ask Ss to go to the board and draw the line to correct the words. b.Gap- filling " A4 a)-b) p.12-13" -Ask Ss to use the word given to complete the dialogue(a) P.12 and dialogue (b) P.13 -Provide some words so that Ss can use them to fill in the gap. How are you today? Just fine So am I How are you? Not bad Me,too How is everything? Preey good How about you? OK. Very well,thanks. Students’activities. -Ss match the words or phrases in column A to column B. -Ss work on their own first then compare with their partners. -Ss listen and check. -Ss listen and write the letters of the dialogue in the order they hear.. *Answer key: (a)Mr.Tan: ......... How are you? Miss Lien : Pretty good,.......How about you,...? Mr.Tan: Not bad,.......... Miss Lien: Me,too. (b)Nam: ......How is everything? Nga: Ok,....How are you today,.....? Nam:Just fine,.... c.Picture cue drill - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to Nga:........ Nam:......So am I. practice. - Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to -Ss practice well Ss repeat in chorus & in repeat in chorus & in individual. individual. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in Ss make sentences for the next Ss checks & S’s practicing in groups & in pairs . groups & in pairs . -Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments -Prepare 4 picture so that Ss can drill easily. - A5 p.13 (Ss use the cues above) 2.Production (17ms) -Ss use the new greeting -"Mapped dialogue" expressions from the matching. *Open pair: -Ask some pairs to demonstrate the dialogue. *Closed pairs: -Ss practice well. -Ask Ss to work in pairs, replacing the -Some pairs practice each information using the tables. exchange before going on to -Monitor and correct. another exchange. T asks Ss to use the new greetings expressions from matching Ba Nam -After finishing the dialogue, ....morning... ...morning....

(4) Nice...again. ...thanks...about...?. ...,too. How...?..., ...thank you. goodbye. See.... some a good pair to demmonstrate the whole dialogue.. See. -Take notes. IV.Consolidation(1m) -T calls some pairs to practice the dialogue. - Ask Ss to give the question & the answer . V.Homework.(2ms) - Study the dialogue by heart,-Doing exercise :1,2 P.3-4 . -Preparing :Unit1:A2. Pre: 19/8/2015 Tea: 20/8/2015 Period: 3 Unit 1 : Lesson 2 : Friends < A2 ,3> P.11 A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the detail and revising simple present, comparisions, a lot of/many. I. Knowledge . -Revision of simple present with : comparisions, a lot of /many. II. Skills -Reading, speaking skills B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision.(5ms) -"Wordsquare " -Put the wordsquare poster on the board and inform the topic. -Divide the class into 2 teams. - Ask ss to find 11 hidden words and write them on the peice of paper. - Tell Ss the team to find out the most right words will get 2 points. Aunt,friend school,big,new,old,uncle parents. student,happy,live S T U D E N S. C T N U A E T. H B C J S W N. O I L I V E E. O G E T N U R. L H A P P Y A. D N E I R F P. III- New lesson . Teacher’s activities 1.Pre-reading.(7ms) a.Pre-teach T elicits to teach vocabulary. -different < adj > kh¸c nhau (Example) -unhappy < adj > kh«ng h¹nh phóc (antonym) -(to) miss : nhí (Explain) - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).. Students’activities. - Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the.

(5) Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the prounciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. b.Checking vocab. - R.O.R c.T/F statement prediction -Hang the poster of T/F statements on the board and ask Ss to work in pairs and guess which statements are true and which are false. a)Hoa is from Hue b)She lives with her parents in Ha Noi c)She has a lot of friends in Ha Noi d)She misses her friends in Hue e)She is happy now. -Give feedback. 2.While-reading(20ms) a.Ss read and correct their predictons -Ask Ss to read the text on P.11 and check their prediction. -Have Ss correct false statements. a.T b.F c.F d.T e.F b.Comprehension questions -Give Ss some questions in (A2 P.11 a)-e)) and ask them to work in pairs to answer them -T gives a game "Hangman" to ask and answer the questions. -Let some pairs of Ss to ask and answer the questions (Open pairs) -Let all Ss work in pairs (closed pairs) 3. Post-reading(10ms) - "Transformation writing" (from the text A2 P.11) -For weak Ss: change"Hoa" to "I" -For strong Ss: change the information and change" Hoa" to "I" -T controls and corrects.. pronunciation. - Copying the words.. -Ss close their book and predict the sentences. -Ss open their book and read the text then correct their answers -Ss play well ( whole class) -Ss work well. -Take notes. -Ss work in pairs to answer the questions. -Ss play the game "Hangman" well. -Take notes. *Answer key: a)She is from hue. b)She is staying with her uncle and aunt. c)No,She doesn’t have any friends in Ha Noi. d)Her new school is bigger than her old school. e)She is unhappy because she misses her parents and her friends. -Ss work individually-share with your partner. -Read the text you have just done.. IV.Consolidation(1m) -T calls some Ss to read their text. - Asks Ss to summarise the general idea of the lesson. V.Homework.(2ms) -Asks Ss to summarise the general idea of the lesson. -Doing exercise : 3 P.4-5 (work book) -Preparing :Unit1: B1-3. Pre: 23/8/2015 Tea: 24/8/2015 Period: 4 Unit 1 : Lesson 3 : Names and Addresses < B1-3 >P.15-16 A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to ask and give personal information( name, age, address) I. Knowledge . - Personal information ( name, age, address)..

(6) II. Skill - Reading & speaking skills. II. Teaching aids - Cards & posters B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision.(3ms) - "Noughts and Crosses": ( Ss ask and answer about the information given in the grids) Ex: S1: How old are you ? S2: I’m 13. you /13. 54 Quang Trung St.. her mother Your father Linh 41 19 Hung Vuong. III- New lesson . Teacher’s activities 1.Pre-reading.(7ms) a.Pre-teach T elicits to teach vocabulary. -family name (n) hä (example) -middle name (n) tªn lãt (example) -an address : địa chỉ (example) b. Checking vocab. - R.O.R c.Presentation dialogue - B1 P.15 d.Comprehension questions -T gives ss some questions in "B1 a)-d) P.15’ and ask them to play a game "shack attact" to ask and answer the questions - Let some pairs of Ss to ask and answer the questions (Open pairs) -Let all Ss work in pairs (closed pairs) 2. Practice(20ms) a.Word cue drill. T asks Ss depend on the model in the dialogue then put the orther dialogue (Ss use the cue work) Modle sentences: S1:What is Nam’s family name? S2:His family name is Nguyen. S1:How old is he? S2:He is 15 years old. S1:Where does he live? S2:He lives at 32 Nguyen Du street. a)Nam/nguyen/15/32 nguyen Du st. b)Hoa/ Pham/ 12/ Da nang c)Minh/ Tran/ 13/ tran hung Dao d)Thuy/ Bui/ 14/ 37 Le Hong Phong st. e)Hung/ Phan/ 16/ 64 Le Qui Don st. -Model two cues then ask Ss to repeat chorally the individually. -Ask some Ss to practice asking and answering. -Ask the whole class to work in pair. b.Complete the dialogue -Ask some questions to set the scene:. Nam. Hoa Le Loi st. grand-mother. Students’activities - Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words. -Ss playing well. -Ss listen then read the dialogue carefully. -Ss play well. *Answer key: a)She is talking to Miss Lien. b)Her family name is Pham. c)Her middle name is Thi. d)She lives at 12 Tran Hung Dao street. -Some pairs of Ss to ask and answer the questions (Open pairs) - Ss work in pairs (closed pairs) -Ss open their book and use the cue words to practice well. -Ss play well -Ss listen to the model two cues then Ss repeat chorally the individually. - Ss practice asking and.

(7) *Who are they? *What are they talking? *Does Hoa live on Tran Hung Dao street? *etc... -Ask Ss to read the dialogue and fill the missing words in the dialogue B2 P.16. -Let Ss work in pairs. -Give feedback. 3. Production(10ms) -B3 P.16 T asks Ss to ask your patner qs and fill in the form. Name:................................................. Age:.................................................... Grade:................................................. School:................................................ Home address:................................... answering. - whole class work in pair.. -Ss read the dialogue and fill the missing words in the dialogue B2 P.16. -Let Ss work in pairs. -Give feedback. Answer key: Who, Who, What, Where, Where, How -Ss ask your patner qs and fill in the form.. -T & ss correct. IV.Consolidation(1m) -T calls some Ss to read their text. - Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson. V.Homework.(2ms): - Study the vocabularies by heart . -Doing exercise : 3 P.4-5 (work book) -Preparing :Unit1:B4,5-7. Pre: 25/ 8 / 2015 Tea: 26 /8 / 2015 Period: 5 Unit 1 : Lesson 4 : Names and Addresses < B4-5 > P.16-17 A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to talk about distances I. Knowledge . - Using "How far...?" question and answer with "kilometers/meters" II. Skill -Reading & speaking skill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision.(3ms) -Put the wordsquare poster on the board and inform the topic. -Divide the class into 2 teams. -Ask ss to find 11 hidden words and write them on the peice of paper. -Tell Ss the team to find out the most right words will get 2 points. W H E R E. W W H Y W H E N B A O N Y T O N F R O M -Wordsquare :. why, when, on, to, from who, how what, where, at, by. III- New lesson . Teacher’s activities 1.Presentation.(10ms) a.Pre-teach T elicits to teach vocabulary. -far <adj > xa. Students’activities - Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus &.

(8) -distance < adj > kho¶ng c¸ch - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. b. Checking vocab. - R.O.R c.Presentation dialogue - B4 P.16-17 d.Model sentences: -T sets a scene to give the model sentences. S1: How far is it from your house to school? S2:About one kilometer./ 700 metrers. *Concept checking: Form: How far is it + from +S1+to +S2 ? Use: talk about distances e.Comprehension questions -Ask Ss to work in pairs and answer some questions -Give feedback. a) Where does Hoa live ? (12 Tran Hung Dao) b) Is it far from school ? (No) c) How far does she get there ? (By bike) *Answer key: a)She lives at 12 Tran Hung Dao street. b)No,it isn’t. c)She gets there by bike. -Ask Ss to prctice asking and answering questions. 2. Practice(20ms) - "Picture drill." - B5 P.17 T asks Ss to depend on the model sentences (Ss use the pictures to practice) -Model two pictures then ask Ss to repeat chorally then individually. -Ask some Ss to practice asking and answering. -Ask the whole class to work in pairs.. in individual. Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words.. -Ss play well. -Ss listen then read the dialogue carefully. -Ss practice and give the concept check. -Ss play well. -Copy down on their note books. -Ss open their book and use the picture practice well. -Ss depend on the model sentences -Ss repeat chorally then individually.. -Ss practice asking and answering. -whole class to work in pairs. Example: S1:How far is ti from your house 3.Production (10ms) to the market? -T asks ss to write B5, P.16 in the notebook. S2;It’s 3 kms. -T asks ss to change the answer to correct their ......etc...... mistakes. -Ss listen and takes notes. -Ss taking notes. IV.Consolidation(1m) -T asks Ss to read the model sentences andgive the concept check. - Ask Ss to give the question used to ask the distance. How far is it + from +S1+to +S2 ? - Asks Ss to summarise the general idea of the lesson. V.Homework.(1m) - Learning by heart vocabulary and the model sentence( form, use ) -Doing exercise : 4 P.5 (work book) -Preparing :Unit1 . B 6-7.

(9) Pre: 26/ 8 / 2015 Tea: 27 / 8 / 2015 Period: 6 Unit 1 : Lesson 5 : Names and Addresses < B6-7 > P.18 A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to talk about name, address, means of transport, distances I. Knowledge . - Using "How do you go to school?"" what’s your name/ middle name/ family name ? "How far...?" ..question and answer. II. Skill- listening skill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting. II- Revision. III- New lesson . Teacher’s activities Students’activities 1.Pre-listening.(10ms) a.Pre-teach T elicits to teach vocabulary. - Listening to the words. -mean (n) ph¬ng tiÖn - Repeating the words in chorus & -transport (n) giao th«ng in individual. Correcting the -theater (n) nhµ h¸t - Introduces the words by explaining the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). pronunciation. - Copying the words. Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the prounciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. b. Checking vocab. - what and where c.Lead in. -T gives the picture and ask ss to give the places in this pictures. -T asks some questions. +Is Lan’s house near the market? + Is Lan’s house far from school? +Is Lan’s house near the post office? ...etc. -T asks ss to take note the model: How far is it from...to...? It’s...(kilo)meters. d. Pre-questions T gives 4 questions and asks ss to think about the answers. 1. How far is it from Lan’s house to school? 2. How far is it from Lan’s house to the post office? 3. How far is it from school to the movie theater? 4. How far is it from movie theater to post office ? 2. While-listening(20ms) -T turns on the tape(2-3-4) times -T asks ss to work in groups to do.. -Ss play well. -Ss listen then read the dialogue carefully. Answer: -Lan’s house, school, post office, market, theater. -Ss guess the answer.. -Ss read the questions and think the way to answer the questions.. -Ss work in 4 groups to do. Answer key: 1.It’s 300meters.

(10) -T calls ss to answer.. 3.Post-listening (10ms) "survey" - B7 P.18 -Ask ss to copy down the chart (on P.18): -Ask Ss to work in groups of three to ask their friend and tick on the chart. -Give feedback by asking Ss to report their friends’hobbies. Eg: My friend is Dung. She lives at 8 Le Qui Don street. It’s about 3 kilometers from her house to her school.... -T asks Ss to ask your patner qs and fill in the form. Ex: *What’s your name? *Where do you live? *How far is it from your house to school? *How do you go to school? Name Address Distance. 1. Dung 8LeQuiDon st 3km. 2. 3. 2.It’s 700 meters. 3.It’s 3 kilometers. 4.It’s 2 kilometers. -Copy down on their note books. -Ss play well -Ss orally report back. -Ex: My friend is Dung. She lives at 8 Le Qui Don street. It’s about 3 kilometers from her house to her school.Sh -Ss ask and answer your partner the qs. -Take notes. -Ss ask your patner questions and fill in the form.. Transport bike -Ss taking notes. -T controls and corects. IV.Consolidation(1m) -T asks Ss to read the model sentences andgive the concept check. - Asks Ss to summarise the general idea of the lesson. V.Homework.(1m) - Learning by heart vocabulary and the model sentence( form, use ) - Doing exercise : 5 P.5 (work book) and prepare :Unit2 . A1-3. Pre: 06/ 9 / 2015 Tea: 07/ 9 / 2015 Period: 7 Unit 2 : PERSONAL INFORMATION Lesson 1 : TELEPHONE NUMBER <A1-3> 19-20 A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to ask and give telephone numbers and further practice in addresses. I. Knowledge .Telephone numbers and addresses. II. Skill - Reading & speaking drill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision. (3ms) - B 6 P.18 (Ss listen and write the 4 distances) (1) Lan’s house(2) school. the post office (3). the theater(4). -Answer key.1. 300m 2. 700m 3. 3km 4. 2km III- New lesson ..

(11) Teacher’s activities 1.Presentation.(10ms) a.Pre-teach -(to) call : gäi -(to) call somebody : gọi ai đó Ex: call Lan/ my mother. b. Checking vocab. - R.O.R c.Presentation text - Introduces & Asks Ss to read the text. - Checks S’s reading. - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments - A3 P.20 d.Model sentences: T sets a sence to give the model sentences. S1: What’s your telephone number ? his her S2:< 825455>. 2.Practice(20ms) -"Word cue drill" - A1 P.19-20 -Van anh/553646 -Qui Bang/825211 -Xuan Ba/852637 -Mai Le/630069 T asks Ss to depend on the model sentences (Ss use the word cue to practice) 3.Further practice "Noughts and Crosses" - Introduces the way to practice & devides the class into 2 groups to practice. - Helps Ss to practice. - Corrects & comments * Ss use these questions: 1. What’s her/his name ? 2. What’s her/his telephone number ? 3. Where does he/she live ? 4.Production.(7ms) "survey" P.20 - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work in pairs to interview each other & take note the information. - Asks Ss to report the imformation about their friends. - Corrects & comments. Name Address telephone number Lan 12 le loi 853444 .... ..... IV.Consolidation(2ms). Students’activities - Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. - Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words. -Ss play well. - Reading the text. - Correcting the pronunciation. -Ss play well. -Ss use the word cue to practice well. - Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs . - Correcting the pronunciation.. -Take notes. -Ss enjoy the game - Practicing in groups. - Correcting the answer keys. A/821 6 Nguyen Viet Anh 1800 Cong Tru 13 Hang Bich/ 34 Tran Dong 8231263 Phu Thi Bang Cong Bao/ Thach Anh 782 1652. - Working in pairs to interview each other & taking note the information. - Reporting the imformation about their friends..

(12) - Ask Ss to give the question used to ask the telephone number. S1: What [ his/ her] telephone number ? S2: [7685098]. - Asks Ss to summarise the general idea of the lesson -T asks Ss to read the model sentences and give the concept check. V.Homework.(3ms) : - Study the modal exchange . - Doing exercise : 1 P.5 (work book)-Preparing :Unit2: A4-5 *Feedback. Pre: 08/ 9 / 2015 Tea: 09/ 9 / 2015 Period: 8 Unit 2 : Lesson 2 : TELEPHONE NUMBER <A4-5> P.21 A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to talk about sure events in the future. -Helps Ss to practice in using the “Will” future positive statements & “Wh” questions. By the end of this lesson, Ss understand the way to use these modals to talk about sure events in the future I. Knowledge .The "will" future, positive statements and "WH"questions. II. Skill -Reading & speaking drill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision. (3ms) -Jumbled words - Asks Ss to re-order the letters to form the right words ese =see trast =start vomei =movie romtprow = tomorrow tale = late rehatte=theater III- New lesson Teacher’s activities Students’activities 1.Presenttation.(10ms) a.Pre-teach. T elicits to teach vocabulary. -(to) meet : gÆp -free < adj > r·nh ræi b.Presentation dialogue. (reading). T asks ss to tead the dialogue carefully to get the main ideas. - Introduces & helps Ss to read the dialogue. - Checks S’s reading. - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. -A4 P.21 c. Comprehension questions. -A4 P.21 - Introduces the questions & Asks Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions. - Asks Ss to give the answers & corrects. * Questions: a. Who will meet tomorrow ? b. What will they do ? c. What time will they meet ? d. Where wil they meet ? d. Model sentences: -T sets a sence to give the model sentences.. Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. - Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words. - Reading the dialogue. - Correcting the pronunciation. -Ss give the short answers only because Ss haven’t learnt "WILL" yet. - Working in pairs to answer the questions. - Giving the answers & correcting. * Answers: a. Phong and Tam. b. See a movie. c. At 6.45. d. In front of the movie theater..

(13) S1: Where will we meet ? S2: We’ll meet in front of the movie theater. Form: Where + Will + S + V(inf) ? S + Will +V(inf) + O Use:Ask and answer about the future. 2.Practice.(17ms) a. "substitution drill." - Introduces the content & reads the modal to helps Ss replace. - Practices with Ss in individual. - Corrects S’s mistakes & comments. * Teacher says: - Where will we meet ? - you. - What time - go - How - What / see b."Word cue drill." -Where/ meet? in the street -What time/ meet? at 7:00 -What/see? a film -How/go ? by bike Ex: S1: Where will we meet ? S2: We’ll meet in the street. 3.Further practice.(10ms) - A5 P.21 - Asks ss to listen to the content & get the information & fill in the table. - Asks Ss to give the keys. - Corrects & comments. * Keys: a.8 537 471.b.a movie c.6.45. d.by bike.. -Ss give the concept check. -Ss copy the"Model & form & use"on their notebook and learn by heart. - Replacing the given words. - Practicing with the teacher in individual. - Correcting the mistakes. Students replace: - Where will we meet ? - Where will you meet ? - What time will you meet ? - What time will you go ? - How will you go ? - What will you see ? Example exchange: - Where will we meet ? - [ We’ll ] meet in the street. - Listening to the content & getting the information & filling in the table. - Giving the answers. - Correcting the answer keys. aTelephone number:............ b.They will see:.................... c. They will meet at:................ d. They will go by:............... IV.Consolidation(3ms) -T asks Ss to read the model sentences and give the concept check. - Ask Ss to give the question used to ask the “Will” future positive statements & “Wh” questions.. * Where will we meet ? - We’ll meet... * What time will we meet ? - We’ll... - Asks Ss to summarise the general idea of the lesson. V.Homework.(2ms) - Study the modal exchange -Doing exercise : 3 P.5 (work book) -Preparing :Unit2: A6-7. Pre: 09/ 9 / 2015 Tea: 10/9/ 2015 Period: 9 Unit 2 : Lesson 3 : TELEPHONE NUMBERS < A6-7 > P.22-23 A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to talk about sure events in the future. I.Knowledge -The "will" future. II. Skill - Reading and speaking drill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision..

(14) III- New lesson . Teacher’s activities 1.Presentation.(10ms) a.Pre- teach. T elicits to teach vocabulary. -Who’s calling? Ai đang gọi(điện thoại) đó -Can I speak to ...,please? Lµm ¬n cho t«igÆp(nãi chuyÖn) víi.... -I’ll call again.. T«i sÏ gäi( ®iÖn tho¹i) l¹i b.Presentation dialogue. - A6 P.22 T asks ss to tead the dialogue carefully to get the main ideas. - Introduces & helps Ss to read the dialogue. - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. 2.Practice.(20ms) a.Comprehension questions- A6 P.22 a)-e) T gives agame "Hangman" to ask and answer the questions. b.Answers given T uses the tittle of A7 P.22 to set the scene. a) At five thisty. b) We’ll eat cakes and sweet. c) Till sevsn or half past d) We’ll meet in the street. Answer key. a)When will the party be ? b) What will we eat ? c) How long will the party past ? e) Where will we meet?. 3.Production (10ms) -"Mapped dialogue" -Set a scene -Put the mapped dialogue chart on the board -Elicit the exchanges from Ss -Have some pairs practice each exchange before going on to another exchange. -After finishing the dialogue,ask a good pair to demmonstrate the whole dialogue. *Open pair: -Ask some pairs to demonstrate the dialogue. *Closed pairs: -Ask Ss to work in pairs, replacing the information using the tables. -Monitor and correct. T asks Ss to use the new greetings expressions from matching Tan Nam What...do tomorow morning?. go...stadium.. What...watch?. a football match/ Would...like...with me ?. Yes. When...start?. 4:30/...meet at 4:15.. Where...meet? OK !. in front of...stadium.. Students’activities - Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. - Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words. -Ss listen and read the dialogue. - Reading the dialogue. - Correcting the pronunciation. -Ss give the short answers only because Ss haven’t learnt "WILL" yet. -Ss enjoy the game. _take notes -Answer key. a) Phong is calling. b) Han is answering the phone. c) They are talking about Lan. d) She will be back at about 6 o’clock. e) He’ll call her again after 6 Ss work on their own first then compare with their partners. -Ss listen and check. -Ss listen and write the letters of the dialogue in the order they hear. -Ss practice. -Some pairs practice each exchange before going on to another exchange -SS practice in pairs to demonstrate the dialogue -Ss work in pairs, replacing the information using the tables. -Ss use the new greetings expressions from matching -good pair to demmonstrate the whole dialogue..

(15) IV.Consolidation(3ms) -T calls some pairs to practice the dialogue. V.Homework.(2ms) -Doing exercise : (work book) -Preparing :Unit2:B 1-3,9 *Feedback. Pre: 13/ 9 / 2015 Tea: 14 /9/ 2015 Period: 10- Unit 2 : Lesson 4: MY BIRTHDAY <B1,2,3,9>P.24-25-28 A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to talk about dates of a year and the pronunciation. I. Knowledge . The dates of a year and the pronunciation II. Skill -Reading & speaking drill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision. (3ms) -"Pelmanism" 1st 2nd 10th 5th 3rd 9th first second third fifth ninth tenth III- New lesson . Teacher’s activities Students’activities 1.Presentation.(10ms) - Listening to the words. a. Pre -teach. - Repeating the words in chorus & T elicits to teach vocabulary. in individual. Correcting the -twelfth =12th : ngµy 12 mistakes. -twentieth = 20th : ngµy 20 - Giving the meaning & the -twenty-first = 21st :ngµy 21 pronunciation. -thirtieth = 30th :ngµy 30 - Copying the words. -thirty-first =31st :ngµy 31 b. Checking vocabulary. T gives 2 games to check vocab. -" R.O.R" -"Jumbled words" nb: T uses these two because the spelling and the pronunciation are both important. -Ss enjoy the game. c.Guess from the new words - Guessing the months of the year. -B1 P.24 - Matching the months. Months of a year. - Correcting the keys. T gives a game "Matching " to practice. January Th¸ng 10 January th¸ng 10 February Th¸ng 7 february th¸ng 7 March Th¸ng 5 march th¸ng 5 April Th¸ng 12 April th¸ng 12 May Th¸ng 1 May th¸ng 1 June Th¸ng 4 June th¸ng 4 July Th¸ng 9 July th¸ng 9.

(16) august th¸ng 2 September th¸ng 6 October th¸ng 11 November th¸ng3 December th¸ng 8 - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to guess the months of the year. - Asks Ss to match the months. - Corrects & comments. 2.practice(20ms) Listen & write. B2- P24. - Introduces the requirement & ask Ss to listen to the dates & copy down. - Asks Ss to work in pairs to compare the dates which they copied. - Asks Ss to listen to the dates again & check - Asks Ss to give the answers & corrects. 4. Write in order: B3- P24. - Asks Ss to -read the months & put them in the order from first to twelve. - Asks Ss to compare the keys. - Asks Ss to to give the key. - Corrects & comments 3.Production(10ms) -"survey" Name Thao ...... Birthday July 19th ....... August September October November December. Th¸ng 2 Th¸ng 6 Th¸ng 11 Th¸ng 3 Th¸ng 8. - Listening to the dates & copying down.- Working in pairs to compare the dates which they copied. - Giving the answers & correcting. - Reading the months & putting them in the order from first to twelve. - Comparing the keys. - Giving the key. -Ss listen and write the dates -Ss erite the months in order from first to twelfth. Ex: S1: What’s your name ? S2: My name’s Thao S1: When’s your birthday? S2: July 19th. -Take notes.. -T contrls and corrects IV. Consolidation.(2ms) - Ask Ss to give the dates & the months of the year. - Ask Ss to give the question & the answer used to ask the birthday. S1: When’s your birthday ? S2: [ July 19th ] - Asks Ss to summarise the general idea of the lesson. V.Homework.(1ms) - Study the modal exchange . - Practice writing the celemonies of the year & the months in the four seasons. - Prepare the Calendar. -Preparing : Unit 2 : B4-5. *Feedback. Pre: 15/ 9 / 205 Tea: 16 / 9 / 2015 Period: 11- Unit 2 : Lesson 5: MY BIRTHDAY <B4-5> P.25-26 A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understant the detail about factual information..

(17) I. Knowledge .Factual information II. Skill - Reading skill B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision. III.New lesson Teacher’s activities 1. Pre-reading. (12ms) a.Pre teach. T elicits to teach vocabulary. -Date of birth. ngµy sinh (example) -(to) worry : lo l¾ng (mime) -nervous : lo l¾ng(mime) -won’t = Will not. sÏ kh«ng b.Checking vocab. - ‘Slap the board" c.Open prediction - Asks Ss to predict the information about Hoa & fill in the form. - Asks Ss to give their prediction. - Comments 2.While-reading.(20ms) - Introduces the requirement & ask Ss to listen to the dialogue - Asks Ss to work in pairs to compare the information about Hoa which they copied. - Asks Ss to listen to the information about Hoa again & check - Asks Ss to give the answers & corrects. * Keys: Student Registration Form Name: Pham Thi Hoa Date of birth: June Eight. Address: 12 THD Street Tel: 8 262 019. Students’activities - Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words. -Ss enjoy the games. - Predicting the information about Hoa & filling in the form. - Giving their prediction.. - Listening to the information about Hoa & copying down.- Working in pairs to compare the information about Hoa which they copied. - Checking information about Hoa. - Giving the answers & correcting. Student Registration Form Name:........................................................... Date of birth:............................................... Address:....................................................... Tel:................................................................ b.Comprehension questions. * Questions: a. How old is Hoa now ? b. How old will she be on her next - Working in pairs to ask & answer the birthday? questions. c. When is hee birthday ? - Giving the answer keys. d. Who does Hoa live with ?. - Correcting the answer keys e. Why is Hoa worried ?. &Commenting * Answer: -T gives 5 qs in B4 P.25 a)-e) to ask Ss a. She is 13 years old now.. to play a game " Hangman" to ask and b. She will be14 on her next birthday. answer the qs. c. It’s in June eighth d. She lives with her uncle & aunt. e. Because she doesn’t have any friends. 2. Post-reading.(10ms) -"Write it up" - Working in pairs to ask & answer - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss about the police record on part 8 page 41 to work in pairs to ask & answer about (language focus 1) the police record on part 8 page 41 - Writing the information about (language focus 1) themselves. - Asks Ss to write the information about - Giving their writing. themselves B4- P25 ( f-h ). Police Record - Asks Ss to give their writing. Name:...................................................

(18) - Corrects & comments.. . ... ... Age:................................................... Address:.............................................. Job:....................................................... IV. Consolidation.(2ms) -T calls some Ss to read their writing. - Ask Ss to give the dates & the months of the year. - Ask Ss to give the question & the answer used to ask the birthday. - Asks Ss to summarise the general idea of the lesson. V.Homework.(1ms) - Study the dialogue by heart & answer the questions f-h p.5 . -Writing the student form base on the form B5 - p26 -Preparing : Unit 2 : B 6-8 *Feedback. Pre: 16/ 9 / 2015 Tea: 17/9 / 2015 Period: 12 Unit 2 : Lesson 6: MY BIRTHDAY <B6-7-8> P.26-27 A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understant the way to write an invitation to a party. I. Knowledge . - Writing an invitation to a party. II. Skill - Writing skill B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision. (5ms) -"Lucky number" 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1.What’s your family name? 6.What’s your date of birth? 2.How old are you? 7.Who do you live with? 3.L 8.How old will you be on your next birthday? 4.What’s your adress? 9L 5.What’s your telephone number? 10. L III. New lesson. Teacher’activities Students’activities 1. Pre-writing(12ms) a.Pre teach. T elicits to teach vocabulary. -(to) have a party :cã mét böa tiÖc -(to) invite : lêi mêi -an invitatio n card - Introduces the words by explaining the - Listening to the words..

(19) meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the prounciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. b.Checking vocab. - R.O.R c.Comprehension questions. a) How old is Lan now? (12) b) How old will she be on next birthday? (13) c) When’s her birthday? (May 25th) d) Where will the party be? (At her house) e) What’s her adress? (24 Ly Thuong Kiet) f) How long will the party last? (From 5 p:m to 9 p:m) - Introduces the questions & Asks Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions. - Asks Ss to give the answers & corrects. 2. While- writing.(20ms) a.Gap fill -Provide some words so that Ss can use them to fill in the gap. - B6 P.27. b.Questions and answers. - Introduces the questions & Asks Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions. - Asks Ss to give the answers & corrects. -B7 P.27 a)-f) 3. Post-writing.(5ms) - B8 P.27 T controls and corrects.. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words.. -Ss enjoy the game.. - Working in pairs to ask & answer the questions. - Giving the answer keys. - Correcting the answer keys &Commenting Answer keys: a. She’s 12 years old b. She’ll be 13 on next birthday. c. It’s on May 25th. d. It’ll be at her house. e. She lives at 12 Ly Thuong Kiet. f. It’ll last from 5pm to 9 pm.. -Ss doing well.. - Working in pairs to ask & answer the questions. - Giving the answer keys. - Correcting the answer keys &Commenting -Ss work in groups to practice.. IV. Consolidation.(2ms) -T calls some Ss to read their writing. V.Homework.(1ms) -Doing exercise : -Preparing : Unit 3 : A1 *Feedback.

(20) 15-MINUTE TEST-1 Name: ............................................ Class: 7..................... I. Chọn câu trả lời đúng nhất (5 điểm). 1. .......................... a beautiful day ! A. It B. What C. How 2. A doctor .................. care of sick people. A. gets B. takes C. talks 3. A................... writes for a newspaper. A. teacher B. journalist C. farmer 4. What an ......................... house! A. lovely B. nice C. awful 5. A farmer works on a ........................... . A. factory B. hospital C. school II. Đọc đoạn văn và trả lời câu hỏi (5 điểm).. D. Is D. gives D. doctor D. big D. farm. Lan is 12. She will be 13 on Sunday, May 15 th . She will have a party for her birthday. She will invite some of her friends. She lives at 14 Ly Thuong Kiet Street. The party will be at her home. It will start at 5 o’clock in the evening and finish at nine. Questions: 1. How old is Lan now? è……………………………………………………………………………………… 2. When’s her birthday? è……………………………………………………………………………………… 3. Where does she live? è……………………………………………………………………………………… 4. What time will the party start? è……………………………………………………………………………………… 5. Who will she invite? è………………………………………………………………………………………. Pre: 21/ 9 / 2014. Tea: 22/ 9/ 2014 Period:13 Khong day Unit 3 : AT HOME Lesson 1 : WHAT A LOVELY HOME ! <A1,3> P.29-31 A . Objectives ..

(21) - Helps Ss to practice in bathroom & kitchen vocabulary. By the end of this lesson, Ss can describe their bathroom & kitchen. I. Knowledge .Bathrom and kitchen vocab. II. Skill -Reading and speaking drill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision. (5ms) - Hepls Ss to play the game. - Corrects & comments.. * The words for the game: 1. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ (Televition). 2. _ _ _ _ _ (chair). 3. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ (Picture).. III- New lesson Teacher’s activities 1. Presentation(10ms) a.Pre teach. T elicits to teach vocabulary. -a bathroom : Phßng t¾m (picture) -a kichen : nhµ bÕp (explaination) -a sink : (picture) -a washing machine :m¸y giÆt (picture) -a dishwasher : m¸y r÷a chÐn b¸t (picture) -a dryer : m¸y sÊy tãc (picture) -a tub:bån t¾m (picture) -a refrigerator : tñ l¹nh (picture) b.Checking vocab. - Introduces the keyword & ask Ss to work in individual to find out the information about the topic. - Asks Ss to compare the information with their partner & fill in the networks. - Corrects & comments. 2.Practice(20ms) -A3 P.31 a.T/F repetition drill. (Picture A3P31) - Reads the model & Asks Ss to repeat in chorus as if the statement is true. - Corrects & comments S’s mistakes. - There’s a television. - There’s a washing machine. - There’s a sink. - There are some chairs. - There’s a refrigerator. - There are two pictures. b.Deliberate mistakes. -(Picture of the kitchen P.30) This is the picture of the kitchen. The television is next to the refrigerator. There’s a washing machine between the dishwasher and the electric stove. There’s a dining table with 5 chairs. Beside the washing machine is the tub. -Answer key. ( dishwasher, sink, dryer). Students’activities - Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words.. - Working in individual to find out the information about the topic. -"Networks" .... bathrom. House .... - Repeating in chorus as if the statement is true. [ Repeat] [ Silent] [ Silent] [ Repeat] [ Silent] [ Repeat]. -Ss look at A3 and read A3.

(22) 2. further practice.(7ms) -"chain game". - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to play in two groups to practice talking about the kitchen. - Corrects & comments. Ex: S1: There’s a stove in the kitchen. S2: There’s a stove and a sink in the kitchen. S3: ... -T contrls and corrects.. -Ss practice well. - Working in individual to talk about the kitchen. Model: S1: There’s a stove in the kitchen. S2: There’s a stove & a sink in the kitchen S2: There’s a stove & a sink & a tub in the kitchen... -Ss take notes.. IV. Consolidation.(2ms) - Asks Ss to summarise the general idea of the lesson. - Asks Ss to talk about their kitchen. -T calls some Ss to read their writing. V.Homework.(1m) - Study the vocabularies & the model by heart . -Writing write something about your kitchen. -Doing exercise : 7 (Language focus P.4 -Preparing : Unit 3 : A-2. Pre: 20/ 9 / 2015. Tea: 21/ 9/ 2015 Period:13 Unit 3 : AT HOME Lesson 1 : WHAT A LOVELY HOME ! <A1> P.29-30 A . Objectives . - Helps Ss to practice in bathroom & kitchen vocabulary. By the end of this lesson, Ss can describe their bathroom & kitchen. I. Knowledge .Bathrom and kitchen vocab. II. Skill -Reading and speaking drill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision. (5ms) - Hepls Ss to play the game. - Corrects & comments.. * The words for the game: 1. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ (Televition). 2. _ _ _ _ _ (chair). 3. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ (Picture).. III- New lesson Teacher’s activities 3. Presentation(10ms) a.Pre teach. T elicits to teach vocabulary. -a bathroom : Phßng t¾m (picture) -a kichen : nhµ bÕp (explaination) -a sink : (picture) -a washing machine :m¸y giÆt (picture). Students’activities - Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words..

(23) -a dishwasher : m¸y r÷a chÐn b¸t (picture) -a dryer : m¸y sÊy tãc (picture) -a tub:bån t¾m (picture) -a refrigerator : tñ l¹nh (picture) b.Checking vocab. - Introduces the keyword & ask Ss to work in individual to find out the information about the topic. - Asks Ss to compare the information with their partner & fill in the networks. - Corrects & comments. 2.Practice(20ms) *.Deliberate mistakes. -(Picture of the kitchen P.30) This is the picture of the kitchen. The television is next to the refrigerator. There’s a washing machine between the dishwasher and the electric stove. There’s a dining table with 5 chairs. Beside the washing machine is the tub. -Answer key. ( dishwasher, sink, dryer) 3.further practice.(7ms) -"chain game". - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to play in two groups to practice talking about the kitchen. - Corrects & comments. Ex: S1: There’s a stove in the kitchen. S2: There’s a stove and a sink in the kitchen. S3: ... -T contrls and corrects.. - Working in individual to find out the information about the topic. -"Networks" .... bathrom. House .... - Repeating in chorus as if the statement is true.. -Ss practice well. - Working in individual to talk about the kitchen. Model: S1: There’s a stove in the kitchen. S2: There’s a stove & a sink in the kitchen S2: There’s a stove & a sink & a tub in the kitchen... -Ss take notes.. IV. Consolidation.(2ms) - Asks Ss to summarise the general idea of the lesson. - Asks Ss to talk about their kitchen. -T calls some Ss to read their writing. V.Homework.(1m) - Study the vocabularies & the model by heart . -Writing write something about your kitchen. -Doing exercise : 7 (Language focus P.41) -Preparing : Unit 3 : A-2.

(24) Pre: 22/ 9 / 2015. Tea: 23/ 9/ 2015 Period: 14. Unit 3: at home Lesson 2: What lovely home .A2-p.30-31 A- Objectives. - Help ss make exclamation: What + a / an + adj + n! - By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to make complaints and compliments. - Develop 4 skills; listen, speaking, reading and writing. B- Procedures: Teacher s activities I/ Organization. (1ms) greeting “Who’s absent today? ” II.Checking up,(6ms) -Ask ss to work in pair: one asks, the other answers by using: Is there a / an .......? Are there any.......? in the picture on page 31. - T corrects and gives them marks. III.New lesson (7ms) 1/ Pre – teach: *Vocabulary: T presents some new words. - Awful( adj ) = Terrible : kinh khñng, tåi tÖ (explanation) - expensive ( adj ) >< cheap : đắt ( antonym ) - bad ( adj ) >< good : xÊu ( antonym ) - boring ( adj ) : buån rÇu, tÎ nh¹t ( example ) - delicious( adj ) : ngon ( translation ) - comfortable ( adj ) : tho¶i m¸i ( translation ) - convenient ( adj ) : thuËn tiÖn ( translation) - modern ( adj ) : hiện đại ( translation)  Check: matching. 2/ Grammar .(15ms) Exclamations : T sets the scene :. Lan Hoa: What an awful day! This is my bedroom. Lan: What a bright bedroom! - Rub out and remember dialogue.. Hoa. Ss activities - Greeting. -Work in pair.. - Listen and repeat in chorus – individual. - Copy down.. - Match words. - Listen and repeat in chorus- individually.. - Translate - Give use and form.. - T – whole class - Half – half - Open pairs. - Close pairs. - Rewrite..

(25)  Concept check : + Meaning: translate into Vietnamese. + Use: to give one’s complaining and compliment. + Form: What + a / an + adj + n! + Pronunciation: falling at the end of the sentence. 3/ Practice.(7ms) word cues dill. - T runs through the cues. * kitchen / amazing * dress / expensive * restaurant / awful * dinner/ delicious * party / boring - T and ss correct together 4 / Production .(5ms) ( writing ) - T hangs 5 cues on the board and ask ss to rewrite what they have done. - T walks round and does direct corrections. IV- Consolidation .(3ms) T says again how to make the exclamations : What + a / an + adj + n ! V- Homework. (1ms) Ask ss to do exercise 2 on page 13 – workbook. - Retell the main points of this lesson - Copy down homework.. Test 15 minutes Class: 7…. Name: ………………………………… II.Khoanh tròn đáp án đúng A,B,C or D . 1.What is your ___________ name? – It’s Pham. A. family B.first C.full D.middle 2_____________ is your address? A. What B. Where C.How D.When 3.How far is it____________your school__________the bus stop? A.to/ from B.from/ to C.to/ in D. in/ to 4.Nice to see you again! – Nice to see you,__________ . A.so B.to C.soon D.too 5. __________a boring book ! A.How B.What C.Where D.When II.Viết lại câu theo gợi ý 1.When is his birthday? What________________________________________________________________? 2.Where do you live? What_______________________________________________________________? 3.What about going on a picnic?.

(26) Let’s ________________________________________________________________. 4.The movie is very interesting.. What______________________________________________________________! 5.How old is she? What______________________________________________________________? Test 15 minutes Class: 7 …. Name: ………………………………… II.Khoanh tròn đáp án đúng A,B,C or D . 1.What is your ___________ name? – It’s Pham. A. family B.first C.full D.middle 2_____________ is your address? A. What B. Where C.How D.When 3.How far is it____________your school__________the bus stop? A.to/ from B.from/ to C.to/ in D. in/ to 4.Nice to see you again! – Nice to see you,__________ . A.so B.to C.soon D.too 5. __________a boring book ! A.How B.What C.Where D.lWhen II.Viết lại câu theo gợi ý 1.When is his birthday? What________________________________________________________________? 2.Where do you live? What_______________________________________________________________? 3.What about going on a picnic? Let’s ________________________________________________________________. 4.The movie is very interesting. What______________________________________________________________! 5.How old is she? What______________________________________________________________?. Pre: 23/ 9 / 2015 Tea: 24/ 9/ 2015. Period:15. Unit 3 Lesson 3: HOA’S FAMILY <B1, 3> P.33-35. A . Objectives . Helps Ss to read a text about Hoa’s family. By the end of this lesson, Ss get some main ideas, details & job vocabulary. I. Knowledge . -Job vocabulary. II. Skill -Reading skill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting(1m) II- Revision. III.New lesson. Teacher’s activities Students’activities 1. Pre-reading(10ms) - Listening to the words. a.Pre teach - Repeating the words in T elicits to teach vocabulary..

(27) -. (to) raise (cattle): (to) take care of cattle(n) a journalist a newspaper. b.Checking vocab. - ‘R.O.R" c.Matching. -B3 P.35 *A farmer * writes for a newspaper *A doctor * works on a farm *A journalist * teaches in a school *A teacher -Devides the words & the meaning into two columns & asks Ss to work in individual to match the meaning to the words. -Corrects & comments. d.T/F statement prediction 1) Hoa’s father is a worker. 2) Her mother does the housework and help on the farm. 3) Her sister is ten. 4) Lan’s father takes care of sick people 5) Her mother is a doctor. 6) Her brother works on a farm.. chorus & in individual. - Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words.. -Working in individual to match the meaning to the words. *Answer keys: *A farmer works on a farm *A doctor takes care of sick people *A journalist writes for a newspaper *A teacher teaches in a school -Ss read quickly and predict which statements are T or F ?. -Ss read the text and check their prediction.. 2. While-reading.(20ms) - Working in pairs to discuss a.T asks Ss to read the text and correct their the answers. prediction. - Giving the keys . *Answer key. - Correcting & commenting. 1. F 2.T 3.F 4.T 5.F 6.F b.Comprehension questions. - Working in pairs to answer -B1 P.33-34 qs a)-f) the questions. - Introduces the questions & Asks Ss to work in - Giving the answers & pairs to answer the questions. correcting. - Asks Ss to give the answers & corrects. * Answers: a. He’s a farmer. b. He works on his farm. 3.Further practice.(10ms) c. She is a housewife d.. Her mother does the - "survey" housework & helps on the Member Age job place of work farm Father e. Yes, they are. Mother f. She is eight. Brother -Working in pairs to interview Sister - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work in each other & taking note the pairs to interview each other & take note the information about their family information about their family members into the members into the table. - Reporting the information table. - Asks Ss to report the information about their about their family members. family members. - Corrects & comments. -Ss take notes. -T controls and corrects. IV. Consolidation.(2ms) -T calls some Ss to read the model and give again the concept check..

(28) -Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson. V.Homework.(2ms) - Study the vocabulary & the comprehension answers. - Exercise: Write the information about their family members. - Prepare some information about their parents. - Preparing : Unit 3 : B2,4. Pre: 27/ 9 / 2015. Tea: 28/ 9/ 2015 Period:16 Unit 3 Lesson 4: HOA’S FAMILY <B2,4-> P.35-36 I. Objective After the lesson, Ss will know the work of each job, and listen to the tape in order to know the information then complete the forms. II. Language content: 1. Vocabulary : Review the vocabulary about the jobs. 2. Grammar: Review : the present simple tense. Skill : Listening. III. Teaching method Eliciting, communicative. IV. Teaching aids: Textbook, tape , cassette, sub- board. V. Procedure: T’s Activities 1. Warm up: - Greetings. - Ask Ss some questions about their families, such as: What does your father do? Where does he work? What does your mother do? Do you have any brothers / sisters? How old is he/ she? - Remark and give mark. 2. New activities. a) Match these half- sentences. - Exlpain the aim of the exercise and ask Ss to do. - Have Ss exchange the result with the partner. - Call on some Ss to read the completed sentences in front of the class. - Correct and give the correct answers: + A farmer works on a farm. + A doctor takes care of sick people. + A journalist writes for a newspaper. + A teacher teaches in a school. - Ask Ss to copy down. b) Listen, complete these forms for the three people on the tape. - Ask Ss to look at the form in the books. - Have Ss guess the information of three people. Open prediction - Call on some to give Name Agegroups Job Place of their workpredictions. - Play the tape for Ss 2 times to check their prediction.. Ss’ Activities - Greetings. - Answer T’s questions.. - Write new lesson. - Listen and do exercise. - Exchange the result with the partner. - Read completed sentences. - Listen and copy.. - Look at the forms. - Guess the information.. - Give the prediction. - Listen to the tape and check..

(29) - Ask Ss to fill in the forms. - Call on some Ss to give the results in front of the class. - Play the tape again for Ss to check. - Correct and give the correct answers: - Ask Ss to use the inform mation about 3 people then ask and answer. - Make EX: + What is his name? => His name’s Tom. + How old is he? => He is 26. + What does he do?=> He’s a teacher. + Where does he work?=> He works at a high school. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Correct the mistakes. 3. Consolidation: - Have Ss write about 3 people in the forms. - Ask Ss to exchange the writings with the partners. - call on some Ss to read in front of the class. 4. Homework: - Do exercise 3,4 at page 16,17 in workbook. - Prepare part B5,6 *Feedback. - Fill in the forms. - Listen again and check. - Copy down.. - Work in pairs. - Listen.. - Practice in front of the class. - Write about 3 people. - Exchange the writing. - Read aloud. - Write homework.. Pre: 29/ 9 / 2015. Tea: 30/ 9/ 2015 Period:17 Unit 3 Lesson 5: HOA’S FAMILY <B5-6-> P.-36-37>. I. Objective By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use comparatives and superatives of irregular adjectives and long adjectives . They can use them fluently and apply in the life. II. Language content: 1. Vocabulary: - Apartment - Furnished - Advice - Suitable - Empty - Good=> better => the best 2. Grammar: Structures: - S1 + tobe + more + adj + than + S2.

(30) - S + tobe + the most + adj. III. Teaching method Explanation, pairwork, using pictures, communicative. IV. Teaching aids: Textbook, tape, cassette, pictures. V. Procedure: T’s Activities Ss’ Activities 1. Warm up:- Greetings. - Greetings. - Have Ss play a game : Guess the jobs. - Play a game: + You go to this person when you have a toothache. + Dentist. + This person writes for a newspaper or magazine. + Before a house is built , this person draws the plan + Journalist for it. + Architect + This person grows vegetables and raises cattle. - Remark and give marks. + Farmer 2. New activities: a) Listen and read: - Introduce the content of the lesson to Ss . - Write new lesson. - Explain some new words: + Apartment (n)= Flat . - Listen. + Advice (n) : - Listen and write. + Empty (adj) >< Full + Furnished ( adj) : - Guess the meanings . + Suitable (adj) : + Good => better=> the best - Read in chorus and Structures: individually. + Comparatives of long adjectives S1 + tobe + more + adj + than + S2 EX: She is more beautiful than her sister. + Superlatives of long adjectives: - Make sentences. S + tobe + the most + adj . EX: He is the most intelligent. - Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the tape. - Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs. - Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of - Listen to the tape. the class. - Work in pairs. - Correct their pronunciation. - Ask Ss to read the dialogue again to find the answers - Practice reading . - Find the answers . for the questions. - Work in pairs. - Have Ss work in pairs. - Practice asking and - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. answering. - Correct and give the answer key: - Listen and copy. The most suitable apartment is the smallest but it is -answer key the newest of the three apartments. It has two -a. The one at number 27 bedrooms, a large modern bathroom and a kitchen. b. The one at number 79 b) Write. c. The one at number 79 - Introduce the situation of the lesson. d. The one at number 27. - Ask Ss to read the letter . - Listen. - Have Ss use the given words in the box in order to - Read the letter. complete the letter. - Complete the letter. - Have Ss exchange the result with the partner. - Call on some Ss to read the completed letter aloud. - Exchange the result with - Correct and give the correct answer. the partner. - Ask Ss to copy the letter in the notebooks. - Read the letter aloud. 3. Consolidation. - Ask Ss to look at the remember and read . - Copy the letter in the - Call on some Ss to read aloud. notebooks. - Have Ss make sentences with them. - Read . 4. Homework: - Learn by heart new words and structures by making.

(31) sentences with them. - Do exercises 2,3 at page 16,17 in workbook. - Prepare language focus 1. *Feedback. - Make sentences. - Write homework.. Pre: 30/ 9 / 2015. Tea: 01/ 10/ 2015 Period:18. LANGUAGE FOCUS 1 ( P.38-41 ). A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to consolidate the knowledge from unit1 to unit 3. I.Knowledge. -The present simple. -The "Will" future -The prepositions II. Skill -Reading and speaking drill. II. Teaching aids - Posters, pictures B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision. III. New lesson TEACHER S WORKS STUDENT S WORKS Complete the passage, using the verbs 1.Present simple tense:(10ms) - Introduces the requirement & Asks Ss to in brackets: work in pairs to complete the paragraph. -Working in pairs to complete - Asks Ss to compare the keys. the paragraph. - Asks Ss to give the keys. - Comparing the keys & give the keys. - Corrects & comments. - Correcting the keys. b) 1. are; 2. eat; 3. rides; * Keys: a) 1. is; 2. lives ; 3. are; 4. goes. 4. catches; 2. Future simple tense: (10ms) -Introduces the requirement & Asks Ss to work -Working in pairs to Asks Ss to work in pairs to write things Nam will do or will not in pairs to write things Nam will do or do tomorrow. will not do tomorrow. - Asks Ss to compare the keys. - Comparing the keys & give the keys -Asks Ss to practice in pairs. by practicing in pairs. - Corrects & comments. - Correcting the keys. He will go to the post office but he wont call He will see a movie but he wont watch Ba. TV. He will write to his grandmother but he wont meet Minh. 3.Preposition of places: Kim s game:(10ms) -Observing the position of the cat -Introduces the requirement & Divides Ss into & remember..

(32) two groups & helps them to observe the position of the cat & remember. -Asks Ss to write the position of the cat in groups &. Corrects. * Keys: a./ It is under the table. b./ It is in front of the chair c./ It is behind the TV. 4. Occupation: (Time: 5M) -Introduces the requirement & Asks Ss to work in pairs to write people’s job tittles. - Asks Ss to compare the keys. -Asks Ss to give the keys. - Corrects & comments. 1. She works in a hospital. She makes sick people well. What’s her job ? 2. She works in a school. She teaches student. What’s her job ? 3. He lives in the countryside. He grows vegetables. What’s his job ?; 5. Is there a./Are there any.: (Time: 5 M.) - Introduces the requirement & Asks Ss to work in pairs looking at the picture quickly then complete the dialogue: - Asks Ss to practice in pairs & corrects the mistakes. - Corrects & comments.. - Writing the position of the cat in groups & Corrects. d./ It is next to the shelf. e./ It is on the couch. *Write people s job tittles: -Working in pairs to write people’s job tittles -Comparing the keys. -Giving the keys. - Correcting the keys.  Keys: 1. She is a doctor; 2. She is a teacher. 3. He is a farmer; -Working in pairs & looking at the picture quickly then complete the dialogue - Practicing in pairs & correcting the mistakes. *Answer key: a) 1. are 2. any ; 3.Yes; 4. are. b) 1. are 2. any ; 3.No; 4. aren’t. c) 1. is; 2. a ; 3. No; 4. isn’t. d) 1. are 2. any ; 3.Yes; 4. are.. IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M ): -Ask Ss to explain the way to use the Present simple; The “Will future” & Preposition. - Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson. V. Homeworks:(Time: 2m) - Study the grammar & the modal sentence. - Prepare for the forty five munite test. *Feedback. Pre: 04/10/2015 Tea: 05 /10/ 2015 Period : 19.

(33) WRITTEN TEST 1 Time : 45 minutes. A . Objectives -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to consolidate the knowledge from unit1 to unit 3. I.Knowledge. -The present simple. -The "Will" future -The prepositions II. Skill -Writting skill B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision. *- Ma trËn: NhËn biÕt Th«ng hiÓu VËn dông Chủ đề Tæng sè: TL TL TL TN TN TN 4 2 6 I. Listening 1,0 1,0 2,0 4 2,0. II. Reading III. Language focus. 8. 2,0. IV. Writing Tæng sè: Number 1. 8 2,0. 12 4,0. 4 2,0 4 2,0 8 4,0. 4 2,0 12 4,0 4 2,0 28 10. I. Listen: (2 M) * Listen and complete the following passage. (1 M) There are four(1) …………….in Minh's family: his father, mother, his older sister and him. His father is a worker. He works in a(2)…………….. His factory produces bicycles. His mother is a nurse. She takes care of sick people in the(3)………………... His sister studies at university and she will be a teacher next year. Minh is a pupil. He studies very well. All the members of the family feel (4)…………….together. They will go to Nha Trang for their holidays this summer. *.Listen and answer questions. (1 M) 1.Does Minh’s father take care of sick people in the factory? …………………………………………………………. 2.How do All the members of Minh’s family feel? ……………………………………………………………. II.Choose the best option. (2 M) 1………………is it from your house to school? a. How b. How far c.How long d.How old 2.What ………nice day ! a.the b.a c.an d.some.

(34) 3.My house is............................than your house. a.taller b.tall c.more tall d.tallest 4……………a great party ! a. What b.How c.Where d.When 5.I will be 14..................my next birthday. a. in b.on c.at d.to 6. Lan’s new school is ........................... than her old school. a. very big b. big c. biger d. bigger 7. A farmer works on a ........................... . a. factory b. hospital c. school d. farm 8. They will …………..cakes and sweets. a. to eat b.eating c.eat d. eats III.Put in the correct tense of verds in brackets. ( 2,0 M ). 1.Mai and Nam (be)................... back next week. 2.I (live)..................... in Quang Long . 3.Hoa is in the living - room now. She ( watch ).................. T.V. 4.She ( go )...................... to school every morning. IV. Read the passage and do as direct. (2.0ms) Mai’s father is a worker. He works in a factory. Mai’s mother is a nurse. She works in a hospital. She takes care of sick children. Mai has an elder brother. He is a teacher. He teaches in a primary school. *Check true (T) /false (F) 1.Mai’s father is a teacher. 2.Her brother teaches in a high school. *Answer the questions: 1.Where does Mai’s mother work? …………………………………………….. 2. How many brothers does Mai have? ……………………………………………… V.Rewrite the sentences without changing its meaning. ( 2,0 M ). 1.This car is very expensive. What…………………………………………..! 2.Let’s go to school. How…………………………………………..? 3.When is your birthday? What………………………………………………..? 4.Where do you live? What…………………………………………………? Number 2 I. Listen: (2 M) * Listen and complete the following passage. (1 M) There are four(1) …………….in Minh's family: his father, mother, his older sister and him. His father is a worker. He works in a(2)…………….. His factory produces bicycles. His mother is a nurse. She takes care of sick people in the(3)………………... His sister studies at university and she will be a teacher next year. Minh is a pupil. He studies very well. All the members of the family feel (4)…………….together. They will go to Nha Trang for their holidays this summer. *.Listen and answer questions. (1 M) 1.How do All the members of Minh’s family feel? ……………………………………………………………. 2. Does Minh’s father take care of sick people in the factory?.

(35) …………………………………………………………. II.Choose the best option. (2M) 1……………a great party ! a. What b.How c.Where 2.I will be 14..................my next birthday. a. in b.on c.at 3………………is it from your house to school? a. How b. How far c.How long 4.What ………nice day ! a.the b.a c.an 5.My house is............................than your house. a.taller b.tall c.more tall 6.She will…………. to Ha Noi next week a. go b. goes. d.When d.to d.How old d.some d.tallest. c. to go. d. going. 7.A................... writes for a newspaper. a. teacher b. journalist c. farmer d. doctor . 8. I live ...................... 12 Tran Hung Dao Street. a. on b. at c. in d. with III.Put in the correct tense of verds in brackets. ( 2,0 M ). 1.Minh and Nga (be)....................... out tomorrow. 2.I (live) ..........................in Ba Don . 3.Nam is in the class now. She ( learn)....................... Math. 4.He ( go ).......................... to school every morning. IV IV. Read the passage and do as direct. (2.0ms) Mai’s father is a worker. He works in a factory. Mai’s mother is a nurse. She works in a hospital. She takes care of sick children. Mai has an elder brother. He is a teacher. He teaches in a primary school. *Check true (T) /false (F) 1.Mai’s father is adoctor. 2.Her brother teaches in a secondary school. *Answer the questions: 1.What does Mai’s mother do in a hospital? …………………………………………….. 2.Does Mai have an elder sister? ……………………………………………… V.Rewrite the sentences without changing its meaning. ( 2 M ). 1.This book is very interesting. What…………………………………………..! 2.Let’s go to the cinema. . How…………………………………………..? 3.What is your date of birth? When……………………………………….? 4. How old are you ? What………………………………………….?.

(36) WRITTEN TEST 1 Time : 45 minutes. -Mã đề: 1 Full name:. Class: 7. I. Listen: (2 M) * Listen and complete the following passage. (1 M) There are four(1) …………….in Minh's family: his father, mother, his older sister and him. His father is a worker. He works in a(2)…………….. His factory produces bicycles. His mother is a nurse. She takes care of sick people in the(3)………………... His sister studies at university and she will be a teacher next year. Minh is a pupil. He studies very well. All the members of the family feel (4)…………….together. They will go to Nha Trang for their holidays this summer. *.Listen and answer questions. (1 M) 1.Does Minh’s father take care of sick people in the factory? …………………………………………………………. 2.How do All the members of Minh’s family feel? ……………………………………………………………. II.Choose the best option. (2 M) 1………………is it from your house to school? a. How b. How far c.How long d.How old 2.What ………nice day ! a.the b.a c.an d.some 3.My house is............................than your house. a.taller b.tall c.more tall d.tallest 4……………a great party ! a. What b.How c.Where d.When 5.I will be 14..................my next birthday. a. in b.on c.at d.to 6. Lan’s new school is ........................... than her old school. a. very big b. big c. biger d. bigger 7. A farmer works on a ........................... ..

(37) a. factory b. hospital c. school d. farm 8. They will …………..cakes and sweets. a. to eat b.eating c.eat d. eats III.Put in the correct tense of verds in brackets. ( 2,0 M ). 1.Mai and Nam (be)................... back next week. 2.I (live)..................... in Quang Long . 3.Hoa is in the living - room now. She ( watch ).................. T.V. 4.She ( go )...................... to school every morning. IV. Read the passage and do as direct. (2.0ms) Mai’s father is a worker. He works in a factory. Mai’s mother is a nurse. She works in a hospital. She takes care of sick children. Mai has an elder brother. He is a teacher. He teaches in a primary school. *Check true (T) /false (F) 1.Mai’s father is a teacher. ……………. 2.Her brother teaches in a high school. ………………. *Answer the questions: 1.Where does Mai’s mother work? …………………………………………….. 2. How many brothers does Mai have? ……………………………………………… V.Rewrite the sentences without changing its meaning. ( 2,0 M ). 1.This car is very expensive. What…………………………………………..! 2.Let’s go to school. How…………………………………………..? 3.When is your birthday? What………………………………………………..? 4.Where do you live? What…………………………………………………?.

(38) WRITTEN TEST 1 Time : 45 minutes. -Mã đề: 2 Full name:. Class: 7. . Listen: (2 M) * Listen and complete the following passage. (1 M) There are four(1) …………….in Minh's family: his father, mother, his older sister and him. His father is a worker. He works in a(2)…………….. His factory produces bicycles..

(39) His mother is a nurse. She takes care of sick people in the(3)………………... His sister studies at university and she will be a teacher next year. Minh is a pupil. He studies very well. All the members of the family feel (4)…………….together. They will go to Nha Trang for their holidays this summer. *.Listen and answer questions. (1 M) 1.How do All the members of Minh’s family feel? ……………………………………………………………. 2. Does Minh’s father take care of sick people in the factory? …………………………………………………………. II.Choose the best option. (2M) 1……………a great party ! a. What b.How c.Where d.When 2.I will be 14..................my next birthday. a. in b.on c.at d.to 3………………is it from your house to school? a. How b. How far c.How long d.How old 4.What ………nice day ! a.the b.a c.an d.some 5.My house is............................than your house. a.taller b.tall c.more tall d.tallest 6.She will…………. to Ha Noi next week a. go b. goes. c. to go. d. going. 7.A................... writes for a newspaper. a. teacher b. journalist c. farmer d. doctor 8. I live ...................... 12 Tran Hung Dao Street. a. on b. at c. in d. with III.Put in the correct tense of verds in brackets. ( 2,0 M ). 1.Minh and Nga (be)....................... out tomorrow. 2.I (live) ..........................in Ba Don . 3.Nam is in the class now. She ( learn)....................... Math. 4.He ( go ).......................... to school every morning. IV. Read the passage and do as direct. (2.0ms) Mai’s father is a worker. He works in a factory. Mai’s mother is a nurse. She works in a hospital. She takes care of sick children. Mai has an elder brother. He is a teacher. He teaches in a primary school. *Check true (T) /false (F) 1.Mai’s father is adoctor. 2.Her brother teaches in a secondary school. *Answer the questions: 1.What does Mai’s mother do in a hospital? …………………………………………….. 2.Does Mai have an elder sister? ……………………………………………… V.Rewrite the sentences without changing its meaning. ( 2 M ). 1.This book is very interesting. What…………………………………………..! 2.Let’s go to the cinema. . How…………………………………………..? 3.What is your date of birth?.

(40) When……………………………………….? 4. How old are you ? What………………………………………….?. Pre: 06/ 10 / 2015. Tea: 07/ 10/ 2015 Period : 20 Test remark A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to consolidate the knowledge from the text. I.Knowledge. -The present simple. -The "Will" future -The prepositions II. Skill -Writting skill B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision. 1. Warm up: - Teacher remarks the result of the test. - Say where in the test they could do well and where they didn’t do well. - Give some typical mistakes and ask Ss to write down the notes for the next test. 2. Correction - hang the poster which has the answer keys of the test on the board. - Ask Ss to compare with their tests and check their mistakes. 3. Answer keys: Number1 I. Listen: (2 M) * Listen and complete the following passage. (1 M).

(41) There are four(1) people in Minh's family: his father, mother, his older sister and him. His father is a worker. He works in a(2)factory. His factory produces bicycles. His mother is a nurse. She takes care of sick people in the(3)hospital. His sister studies at university and she will be a teacher next year. Minh is a pupil. He studies very well. All the members of the family feel (4) happy .together. They will go to Nha Trang for their holidays this summer. *.Listen and answer questions. (1 M) 1.Does Minh’s father take care of sick people in the factory? - No, he doesn’t. 2.How do All the members of Minh’s family feel? . –They feel happy II.Choose the best option. (2,0 M) 1.a 2.b 3.b 4.b 5.a 6.d 7.d. 8.c III.Put in the correct tense of verds in brackets. ( 2,0 M ). 1.Will _ be.. 2.live 3.is watching 4.goes IV. *Check true (T) /false (F) ( 1,0 M ). 1.Mai’s father is a teacher.(F) 2.Her brother teaches in a hight school.(F) *Answer the questions: ( 1,0 M ). 1. She works in a hospital. 2.She has an elder brother. V.Rewrite the sentences without changing its meaning. ( 1,0 M ). 1.This car is very expensive. What an expensive car…………………………………………..! 2. Let’s go to school. How about going to school? 3.When is your birthday? What is your date of birth……………………………………..? 4.Where do you live? What is your address………………………………………………? Number2 I. Listen: (2 M) * Listen and complete the following passage. (1 M) There are four(1) people in Minh's family: his father, mother, his older sister and him. His father is a worker. He works in a(2)factory. His factory produces bicycles. His mother is a nurse. She takes care of sick people in the(3)hospital. His sister studies at university and she will be a teacher next year. Minh is a pupil. He studies very well. All the members of the family feel (4) happy .together. They will go to Nha Trang for their holidays this summer. *.Listen and answer questions. (1 M) 1.How do All the members of Minh’s family feel? . –They feel happy 2.Does Minh’s father take care of sick people in the factory? - No, he doesn’t. II.Choose the best option. (2,0 M) 1.a.2. b. 3. b. 4. b 5. a 6.a. 7.b. 8.b III.Put in the correct tense of verds in brackets. ( 2,0 M ). 1.Will _be. 2..live.

(42) 3..is learning 4..goes. IV IV. *Check true (T) /false (F) ( 1,0 M ). 1.Mai’s father is a doctor.(F) 2.Her brother teaches in a hight school.(F) *Answer the questions: ( 1,0 M ). 1. She works in a hospital. 2. No, she doesn’t. V.Rewrite the sentences without changing its meaning. (2,0 M ). 1.This book is very interesting. What an interesting book?…………………………………………..! 2.Let’s go to the cinema. How about going to the cinema? 3.What is your date of birth? When is your birthday………………………………………….? 4. How old are you ? What is your age………………………………………….? IV. Consolidation. -T calls some Ss to give the main grammar in this text. V.Homework. -Doing exercise : doing again the text at home. -Preparing: Unit 4 :A1,2,4.

(43) Pre: 07 /10 / 2015 Tea: 08 / 10 / 2015 Period: 21. Unit 4 : AT SCHOOL Lesson 1: SCHEDULES <A1,2,4>. A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to tell the time,school vocab. I.Knowledge. -The present simple. II. Skill -Reading and speaking drill. III. Teaching aids - Posters, pictures B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision.(5ms) - A1 P.42. "Noughts and Crosses". 7:00 (1). 4:15 (2). 1:45 (3). 8:30 (4) Ex: S1: What time is it ? 6:35 (7) S2: It’s seven o’clock. III. New lesson. Teacher’s activities 1. Presentation.(10ms) a.Pre teach. T elicits to teach vocabulary. -physics (n) -physical education (n) b.Checking vocab. -"Slap the board". math physics. 9:40 (5). 11:05 (6). geography. 5:25 (8). 3:10 (9). Students’activities -Ss guess the words and prctice well. - Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. - Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words. -Ss enjoy the game.. music. physical education 2. Practice.(15ms) -"Picture drill" - A4 P.43 - Introduces the example exchange & Hepls Ss to practice. - Reads the first modal for example & asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in groups & in pairs . - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. T uses the pictures in A4 P.43 to ask Ss to practice well. 3. Production(10ms) a.Mapped dialogue -"slap the boarb": ( Ss listen and slap the. -Ss open their book in A4 P.43 to look carefully the pictures to practice well. - Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs . - Correcting the pronunciation. -Ss enjoy the game. Ex: S1: What is Lan studing? S2: Lan is studing physics. S1: What time does Lan have her physics class? S2: She has her physics class at 8:40 -Ss listen and slap the suitable response.

(44) suitable response) -Put the new words all over the blackboard. -Call two students or 2 teams of Ss to the front of the class. Ask them to stand at an equal distance from the black-board. -Teacher calls out of the new words (in VietNamese) in aloud voice, the two Ss must run forward and slap the word on the black-board. -The one who first slaps the correct word is the winner. If the Ss play in team,the winning team gets a mark. Then ask two more Ss to come forward,etc... b."survey" - A2 P.42. -two students or 2 teams of Ss to the front of the class then ss stand at an equal distance from the black-board. -Ss must run forward and slap the word on the black-board. -The one who first slaps the correct word is the winner You. Your friend. What time...?. 9:20. What time/math?. 9:30. Literature today?. No. When...?. On tuesday.. IV. Consolidation.( 3ms) -T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson. - Asks Ss to summarise the general idea of the lesson. V.Homework.(2ms) -Doing exercise : A1,2( workbook) P.35-36 - Study the modal exchange . -Preparing: Unit 4 : A3,5. Pre: 11/10/2015 Tea: 12 /10/ 2015 Period: 22 Unit 4 : Lesson 2: SCHEDULES <A3,5> A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the details and school vocabulary. I.Knowledge. -The present simple about school vocabulary. II. Skill -Listening skill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision. -"jumpled words"(3ms) turepics = ? lisheng =? ryhisto =? grageophy =? sicmu =? tham = III.New lesson. Teacher’s activities 1. Pre-listening.(10ms) a.Pre teach vocab. T elicits to teach vocabulary. -Schedule(n) -important(adj). Students’activities.

(45) -fun(adj) - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. b.Open prediction. -T asks Ss to give 5 classes Thu has on Wednesday and Thursday. - Introduces the statement & ask Ss to work in pairs to predict the statements 2.While-listening(20ms) a. -T turns on the tape -T checks the predictions. - Asks Ss to give the keys & correct.. b. Comprehension questions. -T gives 5 qs in book, and give a game to practice "Hangman".. c.A3 P.43 -nb: Use" physics" instead "Science". 2. Post-listening.(7ms) -T asks Ss to write their schedule in your exercise book.. - Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words.. -Ss predict 5 classes Thu has on Wednesday and Thursday. Expected: 1.Geography 2.Physical education 3.Music 4.English 5.Math -Ss listen carefully. -Ss check their predictions *Answer key. 1.English 2.Math 3.Geography 4.Physical education 5.Music -Ss enjoy the game. *Answer key. 1. On Wed. and thu. 2. On Wed. at 8:40,On Thu. at 9:40. 3. Math,Geography,Physical education,and Physics. 4. History.It’s an interesting and important. 5. Math. It’s difficult but fun. -Ss listen and fill the gaps with time and subjects. -Ss ask and answer qs about their schedule with your partner.. IV. Consolidation.(1ms) -T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson. -Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson. V.Homework.(2ms) -Doing exercise : A3,4(workbook) - Study the vocabulary & the comprehension answers. -Preparing: Unit 4 :A6.

(46) Pre: 13/10/2015 Tea: 14 /10/ 2015 Period: 23. Unit 4 : Lesson 3: SCHEDULES <A6>. A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the details and compare an American school with a VietNamese school. I.Knowledge. -The present simple about school vocabulary. II. Skill -Reading skill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision. -"Hangman"(3ms) ____--------(schedule) ------(school) -----(class). III.New lesson. Teacher’s activities 1. Pre-reading.(10ms) a.Pre teach vocab. T elicits to teach vocabulary. -uniform (n) : đồng phục -a break : nghỉ giải lao (giữa giờ) -a cafeteria : qu¸n tự phục vụ -a snack : mãn ăn nhẹ/ mãn ăn nhanh -(to) sell : b¸n b.Checking vocab. - "R.O.R" c.T/F prediction -A6 P.45 - Introduces the statement & ask Ss to work in pairs to predict the statements - Asks Ss to give the keys & correct. *True / False statement: a./ Ss don’t usually wear school uniform. b./ There’re classes un Saturday morning. c./ Ss don’t have break in the afternoon. d./ The school cafeteria sells food to Ss help of modern equipment. e./ The school cafeteria only open at lunchtime. f./ Basket ball is an unpopular after school activity. 2. While-reading.(20ms) a. read the text and check the predictions. -T asks Ss to open their book A6 P.45 to read carefully.. Students’activities -Ss guess the words and practice. - Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words. -Ss enjoy the game. -Ss open their book and read A6 P.45 carefully. -Ss check their predictions - Working in pairs to predict the statements - Reading the text in silence. -Checking the prediction. - Correcting the pronunciation - Giving the keys & Correcting * Answer keys: a: T; b: F; c: F; d: T; e: T; f: T..

(47) - Introduces & ask Ss to read the text in silence. - Asks Ss to check their prediction. -Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. b."Grid" with answer key. -Gives the requirement & asks Ss to work in pairs to the text & find out the information & fill in the table. -Asks Ss to report the information. - Corrects & comments Activities In the USA In Viet Nam There is school x v uniform. Classes start... 8:30 7:00 The school day 3:30 or 4:00 11:00 ends at... There are x v lesson on Sartuday Students have v x lunch at school 3. Post-reading.(7ms) -"Transformation writing" - A6 P.45 -Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work in pairs to write about their school. Basing on the text. -Asks Ss to give their information. - Corrects & comments.. -Ss practice well. - Working in pairs to work in pairs to the text & find out the information & fill in the table. -Reporting the information.. -Ss write about their schools. - Working in pairs to write about their school. Basing on the text. -Giving the information. -Correcting the information. Ex: There is usually school uniform in my school. Our classes start at........... IV. Consolidation.(2ms) -T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson. - Ask Ss to compare the differences between an American school with a Vietnamese school. - Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson. V.Homework.(3ms) - Study the vocabulary. -Writing about your school. - Prepare the picture on page 47& some information about the school library. -Preparing: Unit 4 :B1,2. Pre: 14/10/2015 Tea: 15/10/ 2015 Period: 24. Unit 4 : Lesson 4: THE LIBRARY <B1,2>. I. The aims : By the end of the lesson , the students will read the text to understand the details and practice library vocabulary & prepositions of positions II. Language content : 1. Vocabulary : - Rack (n) - Science books (n) - Chemistry (n) - Literature in Viet names(n) - Reference book (n). - Shelf (n)  Shelves - Dictionary (n) - Biology (n) - Reader(n) - Novel (n).

(48) - At the back of (pre). 2. Grammar : The structure : - Where can I find the math books, please? - Do you have newspapers and magazines here? Review : The present simple tense : III. Technique : Explanation , pairwork and groupwork, using pictures. IV. Teaching aids Text book , tape , cassette, pictures. V. Procedure : Ts activities 1. Warm up (7ms) - Greetings - Have Ss play a game : Jumbled words Luratitere Hisplesc Torishy Bhygrageo Spenawpes - Have students work in groups - Call on 2 representatives to go to the board and write down - Correct & remark 2. New activities: a. Listen and read. (15ms) - Ask Ss to look at the picture and guess - Ask Ss some questions + What is it in the picture ? + Where do you usually see it ?  Load in new lesson + Does your school have the library ? + What is the usefulness of library ? + What do you usually do when you go to the library ? + Who can help you find the books in the library ?  Explain some new words : + Rack (n): Gi¸, kÖ + Shelf (n)  Shelves : Gi¸ s¸ch + Science books : S¸ch khoa häc + Dictionary (n) : tõ ®iÓn + Novel : tiÓu thuyÕt + Reference books : S¸ch tham kh¶o + At the back of : phía đằng sau. *Checking technique : Slap the board - Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs - Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class - Correct their pronunciation - Ask Ss to look at the questions in the books then work in pairs - Call on some pairs to ask and answer the questions in front of the class - Correct the mistake if necessary b.Listen then practice with a partner(15ms) - Introduce new lesson - Play the tape for Ss and ask them to look at the books - Explain some structures : + Where can I find the math books, please + Do you have magazines here ? new spapers  They are on the shelves on the left / right. Ss activities - Greetings - Play a game. - Work in groups - 2 students go to the board & write. - Look at the picture carefully - Listen and answer  Yes, it does ( Ss can answer the questions in Vnamese ). - Guess their meanings, read new words in chours and individually - Copy down in their notebooks. - Work in pairs - Read aloud - Work in pairs - Ask and answer loud a. Where are the magazines They are on the racks b. Where are the news spapers They are on the racks ……… - Listen to the teacher - Listen to the tape - Listen and write down.

(49) - Ask Ss to make questions and answers - Correct the mistakes if necessary - Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs - Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class - Correct their pronunciation - Ask Ss to look at part B2 again then make the similar dialogue - Have Ss work in pairs - Call on some pairs to make their dialogues in front of the class Ex :. - Make questions & answers - Work in pairs - Read the dialogue aloud - Look at B1 again - Work in pairs - Some pairs make dialogues. H : Good morning L : Good morning. Can I help you ? H : Yes , where can I find the books in English? L : They are at the back of the library H : Do you have math and biology books here? L : Yes, they have on the shelves on the left H : Thank you very much L : You are welcome.. - Write about the school library 3. Consolidation(5ms) - Ask Ss to write sentences about their school library , using - Read loudly the library vocabulary - Call on some Ss to read their writing in front of the class - Remark. 4. Home work(3ms) - Learn by heart new words by making sentences with them - Do exercise 1,2,3 at page 24 in work book - Prepare part 3,4. - Write home work.

(50) Pre: /10/2015 Tea: /10/ 2015. Period: 25. Unit 4 : Lesson 5: THE LIBRARY . I. The aims : By the end of the lesson , the students will be able to know the information about one of the world’s largest libraries thoughe the text. They will review the prepositions of position and library vocabulary. II. Language content : 1. Vocabulary - To receive (v) - Employee (n). - To contain (v) - Congress (n). 2. Grammar : - The present simple tense. - Skill : reading. III. Technique : Explaination , asking and answering , work in pairs and groups IV. Teaching aids Text book , tape, cassette, pictures if have V. Procedure : T’s activities 1. Warm up - Greetings * Listen. Where are they?(10ms) -Have students look at the plan and guess: What are at numbers from 1 to 8? -Write students’ prediction on the board -Let them listen to the tape 4 times 1st: Listen to know the main content Explain: tidy( v) study area( n) put( v) keep ... together go on( v) in the center = in the middle 2nd, 3rd: Listen and write what at numbers from 1 to 8 4th: Listen and check their answers -Give feedback and correct -Have students to compare the key with their prediction. 2. New activities: Read then answer * Pre- reading(10ms) - Introduce the lesson then explain some new words + To reccive (v) : NhËn + Comgress (n) : Quèc héi + To contain (v) : bao gåm. Ss’ activities - Greetings - Play a game Look at the plan and guess -Listen to the tape 4 times 1. Study area 2. Science books 3. Geography 4+5. Newspapers and magazines 6+7. English 8. Librarian’s desk -Compare the key with their prediction.

(51) + Employee (n) : nh©n viªn Checking technique : Rub out and remember - Ask Ss to do exerise : T or F prediction 1. The library of Congress is in New york 2. It receives copies of all E books 3. There are over 100 million books in this library 4. The shelves are about 300 km long. 5. 5.000 people work in the library - Ask some representatives to give their predictions *While-reading(9ms) - Ask Ss to look at the text, read in silent then check their predictions - Call on some Ss to give the answer 1-F 2-F 3-T 4–F 5-T - Call on some students read the text in front of the class - Correct their pronunciations - Ask Ss to look at the text again then find out the answers for the question - Have Ss play a game : Lucky numbers < The questions in the book > 1 -d 2- Ln 3 - e 4-b 5 -LN 6 - a 7- c - Ask Ss to write the answers in their notebooks * Post_reading(8ms) - Ask Ss to compare their school library with the library of Conguss - Ask them to write the sentences Ex : My school library in smaller than the library of Congress <5> Play with words : - Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the teacher - Ask Ss to read after the teacher - Explain some new words : + To forget (v) : + Rocket (n) : + Space (n) : + Adveture (n) :. - Guess meanings read new words in chourus and individually. - Work in groups to predict. - Give the predictions - Read the text in silent and check the predictions - Give the answers - Read the text aloud - Read the text and find the answers - Play a game in groups answer the questions - Write the answers - Compare 2 librarys - Write down. - Call on some Ss to read the poem aloud - Correct their pronunciation 3. Consolation (5ms) - Ask Ss look at the remember and use the phrases of prepositions and pronouns to make sentences. 4. Home work (3ms) - Learn by herart new works by writing 3 lines for each - Do exercise 4 at page 26 in work book. - Listen - Read after the teacher - Listen and write down - Read aloud. - Listen carefully and make sentences..

(52) - Prepare Unit 5 part A1.. - Write home work. Pre: /10/2015 Tea: /10/ 2015 Period: 26 Unit 5 : WORK AND PLAY Lesson 1: IN CLASS <A1> A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to talk about school subjects. I.Knowledge. - Simple present tense II. Skill -Reading and speaking drill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision. III. New lesson. Teacher’s activities Students’activities 1. Presentation.(15ms) a.Pre teach. -(to) interested in:thay v× -a map :bản đồ -picture -an experiment: thÝ nghiÖm- picture -last - last lesson : tiÕt häc cuèi- example - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal, then helps Ss to repeat - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. b.Check vocab. -"What and Where" c.Presentation text.A1 P.51 - Introduces & Helps Ss to read the text. - Introduces the content of the text. - Checks S’s reading. - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. 2. Practice.(25ms) a.Grid with answer key. -Asks Ss to read the text to get the details & fill in the table in individual. -Asks Ss to compare the information. -Asks Ss to give the information. - Corrects & comments. Classes What to do Computer to learn how to use a coputer science Geography to study maps and learn how about different countries. Physics to do some experiments b.Word cue drill. -T asks Ss to depend on th Grid to make qs and answer about What Mai does in her class.. - Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words. -Ss enjoy the game. _Ss open their book to raed the text. -Correcting the pronunciation. - Correcting the pronunciation. -Filling in the table in individual & correcting. -Comparing the information. -Giving the information.. Using the grids to make questions & answers about.

(53) - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to what Mai does in her class. practice. - Repeating in chorus & in - Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to individual. repeat in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. next cues. - Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in - Practicing in groups & in groups & in pairs . pairs . - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. -Correcting the pronunciation. Example exchange: S1: What does Mai do in her Science class ? S2: She learns how to use a computer. IV. Consolidation.(5ms) -T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson. -Ask Ss to give the simple present question & answer to talk about school subjects S1: What does Mai do in her Science class ? S2: She learns how to use a computer. -Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson. V.Homework.(3ms) - Study the vocabulary & the exchange. -Writing about your classes . -Preparing new lesson: Unit 5: A2. Pre: /10/2015 Tea: /10/ 2015 Period: 27. Unit 5 : Lesson 2: IN CLASS <A2> A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to talk about school subjects. I.Knowledge. - Simple present tense II. Skill -Reading and speaking drill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision./Warm-up.(5ms) -“Kim’s game” -refrigerator; tivi; washing machine; shower; dryer; guitar. III. New lesson. Teacher’s activities Students’activities 1.Pre-reading.(10ms) Ss answer: a. Lead-in: Expected: -What’s your favorite subject?.

(54) -Why? -What do you do in your free time? b.Pre teach. -(to) repair: söa ch÷a -drawing(n) tranh vẽ -electronics :®iÖn -appliance(n) thiết bị - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal, then helps Ss to repeat - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. b.Check vocab. -"Jumpled word" c.T/F statements prediction 1) Ba enjoys his school very much. 2) His favorite subject is electronics. 3) He is not good at fixing things. 4) He can help his parents on their farm. 5) He never goes to art club. 2.While-reading.(20ms) a.Check prediction: T asks ss to read the text and check their prediction. Guess the meaning. . a household appliance bøc ho¹ . the guitar đàn ghi ta . an artist thiết bị gia đình b.Comprehension questions. “Lucky number” a.Which subject does Balike best? b.Does Ba like the other subjects at school? c.What does he learn to do in Electronics? Write the sentence that tells you this. d.How does this subject to help Ba? e.Is Ba good at drawing? Write the sentence that tells you this.. -I like math. Because it’s important subject. -I often listen to music.. - Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words.. -Ss enjoy the game.. Ss resd the text and and check their prediction. -Ss find the mistakes to correct the sentences. Answer key: 1.T 2.T 3.F 4.F 5.F -Working in group to answer the questions Answer key: a.He likes Electronics best. b.Yes, he does. He enjoys school very much. c.He learn to repair house appliances. d.He will able to fix his our appliances. e.Yes, he is. His drawings are very good.. -Ss work in 4 groups to discus 3. Post-reading(7ms) -Group1 ask <=> group 2 -"Discussion)" answer 1.What do you do in your free time? -Take note. 2.What are you good at? 3.What is your favorite subject ? -T asks ss to work in 4 groups to answer the questions. -Corrects & comments. IV. Consolidation.(2ms) -T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson. -Ask Ss to give the simple present question & answer to talk about school subjects S1: What does Mai do in her Science class ? S2: She learns how to use a computer. -Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson. V.Homework.(1m).

(55) - Study the vocabulary & the exchange. -Writing about your classes . -Preparing new lesson: unit 5: A4-5. Pre: 25/10/2015 Tea: 26/10/ 2015 Period: 28. Unit 5 : Lesson 3: IN CLASS <A4-5>. A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able topracitce well some school subject vocab. with listening and reading. I.Knowledge. - School vocabulary. II. Skill -Reading and listening skill B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision. -"Matching"( 3ms) A4 P.54. *T match the picyure with the subjects:computer science, physical education, geography, electronics, class activities. III. New lesson. Teachers activities Students activities -Working in pairs & predict 1. Pre-listening.(5ms) what subjects Ba / Hoa has on " Open prediction -Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work in Saturday morning & write the pairs & predict what subjects Ba / Hoa has on name Ba / Hoa next to the Saturday morning & write the name Ba / Hoa picture. -Giving the prediction. next to the picture. -Ss predict What Ba/Hoa has on -Asks Ss to give their prediction. Sarturday morning. ? What subjects Ba/Hoa has on Sarturday _Ss wute the name(Ba/Hoa) morning. next to the picture ?....etc. -Ss listen and check their prediction. 2.while-listening.(9ms) - Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the text to - Listening to the text to get the get the information bout the subjects that Ba & information bout the subjects that Ba & Hoa has on Saturday Hoa has on Saturday morning. morning. - Asks Ss to compare their information. - Helps Ss to listen to the text & check their - Comparing their information. - Listening to the text & prediction. checking the prediction. - Checks S’s prediction. Answer keys: - Corrects & comments Ba: d; a; e. -T turns on the tape. Hoa: c; b; e 3.Pre-reading(10ms) a.Pre teach - Listening to the words. -an essay: bµi v¨n -relia - Repeating the words in chorus -an event : sù kiÖn.

(56) -calculator : (n) c¸i m¸y tÝnh -past and present events: nh÷ng sù kiÖn trong qu¸ khø vµ hiÖn t¹i - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal, then helps Ss to repeat - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. b.Ckeck vocab. -R.O.R c.Odd one out. - A5 P.54 -Introduces the vocabularies & the meaning then asks Ss to work in individual to match. the subjects to the correct items. -Corrects & Comments. Painting.basketball game.preposition.England. d.Openprediction. 4.While-reading.A5 P.55(5ms) - Introduces & asks Ss to read the text to get the details & check their prediction. - Asks Ss to compare their information. - Helps Ss to listen to the text & check their prediction. - Corrects & comments 5.Comprehension questions.(5ms) a. What do you study at school? b. What do you learn in Literature? c. Do you study past and present event in History? d. What subject do you learb about different countries and their people? e. Do you speak in Language class? f. What other things do you study? 6.Post-reading.(5ms) - "Noughts and Crosses" History. language. Art. Physics. Computer science. Math. Literature. Electronics. Geography. & in individual. Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words. -Ss do well. -Ss predict the subjects that will appear in the text. - Working in individual to match. the subjects to the correct items. - Reading the text to get the details & checking their prediction. - Comparing their information. - Checking the prediction. *Answer key. -literature, history, geography, physics, language class, music, sports,art. Working in pairs to answer. Then giving the keys. Answer: 1./ Computer science , Physical education, Geography, Electronics, Class activities. 2./ Yes, I do. 3./ Geography. 4 Yes, I do. 5./ We learn about books & write essays.. -Ss enjoy the game. Ex: S1:What do you do in History? S2: We study past and present events.. IV. Consolidation.(2ms) - Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson. V.Homework.(1ms) - Study the vocabulary content of the text . - Prepare the school activities. -Preparing: Unit 5: B1-2. * Feedback. Pre: 27/10/2015.

(57) Tea: 28/10/ 2015 Period: 29. Unit 5 : Lesson 4: IT' S TIME FOR RECESS <B1,2> A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the main and details ideas of the text.. I.Knowledge. - Present progressive tense. - Recess activities vocab. II. Skill -Reading and speaking drill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision. (5ms) -"Noughts and Crosses" -Ss listen to the name of the subject and tell what we study(learn) in this subject. Teacher’s note: i. music f.geography a b c ii. math g.history iii. literature h.electronics d e f iv. English i.computer science v. physics g h i Ex: S1: "a" T: Music S1: In this subject we learn to sing a song. III. New lesson. Teacher’s activities Students’activities 1. Presentation.(15ms) a.Pre teach -(to) talk about: Nãi về/ kể về -(to) chat: t¸n gẫu -(to) play catch: marbles blind man’s bluff - Listening to the words. -(to) skip rope: Nh¶y d©y the words in chorus & - Introduces the words by explaining the -inRepeating individual. Correcting the meaning, using the situation. mistakes. - Reads the words for the modal, then helps - Giving the meaning & the Ss to repeat - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects pronunciation. - Copying the words. the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. b.Checking vocab. -Ss enjoy the game. - What and Where c.Presentation text. -Ss listen and read the text to complete the list. - B1. P.56 Recess activities The most popular activities -meeting friends ........ ............. - Reading the text to get the -skipping rope - Introduces & Helps Ss to read the text to information bout the school recess.. - Completing the list. get the information bout the school recess..

(58) - Asks Ss to complete the list. - Asks Ss to compare their information. - Corrects & comments. 2. Practice(15ms) -" Picture cue drill" - B1 P.56 a)-f) - Introduces the example exchange & the picture then helps Ss to practice. - Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in groups & in pairs - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.. -Comparing their information. * Answer keys: Recess The most popular activities Meeting - Talking friends Talking Eating Drinking Chatting Playing catch.. Skipping - Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs . -Correcting the pronunciation. * Example exchange: S1: What is the boy doing ? S2: He is reading... 3. Further practice(7ms) - Working in individual to write -"Write it up" about what the Ss in the picture on - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to page 56 are doing using the present work in individual to write about what the Ss progressive tense. in the picture on page 56 are doing, using the - Giving the information. present progressive tense.. * Example sentence: - Asks Ss to give their information. The boys are talking to each other - Corrects & comments. Ex: (a) The boys are talking to each other. .........etc. IV. Consolidation.(2ms) -T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson. - Ask Ss to describe the school recess activities. V.Homework.(1ms) - Study the vocabulary. -Writing about your school recess activities. - Prepare the picture on page 57. -Preparing: Unit 5: B3. * Feedback.

(59) Pre: 28/10/2015 Tea: 29/10/ 2015 Period: 30. Unit 5 : Lesson 5: IT’ S TIME FOR RECESS <B3> A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the main and details ideas of the text.. I.Knowledge. - Recess in American school. II. Skill -Reading skill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision. (3ms) -"Bingo" Ss write 5 activities at recess. T read: play catch/playmarbles/play blind man’s bluff/skip rope/chat/talk to friend/meet friends/eat/listen to music/drink/play baseball/read. III. New lesson. Teacher’s activities Students’activities 1. Presentation. (15ms) a.Pre teach -junior school: trêng cÊp 1 ( tiÓu häc) -junior high school: trêng cÊp 2 (THCS) -senior high school: trêng cÊp 3 (THPT) -(to) score a goal: ghi mét bµn th¾ng -(to)swap : trao đổi -(to) relax: nghØ ng¬i/ th gi·n -(to) take part in : tham gia vµo - Introduces the words by explaining the - Listening to the words. meaning, using the situation. - Repeating the words in chorus - Reads the words for the modal, then helps Ss & in individual. Correcting the to repeat mistakes. - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the - Giving the meaning & the mistakes. pronunciation. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the - Copying the words. meaning & the pronunciation & Corrects b.Checking vocab. -Ss enjoy the game. - R.O.R b.Pre-reading. -"Prediction" -Ss listen the question and T gives a question predict the answer. ? What do Ss in American school do at recess? -Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work.

(60) in pairs & predict . -Comments S’s prediction. 2. While-reading.(17ms) a.Check prediction. *Answer key. -Skip rope/talking about........... b.Matching. -Introduces the vocabularies & the meaning then asks Ss to work in individual to match. the subjects to the correct items. -Corrects & Comments. -energetic students kh¾p thÕ giíi -portable CD players b¹n qua th -pen pal chñ yÕu -mainly nh÷ng gãi kÑo -world wide những học sinh năng động c.Multiple choice. (a,b,c,d) -P.18 -Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work in individual to choose the best answer to fill in the gaps. - Asks Ss to compare & give the keys. -Corrects & Comments.. -Ss open their book to read B1a carefully to check their prediction.. -Ss match the words in English with the word in VietNamese. - Working in individual to match. the subjects to the correct items.. - Working in individual to choose the best answer to fill in the gaps. - Comparing & giving the keys. * Answer key: a./ C - an American school. b./ A – short. c./ D – mostly boys d. d.D – world wide-Ss doing well.. 3. Post-reading.(7ms) -"Discusion" - Working in groups to discuss -? What is the most popular recess activity in about what they often do at your school? -Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work recess & what is the most in groups to discuss about what they often do at popular recess activities in their recess & what is the most popular recess school - Reporting the information. activities in their school -Take notes - Asks Ss to report the information. -Comments. -T controls and corrects IV. Consolidation.(2ms) -T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson. V.Homework.(1ms) - Study the vocabulary content of the text . - Prepare part B1b – B2 – B4.. -Preparing: Unit 6: A1. * Feedback. Pre: 01/11/2015 Tea: 02/11/ 2015 Period: 31 Unit 6 : AFTER SCHOOL Lesson 1: WHAT DO YOU DO? <A1> A. THE AIMS AND REQUESTS:.

(61) 1. The aims: - T helps ss read the dialogue about after- school activities and getting further practice in the present progressive. 2. Request: - By the end of the lesson ss will be able to talk about the after- school activities and further practice in the present progressive. 3. T’s preparation: - cue words with the new words of the lesson, poster to play game. B. PROCEDURE: T’S ACTIVITIES SS’ ACTIVITIES I. ORGANIZATION(3ms) - T greetings to ss and asks ss some qs. - Ss listen to T and answer the qs in speaking form. How are you today? What the weather like today? II. CHECKING UP THE OLD LESSON: no III. NEW LESSON: * Revision: Networks:(5ms) - T sets the scene and write the netwoks on the bb. - T guides ss to to the netwoks by giong to the bb and list the words about after- school activities.. - Ss listen to T. - Go to the bb and list the after- shool activities.. - Ss go to the bb and write.. * Pre- teach(7ms) - (to) practice: Example Thùc hµnh - (to) invite: Situation Mêi After- school - (to) enjoy: Situation ThÝch thó activities - together Example Cïng nhau - Team (n) Example §éi - (to) come along: Situation Gia nhËp * Checking vocab: Jumbed words. 1. Pre- reading: True/false statements prediction.(15ms) - T sets the scene to introduce the dialogue. - Asks ss to look at the pictures in the textbooks and read the sentences to put them true or false. - T gets feedback from ss.. - Ss liste to T. - Repeat in chorus and individually. - Copy in their notebook.. - T asks ss to work indi to predict what are true/false statements..

(62) a. Lan is doing her Math homework. b. Minh comes to Lan’s house on Sunday. c. Minh invites Hoa to go to the restaurant. d. Ba is in the music room. e. Ba is learning to play the guitar. f. Hoa does not enjoy playing voleyball. Answer key: a.T b. F c. F d. T e. T f. F * Comprehension Qs: a- f p61 - Ss read the dialogue again and answer the qs. - T gets feedback from ss. - Ss copy the answer key in their notebooks. 3. Further practice: Noughs and Crosses(10ms) - Ss look at the poster with the cuewords and make qs and answer to play game. S1: What is Lan doing? S2: She is doing her homework. IV. CONSOLIDATION(3ms) - Ss retell the content of the dialogue. V. HOMEWORK(2ms) - Ss learn by heart vocab, prepare for the new lesson: Lesson 2: A2.. - Ss predict the statements - Report back to the T. - Ss read the dialogue again - Answer the qs in pairs. - Ss go to the bb and write the answers. - Ss play game by making the qs and answers.. - Ss retell the content of the ddialogue. - Prepare for the new lesson. Lesson 2: A2.. Pre: 03/11/2015 Tea: 04/11/ 2015 Period: 32. Unit 6 : Lesson 2: WHAT DO YOU DO? <A2> A. THE AIM AND REQUEST: 1. The aims: - T helps ss revise the use of the advs of frequency with the preseent simple to talk about after- school activities. 2. Requests: - By the end of the lesson ss will be able to use the advs of frequency with the simple present. 3. T’s preparation: Poster with the verbs and the advs of frequency, pictures in textbook. B. PROCEDURE: T’S ACTIVITIES SS’ ACTIVITIES.

(63) I.ORGANIZATION:(2ms) Who is absent today? What the date today? II. CHECKING UP THE OLD LESSON:(5ms) - T calls ss to go to the bb and rewrite the form of the present progressive. - T corrects and give marks. III. NEW LESSON: * Revision: Slap the board:(5ms) - T reads Vietnamese words and ss slap the English ones. Bơi, xem TV, chơi trò chơi điện tử, chơi đá bóng, đi xem phim, đọc sách. 1. Presentation.(7ms) - T sets the scene to introduce the lesson by using the pictures in the textbook. - Then T asks ss to look at the pictures about the activities in the pictures and labell the names of the activities. Answer keys: 1. Reading/ Studying in the library. 2. swimming 3. Playing vieogames 4. Going to the movies 5. Watching TV. 2. Practice: Noughs and crosses:(7ms) - Ss work in group to play game. - Use the qs with the advs of frequency. S1: What do you usually do after school? S2: I usually watch TV. Always often never Go go to the beach go/library swimming Usually Sometimes often Play soccer play tennis go/movies Usually often sometimes Watch TV play computer do games homework 3. Further practice: Language Focus 2 (5) p 71(3ms) - Ss read the information in the table and do the matching.. - Ss listen and answer the qs in speaking forn. - Go to the bb and rewrite the form of the present progressive.. - Ss listen to T’s reading. - Go to the bb and slap the correct words. - Ss listen to T.. - Look at the picture and labell the activities to the pictures in textbook. - Copy the answer key in their notebooks.. - Ss listen to T.. - work in group to play game by using qs and answer in the present simple with advs of frequency.. - Ss read the information in the table and do the.

(64) Activities: Frequency Go cafeteria never Ride bike somtimes Practice guitar often Do homework usually Play computer games always * Write it up: - Ss write sentences about Ba. IV. CONSOLIDATION:(3ms) - T asks ss say again the advs of frequency. - Ss say again the activities in A2 p61 V. HOMEWORK(3ms) - Ss revise the content of the lesson. - Learn by heart the advs of frequency. - Prepare for the new lesson: Lesson3: A3-4. matching.. - Ss go to the bb and match the activities with the advs fo frequency.. - Ss say again the use of advs of frequency.. - Ss revise the content of the lesson. Prepare new lesson: Lesson3 A3-4.. * Feedback. Pre: 04/11/2015 Tea: 05/11/ 2015 Period: 33. Unit 6 : Lesson 3: WHAT DO YOU DO? <A3,4> A. THE AIM AND REQUETS: 1. The aims: - T helps ss read the text about Nga, Nam, Ba and their pastime activities 2. Request: - By the end of the lesson ss will be able to understand about pastime activities. 3. T’s preparation: - Poster about Nga,Ba, Nam, pictures in textbook. B. PROCEDURE: T’S ACTIVITIES SS’ ACTIVITIES I. ORGANIZATION:(3ms) - T greeting to ss then asks some qs: - Ss listen to T. How are you today? What the weather like today? - Answer in speaking form. II. CHECKING UP THE OLD LESSON(5ms).

(65) - T calls 4ss to go to the bb and make 4sentences using the advs of frequency. - T corrects and gives marks. III. NEW LESSON: * Pre- Teach:(7ms) - sporty (adj) ThÝch thÓ thao Example - a comic: TruyÖn tranh Realia - a president: Chñ nhiÖm Example - (to) collect: Su tÇm/ thu nhÆt Situation - a collector: Ngêi su tËp Example - a collection: Sù/Bé su tËp Example - an anniversary cellerbration: Sù t/c hµng n¨m * Checking vocab: What and where 1. Pre- Reading: True/False Prediction: (5ms) - T sets the scene to introduce the lesson to ss. - Asks ss to work indi and read the statements in the poster and predict what are they true/false. - T gets feedback from ss. 1. Nga, Ba, Nam are ss in class 7A. 2. They like sports very much. 3.Nga’s favorite pastime is jogging. 4. Ba like collecting stamps. 5. Nam plays soccer every afternoon. 6. Nam usually watches TV. 2. While- Reading: A3p62:(10ms) - T aks ss read the text and check their prediction. - Ss correct their answers. - T gets feedback from ss. Answer keys: 1.T 2.F 3.F 4.T 5.F 6.T * Comprehension qs: A3 p62 a-d - Ss read the text again and asnwer the qs. - Ss report back to T. - Then ss copy the answers keys in their notebooks. 3. Post- Reading: A4 p63(7ms). - Ss go to the bb and make sentences.. - Ss listen and repeat after T. - Copy in their notebooks. - Ss practice saying the words in the circles.. - Ss listen to T.. - Read the sentences and predict what are they true/false. - Report back to T.. - Ss read the text to check their answers.. - Copy the answer key in their notebooks. - Ss read the text again and answer the comprehension questions. - Copy the answer in their notebooks..

(66) a. Matching: - Ss liste and match each name to an activity.b. Write it up: - Ss write short paragraph about after school activities using matching. After school hours, Mai often go to the school cafeteria...................... IV. CONSOLIDATION:(5ms) - Ss retell the text in short form. - Say again the newwords. V. HOMEWORK(3ms) - Ss learn by heart vocab. - Prepare for the new lesson: Lesson 4: B1 p64. - Ss listen and match each name to an activities. - Ss write a short paragraph about after school activities. - Ss retell the text in short form. - Learn by heart vocab at home and prepare for the new lesson: Lesson 4: B1.. * Feedback. Pre: 08/11/2015 Tea: 09/11/ 2015 Period: 34 Unit. 6 : Lesson 4: LET’S GO <B1>. A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to make suggestions with "What should we do/ What about...". I.Knowledge. - Making suggestios with "What should we do/ What about...". II. Skill -Reading and speaking skills. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision. -"slap the board" go to the concert play computer game. listen to music go to the movie. watch T.V III.New lesson. Teacher’s activities 1. Presentation.(20ms) a.Presentation dialogue. - B1 P.60 - Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the dialogue. - Asks Ss to practice the dialogue in pairs. - Checks S’s practicing in groups & in pairs.. Students’activities. -Answer the questions of the teacher. -Read the dialogue carefully and answer the quetions. - Reading the dialogue in individual..

(67) - Introduces the model sentences & helps Ss to practice. - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. b.Model sentences. T sets sence to give the model sentences. (S1:What should we do this evening?) -What about going to the movie? - Yes,that a great idea - Sorry, I can’t. c.Comprehension questions. - B1 P.61 a) - f) -Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work in pairs to answer. Then give the keys. -Corrects & comments. * Questions: 1. What does Nam want to do ? 2. Why doesnt Lan want to go to the movies ? 3. What does Lan want to do ? 4. Why doesnt Hoa want to go to Lans house ? 5. What day is it ? 2. Practice.(15ms) - "Word cue drill" - Introduces the model sentence & Helps Ss to practice. - Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in groups & in pairs . -Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments 3. Production.(8ms) - B1 P.36 (Workbook) - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work in pairs to write down the suggestion in the case of the possible dialogue, using the cues in the box. - Asks Ss to compare their dialogue. - Asks Ss to practice the dialogue in pairs. - Corrects & comments.. T controls and corrects.. -Correcting the pronunciation.. -Ss give the concept check.( check meaning, structure, using) About + going to -Ss prctice well ( open pairs, close pairs ) -Working in pairs to answer. Then giving the keys. *Answer: 1. Nam want to go to the movies. 2. Because there arent any good movies at the moment. 3. Lan want to go to her house to listen to some music. 4. Because Hoa has too many assignments 5. Its Saturday. - Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs . -Correcting the pronunciation. Cues: -go to the concert/yes -listen to music/ yes -play computer game/ sorry -watch T.V/ yes -go to school cafeteria/ sorry -Ss work in pairs to make questions and responses. - Working in pairs to write down the suggestion in the case of the possible dialogue, using the cues in the box. - Comparing & practicing the dialogue in pairs.  Dialogue: Lan: Let’s go swimming. Hoa: OK. Minh: Should we play table tennis ? Nam: I’m sorry. I can’t. Ba: Would you like to play basket ball ? Nga: I’d love to. -Take notes.. IV. Consolidation.(1m) - Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson. - Asks Ss to give the question & answer asking about after school activities: S1: What do you usually do after school ? S2: I usually meet my friends. V.Homework.(1m) - Study the vocabularies & the model by heart . -Writing a short paragraph to talk about your after school activities.. - Prepare the vocabulary & the picture on part 2 / page 62 for lesson 2. -Preparing: Unit 6: B2. * Feedback.

(68) Pre:10/11/2015 Tea: 11/11/ 2015 Period: 35. Unit 6 : Lesson 5: LET’S GO <B2> A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the details about pupil’s favorite leisure activities. I.Knowledge. - Pupil’s favorite leisure activities II. Skill -Reading skill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision. (3ms) -"Guessing game" Ex: Do you play computer games after school? - Yes, I do. - No, I don’t. III.New lesson. Teacher’s activities Students’activities 1. Pre-reading.(18ms) -Ss guess the meaning, pronunciation, a.Pre teach. -scout and practice the words well. -teenager -community service -volunteer -campaign - Listening to the words. - Introduces the words by explaining the - Repeating the words in chorus & in meaning, using the situation. individual. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times - Correcting the mistakes. ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Giving the meaning & the - Checks S’s reading in individual & pronunciation. corrects the mistakes. -Copying the words. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words b.Checking vocab. -Play well. - R.O.R c.Prediction. T asks Ss to predict things American -Ss predict things American teenagers teenagers like to do best in their free like to do best in their free time. time. -Introduces the requirement & ask Ss to work in individual to predict things American teenagers like to do best in -Ss read the text and check their their free time. -Asks Ss to compare in pairs & in predictions. - Working in individual to predict the groups. information things American teenagers -Asks Ss to give the information. like to do best in their free time. -Corrects & comments. -Giving the information. 2. While-reading.(15ms) a.Activity1: T asks Ss to read the text and check their -Ss to read B4 P.66 and answer the predictions. question *Answer key..

(69) - in P.65 (Unit6- B2) b.Activity 2: -T asks Ss to read B4 P.66 and answer the question" How do some teenagers -Ss list 3 most popular activities help the community?" VietNamese teenagers like to do help the -Ex: help elderly people( shopping, community. housework,clearn their yards,pait their -Ss work in group to practice. house.......etc.) -Take notes. 3. Post-reading. 7ms) T asks Ss to list 3 most popular activities VietNamese teenagers like to do help - Working in individual to write three the community. - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss most popular activities Vietnamese to work in individual to write three most teenagers like to do to help the popular activities Vietnamese teenagers community. - Comparing the information in pairs & like to do to help the community. -Asks Ss to compare in pairs & in in groups. - Giving the information. groups. -Asks Ss to give the information. -Corrects & comments. IV. Consolidation.(1m) -T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson. V.Homework.(1m) - Study the content of the text. - Exercise: Write about most popular activities Vietnamese teenagers like to do to help the community. Using the information you have written. - Prepare the exercises on part: Grammar practice.. * Feedback. Pre: 11/11/2015 Tea: 12/11/ 2015 Period: 36. Unit 6 : Lesson 6: LET’S GO <B3> A . Objectives .-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the way to make suggestions, arrangements and accept the invitation. I.Knowledge. - Making suggestions, arrangements and accepting the invitation II. Skill -Reading and speaking skills. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision. (3ms) -"Sit back the board" go shopping .listen to music go to the movie watch T.V play video game.

(70) III.New lesson. Teacher’s activities 1. Presentation (20ms) a.Presentation dialogue. - B3 P.66 - Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the text. - Asks Ss to read the text in individual. - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. b.Model sentences. T sets a scence to give the model sentences. S1: Would you like to come to my house for lunch? S2: Yes, I’d love to/ (I’m sorry,I can’t.). 2. Practice.(15ms) - "Word cue drill" -go shopping/ yes -go to the movie/ yes -play video game/ sorry -listen to music/ yes -go out for dinner/ sorry - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to practice. - Reads the first modal for example & asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in groups & in pairs . - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. 3. Production.(5ms) - "Mapped dialogue" Would/you/go out/dinner? Yes/What time....? 5:00 Bus stop. You’re welcome /Bye/See you. Where/can/meet? Yes./I/be/there thanks/inviting/me Bye/See you. Students’activities - Reading the dialogue in individual. -Correcting the pronunciation. *Model sentence: -Would you like to go to my house for lunch ? - Yes, I’d love to. - I’m sorry. I can’t.. - Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs . -Correcting the pronunciation. * Example exchange: S1: Would you like to go for a walk ? S2: Yes, I’d love to./ I’m sorry. I can’t. Ex: Nam: What would you like go out for dinner? Lan:Yes,I’d love to.What time? Nam: At five o’clock. Lan:Where can we meet? Nam: At the bus stop. Lan:Thanks for inviting me. Nam:You’re welcome. Bye.See you soon. Lan:Bye.See you soon.. IV. Consolidation.(1m) -T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson. -Ask Ss to explain the way to use the Present simple; The “Will future” & Preposition. - Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.. V.Homework.(1m) - Study the grammar & the modal sentence. - Prepare for the forty five minute test. -Preparing: Language focus 2.. * Feedback.

(71) Pre: 15/11/2015 Tea: 16/11/ 2015 Period: 37. LANGUAGE FOCUS 2 A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to cosolidate the knowledge from unit 1 to unit 6. I.Knowledge. - Present progreesive tense - simple present tense - Adverbs of frequency - Making suggestions II. Skill -Reading skill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision. III.New lesson. Teacher’s activities 1. Present progressive tense. T asks Ss give the structure and the way of using. Ex: S + (to) be + V-ing + O. <S + (to)be-not + V-ing + O> <(To)Be + S + V-ing + O ?> <diễn tả những hành động đang xảy ra ngay lúc nói> -T controls and corrects. T gives exercise 1 P.68 to asks Ss to do well. *Answer key. -doing -is writing -is reading -is cooking -are playing -is kiching - is running. 2. Adverbs of frequency. - "Find S.O who" Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri. Sart Sun. Students’activities -Ss remind and answer.. -Ss do Ex.1 in group.. -Ss put the ask and answer..

(72) Ex: S1:Do you go to cafeteria on Monday, Lan? S2:Yes, I do. .....etc.. go to Lan ... cafeteria ride bike to school practice guitar after school do homework evening 3. Vocabulary subjects. T gives 6 pictures in book P.70. *Answer key. Picture a :Physical education Picture b:Chemistry Picture c: Math Picture d: Geography Picture e: English Picture f: History -T corrects.. -Ss write the correct subjects.. V. Consolidation. -T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson. V.Homework. -Doing exercise : -Preparing: Written test 45 minutes.. Pre: /11/2015 Tea: /11/ 2015 Period : 38. WRITTEN TEST 2 Time : 45 minutes.. A . Objectives -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to consolidate the knowledge from unit 4 to unit 6..

(73) I.Knowledge. -The present simple. -The "Will" future -The near future -The prepositions II. Skill -Writting skill B. Proceduce. I.Greeting *- Ma trËn: NhËn biÕt Chủ đề TL TN 6 I. Listening 1,5. Th«ng hiÓu. Tæng sè: TN. TL. IV. Writing Tæng sè:. TN 2 1,0. TL 8 2,5. 4 2,0. II. Reading III. Language focus. VËn dông. 8 2,0. 2 0,5. 4 1,0. 2 1,0. 12 3,0 4 1,0. 16 4,5. 8 3,0. 6 2,5. 8 2,5. 6 2,0 32 10. CODE1 I/Listening: (2,5m ) 1.Listen and fill in the blanks the right word. (1,5ms ) Students nowadays have more chances to take part in after-school (1)...................... Some students stay at school and play (2)........................... such as football, badminton and table tennis. These sports help them not only (3)........ .......... themselves but also improve their health. Other students attend music and drama clubs. They practise (4).......................... musical instruments or(5)................................ for a play. Students who enjoy social activities join the Red Cross. Members of this society learn how to do first aids. They are willing to go to remote areas to help poor people (6)......................... disabled people on their days-off. 2.Listen and answer the questions:(1m ) 1.What do students nowadays have more chances to do? ………………………………………………………….. 2.Do they often play badminton after school? …………………………………………….. II/ Choose the best answer (2ms) 1/ She learns ……………………….to use a computer . a.how b.what c.when d.where 2/ He is interested …….computer science . a.on b.at c.in d.for 3/ He ………………………….TV at the moment ..

(74) a.is watches b.is watching c.watches d.will watch 4/ All of them enjoys ………………………….marbles at recess. a. playing b.play c.to play d.plays 5/ What about ………………………… to the movies ? a.go b.to go c.going d.will go 6/ Nam is good ………………………..drawing . a.with b.at c.of d.in 7/ In………………….we study about past and present events in Vietnam and around the world. a.History b.Literature c.Physics d.Geography 8/ Let’s ………………………………..him to the party . a. invite b.to invite c.inviting d.invites III/Use the correct verb forms:(1,0m) 1. My father never (drink) ……………………… coffee. 2. He (visit) ……………………….. his grandparents next week. 3. Nga (play) …………………………. the guitar now. 4. Would you like(have) ……………………….a cup of tea ? IV/ Read the text carefully. (2,5m) Mai is a student at Quang Trung school . She is in grade 7 . She goes to school six days a week, from Monday to Saturday . Classes always begin at seven o’clock and finish at a quarter past eleven . Today Mai has four classes : English , geograpgy, computer science and physics . Mai is interested in computer. She thinks geography is difficult and so is English . In her physics class she often does some experiments . 1.Answer the questions 2,0 ms) a/ Which school does Mai go to ? ……………………………………………………………………………… b/ Does Mai go to school on Thursday ? ……………………………………………………………………………… c/ What time do classes finish ? …………………………………………………………………………… d/ What is her favorite subject ? …………………………………………………………………………… 2. True or False (0,5ms) .................a. Mai is a student at Quang Trung school. .................b. Mai isn’t interested in computer. V / Arrange these words to make a complete sentence .(1,0m) 1/ sometimes/ the movies/Nam / goes/ to/ Sunday / on ………………………………………………………………… 2/ you/ me/like/ would/ tennis/ to / play / with? …………………………………………………………………………… VI. Write the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first.(1,0m) 1. Why don’t we go to the cafeteria ? -> What about………………………………………………………………… 2. The car is more expensive than the motorbike . - > the motorbike .…………………………………………………………………… 3. My favorite subject is English. - > I like…………………………………………………………………………...

(75) 4.The movie is very exciting. - > What……………………………………………………………………………. CODE2 I/Listening: (2,5m ) 1.Listen and fill in the blanks the right word. (1,5m ) Students nowadays have more chances to take part in after-school (1).................. Some students stay at school and play (2)............................... such as football,badminton and table tennis. These sports help them not only (3).......................... .themselves but also improve their health. Other students attend music and drama clubs. They practise (4)............................ musical instruments or (5)................... for a play. Students who enjoy social activities join the Red Cross. Members of this society learn how to do first aids. They are willing to go to remote areas to help poor people (6) ..................................... disabled people on their days-off. 2.Listen and answer the questions:(1m ) 1.What do students nowadays have more chances to do? ………………………………………………………….. 2.Do they often play football after school? …………………………………………….. II/ Choose the best answer (2ms) 1/ What about ………………………… to the movies ? a.go b.to go c.going d.will go 2/ Nam is good ………………………..drawing . a.with b.at c.of d.in 3/ In………………….we study about past and present events in Vietnam and around the world. a.History b.Literature c.Physics d.Geography 4/ Let’s ………………………………..him to the party . a. invite b.to invite c.inviting d.invites 5/ She learns ……………………….to use a computer . a.how b.what c.when d.where 6/ He is interested …….computer science . a.on b.at c.in d.for 7/ He ………………………….TV at the moment . a.is watches b.is watching c.watches d.will watch 8/ All of them enjoys ………………………….marbles at recess. a. playing b.play c.to play d.plays III/Use the correct verb forms:(1,0m) 1. Lan (play) …………………………. the guitar now. 2. Would you like(have) ……………………….a cup of tea ? 3. My mother never (drink) ……………………… coffee. 4. She (visit) ……………………….. her grandparents next week. IV/ Read the text carefully. (2,5m) Nga is a student at Quang Long school . She is in grade 6 . She goes to school six days a week, from Monday to Saturday . Classes always begin at seven o’clock and finish at a quarter past eleven . Today Nga has four classes : English , geograpgy, computer science and physics . Nga is interested in computer. She thinks geography is difficult and so is English . In her physics class she often does some experiments ..

(76) 1.Answer the questions 2,0 ms) a/ Which school does Nga go to ? ……………………………………………………………………………… b/ Does Nga go to school on Thursday ? ……………………………………………………………………………… c/ What is her favorite subject ? …………………………………………………………………………… d/ What time do classes finish ? …………………………………………………………………………… 2. True or False (0,5ms) .................a. Nga is a student at Quang Long school. .................b. Nga isn’t interested in computer. V / Arrange these words to make a complete sentence .(1,0ms) 1/ you/ me/like/ would/ badminton/ to / play / with? …………………………………………………………………………… 2/ sometimes/ the movies/Hung / goes/ to/ Sunday / on ………………………………………………………………… VI. Write the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first.(1,0ms) 1. Why don’t we go to the zoo ? -> Let’s………………………………………………………………… 2. the motorbike .is more expensive than the bike . - > the bike .…………………………………………………………………… 3. My favorite food is fish. - > I like………………………………………………………………………… 4. The hat is very cheap. - > What………………………………………………………………….. PHÒNG GD & ĐT THỊ XÃ BA ĐỒN ĐỀ KIỂM TRA 1 TIẾT LẦN 2 TRƯỜNG THCS QUẢNG LONG NĂM HỌC: 2015 – 2016 ĐIỂM MÔN: TIẾNG ANH LỚP 7 Lớp:............................................................ Thời gian làm bài: 45 phút Họ và Tên: ................................................. CODE1 I/Listening: (2,5m ) 1.Listen and fill in the blanks the right word. (1,5ms ) Students nowadays have more chances to take part in after-school (1)...................... Some students stay at school and play (2)........................... such as football, badminton and table tennis. These sports help them not only (3)........ .......... themselves but also improve their health. Other students attend music and drama clubs. They practise (4).......................... musical instruments or(5)................................ for a play. Students who enjoy social activities join the Red Cross. Members of this society learn how to do first aids. They are willing to go to remote areas to help poor people (6)......................... disabled people on their days-off. 2.Listen and answer the questions:(1m ) 1.What do students nowadays have more chances to do? ………………………………………………………….. 2.Do they often play badminton after school?.

(77) …………………………………………….. II/ Choose the best answer (2ms) 1/ She learns ……………………….to use a computer . a.how b.what c.when d.where 2/ He is interested …….computer science . a.on b.at c.in d.for 3/ He ………………………….TV at the moment . a.is watches b.is watching c.watches d.will watch 4/ All of them enjoys ………………………….marbles at recess. a. playing b.play c.to play d.plays 5/ What about ………………………… to the movies ? a.go b.to go c.going d.will go 6/ Nam is good ………………………..drawing . a.with b.at c.of d.in 7/ In………………….we study about past and present events in Vietnam and around the world. a.History b.Literature c.Physics d.Geography 8/ Let’s ………………………………..him to the party . a. invite b.to invite c.inviting d.invites III/Use the correct verb forms:(1,0m) 4. My father never (drink) ……………………… coffee. 5. He (visit) ……………………….. his grandparents next week. 6. Nga (play) …………………………. the guitar now. 4. Would you like(have) ……………………….a cup of tea ? IV/ Read the text carefully. (2,5m) Mai is a student at Quang Trung school . She is in grade 7 . She goes to school six days a week, from Monday to Saturday . Classes always begin at seven o’clock and finish at a quarter past eleven . Today Mai has four classes : English , geograpgy, computer science and physics . Mai is interested in computer. She thinks geography is difficult and so is English . In her physics class she often does some experiments . 1.Answer the questions 2,0 ms) a/ Which school does Mai go to ? ……………………………………………………………………………… b/ Does Mai go to school on Thursday ? ……………………………………………………………………………… c/ What time do classes finish ? …………………………………………………………………………… d/ What is her favorite subject ? …………………………………………………………………………… 2. True or False (0,5ms) .................a. Mai is a student at Quang Trung school. .................b. Mai isn’t interested in computer. V / Arrange these words to make a complete sentence .(1,0m) 1/ sometimes/ the movies/Nam / goes/ to/ Sunday / on ………………………………………………………………… 2/ you/ me/like/ would/ tennis/ to / play / with? …………………………………………………………………………….

(78) VI. Write the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first.(1,0m) 1. Why don’t we go to the cafeteria ? -> What about…………………………………………………………………? 2. The car is more expensive than the motorbike . - > the motorbike .…………………………………………………………………… 3. My favorite subject is English. - > I like………………………………………………………………………….. 4.The movie is very exciting. - > What…………………………………………………………………………….. PHÒNG GD & ĐT THỊ XÃ BA ĐỒN TRƯỜNG THCS QUẢNG LONG. ĐỀ KIỂM TRA 1 TIẾT LẦN 2 NĂM HỌC: 2015 – 2016 ĐIỂM MÔN: TIẾNG ANH LỚP 7 Lớp:............................................................ Thời gian làm bài: 45 phút Họ và Tên: ................................................. CODE2 I/Listening: (2,5m ) 1.Listen and fill in the blanks the right word. (1,5m ) Students nowadays have more chances to take part in after-school (1).................. Some students stay at school and play (2)............................... such as football,badminton and table tennis. These sports help them not only (3).......................... .themselves but also improve their health. Other students attend music and drama clubs. They practise (4)............................ musical instruments or (5)................... for a play. Students who enjoy social activities join the Red Cross. Members of this society learn how to do first aids. They are willing to go to remote areas to help poor people (6) ..................................... disabled people on their days-off. 2.Listen and answer the questions:(1m ) 1.What do students nowadays have more chances to do? ………………………………………………………….. 2.Do they often play football after school? …………………………………………….. II/ Choose the best answer (2ms) 1/ What about ………………………… to the movies ? a.go b.to go c.going d.will go 2/ Nam is good ………………………..drawing . a.with b.at c.of d.in 3/ In………………….we study about past and present events in Vietnam and around the world..

(79) a.History b.Literature c.Physics d.Geography 4/ Let’s ………………………………..him to the party . a. invite b.to invite c.inviting d.invites 5/ She learns ……………………….to use a computer . a.how b.what c.when d.where 6/ He is interested …….computer science . a.on b.at c.in d.for 7/ He ………………………….TV at the moment . a.is watches b.is watching c.watches d.will watch 8/ All of them enjoys ………………………….marbles at recess. a. playing b.play c.to play d.plays III/Use the correct verb forms:(1,0m) 1. Lan (play) …………………………. the guitar now. 2. Would you like(have) ……………………….a cup of tea ? 3. My mother never (drink) ……………………… coffee. 4. She (visit) ……………………….. her grandparents next week. IV/ Read the text carefully. (2,5m) Nga is a student at Quang Long school . She is in grade 6 . She goes to school six days a week, from Monday to Saturday . Classes always begin at seven o’clock and finish at a quarter past eleven . Today Nga has four classes : English , geograpgy, computer science and physics . Nga is interested in computer. She thinks geography is difficult and so is English . In her physics class she often does some experiments . 1.Answer the questions 2,0 ms) a/ Which school does Nga go to ? ……………………………………………………………………………… b/ Does Nga go to school on Thursday ? ……………………………………………………………………………… c/ What is her favorite subject ? …………………………………………………………………………… d/ What time do classes finish ? …………………………………………………………………………… 2. True or False (0,5ms) .................a. Nga is a student at Quang Long school. .................b. Nga isn’t interested in computer. V / Arrange these words to make a complete sentence .(1,0ms) 1/ you/ me/like/ would/ badminton/ to / play / with? …………………………………………………………………………… 2/ sometimes/ the movies/Hung / goes/ to/ Sunday / on ………………………………………………………………… VI. Write the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first.(1,0ms) 1. Why don’t we go to the zoo ? -> Let’s…………………………………………………………………? 2. the motorbike .is more expensive than the bike . - > the bike .…………………………………………………………………… 3. My favorite food is fish. - > I like………………………………………………………………………… 4. The hat is very cheap..

(80) - > What…………………………………………………………………... Pre: / 11/ 2015 Tea: / 11/ 2015 Period : 39 TEST CORRECTION A./ OBJECTIVES: I. Knowlege: - Helps Ss to examinize and evaluate their learning - Helps T to consolidate the knowledge in Unit 4,5 and 6. II. Skills: Writing, reading, vocab. and grammar practice. III.Teaching aid & Preparation : * Teacher's : Lesson plan; test papers. * Student's : notebooks, books B./ PROCEDURES: I. Settlement: Greets and checks attendance II. Control: - Gives out the testing paper. - Controls the class. III. COLLECTION: - Asks Ss to hand in the tests and evaluates the lesson. - Asks them to revise the knowlege at home for the test correction Code 1. I/Listening: (2,5m ) 1.Listen and fill in the blanks the right word. (1,5m ) 1. activities 2.sports 3.relax 4.playing 5. rehearse 6. and 2.Listen and answer the questions:(1m ) 1.Students nowadays have more chances to take part in after-school activities. 2. Yes, they do. Tapescript: Students nowadays have more chances to take part in after-school activities. Some students stay at school and play such sports as football, badminton and table tennis. These sports help them not only relax themselves but also improve their health..

(81) Other students attend music and drama clubs. They practise playing musical instruments or rehearse for a play. Students who enjoy social activities join the Red Cross. Members of this society learn how to do first aids. They are willing to go to remote areas to help poor people and disabled people on their days-off. II/ Choose the best answer (2ms) 1.a 2.c 3.b 4.a 5.c 6.b 7.a 8.a III/Use the correct verb forms:(1,0m) 1.drinks 2.will visit 3.is playing 4.to have IV/ Read the text carefully. (2,5m) 1.Answer the questions 2,0 ms) a/ Mai goes to Quang Trung school. b/ Yes,she does. c/ Classes finish at a quarter past eleven. d/ Her favorite subject is computer. 2. True or False (0,5ms) a. T b. F. V / Arrange these words to make a complete sentence(1,0m) 1 . Nam sometimes goes to the movies on Sunday. 2. Would you like to play tennis with me? VI. Write the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first.(1,0m) 1. What about going to the cafeteria? 2. The motorbike is cheaper than the car. 3. I like English best. 4. What an exciting movie! Code 2. I/Listening: (2,5m ) 1.Listen and fill in the blanks the right word. (1,5m ) 1. activities 2.sports 3.relax 4.playing 5. rehearse 6. and 2.Listen and answer the questions:(1m ) 1.Students nowadays have more chances to take part in after-school activities. 2. Yes, they do. Tapescript: Students nowadays have more chances to take part in after-school activities. Some students stay at school and play such sports as football, badminton and table tennis. These sports help them not only relax themselves but also improve their health. Other students attend music and drama clubs. They practise playing musical instruments or rehearse for a play. Students who enjoy social activities join the Red Cross. Members of this society learn how to do first aids. They are willing to go to remote areas to help poor people and disabled people on their days-off. II/ Choose the best answer (2ms) 1.c 2.b 3.a 4.a 5.a 6.c 7.b 8.a III/Use the correct verb forms:(1,0m) 1.is playing 2.to have 3.drinks 4.will visit IV/ Read the text carefully. (2,5m).

(82) 1.Answer the questions 2,0 ms) a/ Mai goes to Quang Long school. b/ Yes,she does. c/ Her favorite subject is computer. d/ Classes finish at a quarter past eleven. 2. True or False (0,5ms) a. T 2. F V/ Arrange these words to make a complete sentence .(1,0ms) 1.Would you like to play badminton with me? 2.Hung sometimes goes to the movies on Sunday. VI. Write the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first.(1,0ms) 1. Let’s go to the zoo. 2. the bike is cheaper than the motorbike. 3. I like fish best. 4. What a cheap hat! C. CONSOLIDATION: Review some knowlrge they learnt HOMEWORK: Asks Ss to prepare Unit 7: A1 for the next lesson.

(83) Full name: ……………………. Class:………………………….. Date: 17/11/2014 (code 2) Subject: English Bài kiểm tra số 2 Thời gian: 45 phút(không kể thời gian giao đề) I/Listen and complete the passage: (2m) same. go. last. Saturday. has. education. on. class. On Friday morning, Ba and Hoa ………………….. to school. Some of the subjects they do on …………………………… are the same, but some of them are different. At seven o’clock, Ba has Technology and Hoa ………………Computer Science. These classes ……………………..for two periods. At 8.40, Ba has Geography. Hoa does not have Geography ……………………Saturday. She has Physical ………………….instead. In the last period, they have the ……………………………… class. Hoa and Ba both have ……………………..activities then. II / Arrange these words to make a complete sentence .(2,0ms) 1/ sometimes/ the movies/Nam / goes/ to/ Sunday / on …………………………………………………………………………… 2/now/ marbles/ boys/the/ yard/playing/in /are/the? …………………………………………………………………………. 3/ Phong/ interested / in / is/ music / …………………………………………………………………………… 4/ you/ me/like/ would/ tennis/ to / play / with? …………………………………………………………………………… III/ Read and answer the questions (2,5ms) Mai is a student at Quang Trung school . She is in grade 7 . She goes to school six days a week, from Monday to Saturday . Classes always begin at seven o’clock and finish at a quarter past eleven . Today Mai has four classes : English , geograpgy, computer science and physics . Mai is interested in computer. She thinks geography is difficult and so is English . In her physics class she often does some experiments . a.Questions: 1/ Which school does Mai go to ? ……………………………………………………………………………… 2/ Does Mai go to school on Thursday ?.

(84) ……………………………………………………………………………… 3/ What time do classes finish ? …………………………………………………………………………… 4/ What is her favorite subject ? …………………………………………………………………………… b. True or False T /F 1. Mai is a student at Quang Trung school. T /F 2. Mai isn’t interested in computer. IV/Use the correct verb forms:(1,5m) 1.My mother never (drink) ……………………tea. 2.He usually (go) ……………………… to school by bike. 3.I (visit) ……………………….. his grandparents next week. 4.Nga (play) …………………………. the guitar now. 5.Would you like(have) ……………………….a cup of lemonade ? V/ Choose the best answer (2ms) 1/ She learns ……………………….to use a computer . a.how b.what c.when d.where 2/ He is interested …….computer science . a.on b.at c.in d.for 3/ He ………………………….TV at the moment . a.is watches b.is watching c.watches d.will watch 4/ All of them enjoys ………………………….marbles at recess. a. playing b.play c.to play d.plays 5/ What about ………………………… to the movies ? a.go b.to go c.going d.will go 6/ Nam is good ………………………..drawing . a.with b.at c.of d.in 7/ In………………….we study about past and present events in Vietnam and around the world. a.History b.Literature c.Physics d.Geography 8/ Let’s ………………………………..him to the party . a. invite b.to invite c.inviting d.invites.

(85) Pre: 20/11/2014 Tea: 21/11/ 2014 Period : 38. WRITTEN TEST 2 Time : 45 minutes. A . Objectives -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to consolidate the knowledge from unit 4 to unit 6. I.Knowledge. -The present simple. -The "Will" future -The near future -The prepositions II. Skill -Writting skill B. Proceduce. I.Greeting *- Ma trËn: NhËn biÕt Th«ng hiÓu VËn dông Chủ đề Tæng sè: TL TL TL TN TN TN I. Listening II. Reading. 4 1,0. III. Language focus IV. Writing Tæng sè:. 2 1,0 4 2,0. 4 1,0 12 4,0. 10. 12 3,5. 6 2,0 4 1,0 3 1,5. 2,5. 7 2,5. Number 1 I.Find the one word out. (2m) 1. a.teenager b.student c.neighborhood 2. a.nice b.well c.new 3. a.author b.writing c.stories 4. a.Music b.History c.vocabulary II.Choose the best answer( a,b,c or d) (2,5M) 1. Let’s...............................a game. a. to play b. play c. plays 2. It’s time......................recess. a. on b.in c.for 3. What ...........................? - I’m studying Math.. 18 5,5 7 2,5 31 10. d.clean d.late d.paintings d.Physics d. playing d.a.

(86) a. are you studying? b. do you study? c. you are studying? d.are you study? 4. What are you going to do after school? a. I play volleyball b. I’m going to play volleyball. c.I go home d. a& b are correct 5.They talk........................their class. a. at b. on c. about d.in 6. How often does he go to the library? a. He often goes there after school. b. He goes often there after school. c. He often go there after school. d. He goes there after school. 7. She learns ................ to use a computer. a. how b. what c. which d. why 8. Those books ...................the back of the library are in English. a.in b.on c.at d.under 9. Which............... do you like best? - I like English best. a. subject b. room c. school d.sport 10. American students take part ........................... different activities at recess. a. on b. at c. about d.in II.Complete the sentences.( 1M) 1.He writes for Ha Noi newspaper. He is a...................................................... 2.She takes care of sick people in a hospital. She is a...................................... 3. They work on their farm. They are .............................................................. 4.She teaches in a school. She is a.................................................................... III.Match the advice in column B with the situations in column A( 1M) A B Answer key 1: 1.What do you do in a.He is playing catch. your free time?. 2: 2.What is he doing? b.I listen to some music. 3: 3.What does she c.He is in the music usually do? room. 4.Where is Ba? d.She usually skip rope. 4: IV.Fill in the blank with one word in the box.(1M) talk president bring. stamps. Ba is the ....................(1) of the stamp collector’s club. On Wednesday afternoon, he and his friends get together and ............................(2) about their stamps. If they have any new ...................(3), they usually ...........................(4) them to school. Ba’s American friend, Liz, give him a lot of American satmps. Answer the questions: (1M) 1.When does the stamp collector’s club meet? ............................................................................................................................ 2.Who is the president of the stamp collector’s club? ............................................................................................................................ V.Write the sentences. Use the cue words. (1,5Ms) 1./school/ let’s/ go/ to/. .......................................................................... 2./about/What/ playing/soccer/? ............................................................................. 3./ Hue/ will/I/visit/tomorrow/. .............................................................................. Number 2.

(87) I.Find the one word out. (2m) 1. a.author b.writing c.stories d.paintings 2. a.Music b.History c.vocabulary d.Physics 3. a.teenager b.student c.neighborhood d.clean 4. a.nice b.well c.new d.late II.Choose the best answer( a,b,c or d) (2,5M) 1. How often does he go to the library? a. He often goes there after school. b. He goes often there after school. c. He often go there after school. d. He goes there after school. 2. She learns ................ to use a computer. a. how b. what c. which d. why 3. Those books ...................the back of the library are in English. a.in b.on c.at d.under 4. Which............... do you like best? - I like English best. a. subject b. room c. school d.sport 5. American students take part ........................... different activities at recess. a. on b. at c. about d.in 6. Let’s...............................a game. a. to play b. play c. plays d. playing 7. It’s time......................recess. a. on b.in c.for d.a 8. What ...........................? - I’m studying Math. a. are you studying? b. do you study? c. you are studying? d.are you study? 9. What are you going to do after school? a. I play volleyball b. I’m going to play volleyball. c.I go home d. a& b are correct 10.They talk........................their class. a. at b. on c. about d.in II.Complete the sentences.( 1M) 1. They work on their farm. They are .............................................................. 2.She teaches in a school. She is a.................................................................... 3.He writes for Ha Noi newspaper. He is a...................................................... 4.She takes care of sick people in a hospital. She is a...................................... III.Match the advice in column B with the situations in column A( 1M) A B Answer key 1: 1. Where is Ba? a.He is playing catch. 2.What does she usually do? 3. What is he doing? 4.What do you do in your free time?.. 2: b.I listen to some music. 3: c.He is in the music room. d.She usually skip rope. 4:. IV.Fill in the blank with one word in the box.(1M) talk president bring. stamps. Ba is the ....................(1) of the stamp collector’s club. On Wednesday afternoon, he and his friends get together and ............................(2) about their stamps. If they have any new ...................(3), they usually ...........................(4) them to school. Ba’s American friend, Liz, give him a lot of American satmps. Answer the questions: (1M) 1. Who is the president of the stamp collector’s club? ............................................................................................................................ 2. When does the stamp collector’s club meet? .............................................................................................................................

(88) V.Write the sentences. Use the cue words. (1,5Ms) 1./the movies / let’s/ go/ to/. .......................................................................... 2./What/soccer/about/ playing? ............................................................................. 3./ visit/will/ I /Ha Long Bay/tomorrow. .............................................................................. the end -good luck. MATRIX Contents A. Pronunciation B. Vocabulary & Structure C. Reading. Recognizin g 4 1,0 12 3,0. Understanding. Application. Sum 4 1,0 12 3,0. 4. 4 2,0. D. Writing. 3,0 2. 6. 8 4,0. Sum. 16. 1,0 2. 4 4,0. 2,0 1,0. 3,0 6 28 3,0 10,0.

(89) WRITTEN TEST 2-A Time : 45 minutes. Full name: Class: 7 I.Find the one word out. (2m) 1. a.teenager b.student c.neighborhood d.clean 2. a.nice b.well c.new d.late 3. a.author b.writing c.stories d.paintings 4. a.Music b.History c.vocabulary d.Physics II.Choose the best answer( a,b,c or d) (2,5M) 1. Let’s...............................a game. a. to play b. play c. plays d. playing 2. It’s time......................recess. a. on b.in c.for d.a 3. What ...........................? - I’m studying Math. a. are you studying? b. do you study? c. you are studying? d.are you study? 4. What are you going to do after school? a. I play volleyball b. I’m going to play volleyball. c.I go home d. a& b are correct 5.They talk........................their class. a. at b. on c. about d.in 6. How often does he go to the library? a. He often goes there after school. b. He goes often there after school. c. He often go there after school. d. He goes there after school. 7. She learns ................ to use a computer. a. how b. what c. which d. why 8. Those books ...................the back of the library are in English. a.in b.on c.at d.under 9. Which............... do you like best? - I like English best. a. subject b. room c. school d.sport 10. American students take part ........................... different activities at recess. a. on b. at c. about d.in II.Complete the sentences.( 1M) 1.He writes for Ha Noi newspaper. He is a...................................................... 2.She takes care of sick people in a hospital. She is a...................................... 3. They work on their farm. They are .............................................................. 4.She teaches in a school. She is a.....................................................................

(90) III.Match the advice in column B with the situations in column A( 1M) A B Answer key 1: 1.What do you do in a.He is playing catch. your free time?. 2: 2.What is he doing? b.I listen to some music. 3: 3.What does she c.He is in the music usually do? room. 4.Where is Ba? d.She usually skip rope. 4: IV.Fill in the blank with one word in the box.(1M) talk president bring. Stamps. Ba is the ....................(1) of the stamp collector’s club. On Wednesday afternoon, he and his friends get together and ............................(2) about their stamps. If they have any new ...................(3), they usually ...........................(4) them to school. Ba’s American friend, Liz, give him a lot of American satmps. Answer the questions: (1M) 1.When does the stamp collector’s club meet? ............................................................................................................................ 2.Who is the president of the stamp collector’s club? ............................................................................................................................ V.Write the sentences. Use the cue words. (1,5Ms) 1./school/ let’s/ go/ to/. .......................................................................... 2./about/What/ playing/soccer/? ............................................................................. 3./ Hue/ will/I/visit/tomorrow/. .............................................................................. the end -good luck. WRITTEN TEST 2-B Time : 45 minutes.. Full name: Class: 7 I.Find the one word out. (2m) 1. a.author b.writing c.stories 2. a.Music b.History c.vocabulary 3. a.teenager b.student c.neighborhood 4. a.nice b.well c.new II.Choose the best answer( a,b,c or d) (2,5M) 1. How often does he go to the library? a. He often goes there after school. b. He goes often there after school. c. He often go there after school.. d.paintings d.Physics d.clean d.late.

(91) d. He goes there after school. 2. She learns ................ to use a computer. a. how b. what c. which d. why 3. Those books ...................the back of the library are in English. a.in b.on c.at d.under 4. Which............... do you like best? - I like English best. a. subject b. room c. school d.sport 5. American students take part ........................... different activities at recess. a. on b. at c. about d.in 6. Let’s...............................a game. a. to play b. play c. plays d. playing 7. It’s time......................recess. a. on b.in c.for d.a 8. What ...........................? - I’m studying Math. a. are you studying? b. do you study? c. you are studying? d.are you study? 9. What are you going to do after school? a. I play volleyball b. I’m going to play volleyball. c.I go home d. a& b are correct 10.They talk........................their class. a. at b. on c. about d.in II.Complete the sentences.( 1M) 1. They work on their farm. They are .............................................................. 2.She teaches in a school. She is a.................................................................... 3.He writes for Ha Noi newspaper. He is a...................................................... 4.She takes care of sick people in a hospital. She is a....................................... III.Match the advice in column B with the situations in column A( 1M) A B Answer key 1: 1. Where is Ba? a.He is playing catch. 2.What does she usually do? 3. What is he doing? 4.What do you do in your free time?.. 2: b.I listen to some music. 3: c.He is in the music room. d.She usually skip rope. 4:. IV.Fill in the blank with one word in the box.(1M) talk president bring. Stamps. Ba is the ....................(1) of the stamp collector’s club. On Wednesday afternoon, he and his friends get together and ............................(2) about their stamps. If they have any new ...................(3), they usually ...........................(4) them to school. Ba’s American friend, Liz, give him a lot of American satmps. Answer the questions: (1M) 1. Who is the president of the stamp collector’s club? ............................................................................................................................ 2. When does the stamp collector’s club meet? ............................................................................................................................ V.Write the sentences. Use the cue words. (1,5Ms) 1./the movies / let’s/ go/ to/. .......................................................................... 2./What/soccer/about/ playing?.

(92) ............................................................................. 3./ visit/will/ I /Ha Long Bay/tomorrow. .............................................................................. the end -good luck. Tea: 23 /11/ 2012 Period: 39. Test remark. A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to consolidate the knowledge from the text. I.Knowledge. -The present simple. -The "Will" future -The prepositions II. Skill -Writting skill B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision. Teacher’s activities Students’activi ties answer key I.Find the one word out. (2m) -Ss give the 1.a.teenager b.student c.neighborhood d.clean asnwer and 2.a.nice b.well c.new d.late takes notes the 3.a.author b.writing c.stories d.paintings correct of 4.a.Music b.History c.vocabulary teacher d.Physics -copy the II.Choose the best answer( a,b,c or d) (2,5M) answer 1. Let’s...............................a game. I. a. to play b. play c. plays d. plaing 1.d 2. It’s time......................recess. 2.b a. on b.in c.for d.a 3.d 3. What ...........................? - I’m studying Math. 4.c a. are you studying? b. do you study? c. you are studying? d.are you study? II. 4. What are you going to do after school? 1.b a. I play volleyball b. I’m going to play volleyball. 2.c c.I go home d. a& b are correct 3.a 5.They talk........................their class. 4.b a. at b. on c. about d.in 5.c 6. How often does he go to the library? 6.a a. He often goes there after school. 7.a b. He goes often there after school. 8.c c. He often go there after school..

(93) d. He goes there after school. 7. She learns ................ to use a computer. a. how b. what c. which d. why 8. Those books .............the back of the library are in English. a.in b.on c.at d.under 9. Which............... do you like best? - I like English best. a. subject b. room c. school d.sport 10. American students take part ................. different activities at recess. a. on b. at c. about d.in III.Complete the sentences.( 1M) 1.He writes for Ha Noi newspaper. He is a.............................. 2.She takes care of sick people in a hospital. She is a................ 3. They work on their farm. They are ................................... 4.She teaches in a school. She is a......................................... IV.Match the advice in column B with the situations in column A( 1M) A B Answer key 1: 1.What do you do in a.He is playing catch. your free time?. 2: 2.What is he doing? b.I listen to some music. 3: 3.What does she c.He is in the music usually do? room. 4.Where is Ba? d.She usually skip rope. 4: VI.Fill in the blank with one word in the box.(1M) talk president bring stamps Ba is the ....................(1) of the stamp collector’s club. On Wednesday afternoon, he and his friends get together and ............................(2) about their stamps. If they have any new ...................(3), they usually ...........................(4) them to school. Ba’s American school, Liz, give him a lot of American satmps. Answer the questions: (1M) 1.When does the stamp collector’s club meet? .................................................................................................. 2.Who is the president of the stamp collector’s club? ................................................................................................. VII.Write the sentences. Use the cue words. (1,5 Ms) 1./school/ let’s/ go/ to/. .......................................................................... 2./about/What/ playing/soccer/? ............................................................................. 3./ Hue/ will/I/visit/tomorrow/. .............................................................................. IV. Consolidation. -T calls some Ss to give the main grammar in this text. V.Homework. -Doing exercise : doing again the text at home. -Preparing: Unit 7 :A1. 9.a 10.d. III. 1.jounalist 2.nurse/doctor 3.famer 4.teacher IV. 1.b 2.a 3.d 4.c. VI. 1.president 2.talk 3.stamps 4.bring -On Wednesday afternoon. -It’s Ba VII 1.Let’s go to school. 2.What about playing soccer?. 3.I will visit Hue tomorrow..

(94) Pre: /11/2015 Tea: /11/ 2015 Period: 40. Unit 7 : THE WORLD OF WORK Lesson 1: A STUDENT’S WORK<A1> A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to talk about activities at school and in vacation. I.Knowledge. - Activities at school and in vacation. II. Skill -Reading and speaking drill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision. -"Slap the board"(5ms) vacation do my homework. go to the seaside play soccer. work on a farm. III.New lesson. Teacher s activities Students activities 1. Presentation.(10ms) a.Presentation dialogue. - A1 P.72 - Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the - Practicing the dialogue in pairs dialogue. - Asks Ss to practice the dialogue in -Correcting the pronunciation. pairs..

(95) - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. b.Comprehension questions. - A1 P.73 - Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work in pairs to ask & answer the questions. - Asks Ss to give the answer keys. - Helps Ss to correct & comments. * Questions: a. What time do Hoa s classes start ? b. What time do they finish ? c. For how many hours a day does Hoa do her homework ? d. What will Hoa do during her vacation ? e. What about you ? Do your classes start earlier or later ? Do you work fewer than Hoa ? f. When does your school year start ? g. When doe sit finish ? 2. Practice.(18ms) -"Question-Answer drill" T asks Ss real questions. -Guiding questions. - Asks Ss the questions & requires them to answer. - Corrects S’s answers & comments. * Questions: a. What time do your classes start ? b. What time do they finish ? c. How many lessons do you have on Mondays ? d. How many hours do you do your homework ? e. When will you have a vacation ? f. How long does your vacation last ? 3. Production.(10ms) - "Survey" - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work in pairs asks & answer the question .What will you do during your vacation ? - Asks Ss to compare their answering. - Asks Ss to give the answers. - Corrects & comments. -T controls and corrects.. -Ss must answer truthfully and then Ss work in open pairs- close pairs. - Working in pairs to ask & answer the questions. - Giving the answer keys. - Correcting the answer keys &Commenting * Answer: a. Hoa s classes start at 7.00. b. They finish at 11.15. c. Hoa does her homework two hours a day d. She will go & see her parents. e. My classes start at the same time with Hoa s classes. I work fewer than Hoa . f. My school year start in September. g. It finish in June. - Answering the questions. -Correcting the pronunciation. a. My classes start at 7.00. b. They finish at 11.15. c. I have five lessons on Monday. d. It takes two hour for me to do my home work . e. I will have a vacation in June. f. It will last in three months. - Working in pairs asks & answer the question .What will you do during your vacation ? - Comparing their answering. - Giving the answers. Activities Name Go to the seaside Nam ..... -Ss practice well. IV. Consolidation.(1m) -T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson. V.Homework.(1m) - Study the vocabularies & the model by heart . -Writing five sentences talking about your vacatio - Prepare the vocabulary & the letter on page 73. -Preparing: Unit 7: A2,3.

(96) Pre: /11/2015 Tea: /11/ 2015 Period: 41 Unit 7 : THE WORLD OF WORK Lesson 2: A STUDENT’S WORK<A2,3> A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the details about some vacations in America and Britain. I.Knowledge. -Vacations in America and Britain. II. Skill -Reading skill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision.(2ms) -"Shark attack" -Vacation -Holiday III.New lesson. Teacher s activities Students activities 1. Pre-reading.(13ms) a.Pre teach. -Thanksgiving -Easter -Christmas -Independence Day -turkey -firework - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, - Listening to the words. using the situation. - Repeating the words in chorus & in - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then individual. helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Correcting the mistakes. - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the - Giving the meaning & mistakes. the pronunciation. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning - Copying the words. & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. b.Checking vocab. - R.O.R c.T/F statements prediction. 1) The longest vacation in America is the spring. 2) The most important vacations in America are Easter,4th of July,Thanksgiving and Christmas. 3) The American usually spend time with their ffamilies on these vacations. 4) American students have more vacations than VietNemese students. 2. While-reading.(20ms) a.Check-prediction. -T asks Ss to read the text and check their prediction. - Introduces the statement & ask Ss to work in pairs to predict the statements.. -Ss enjoy the game. -Ss read the sentences and predict.. -Ss read the text and check their prediction. *Answer key. 1) F 2) T.

(97) - Asks Ss to compare the keys give the keys. - Comments. b. Presentation text: A2/P73. - Introduces & Helps Ss to read the text. - Asks Ss to read the text in individual & check their prediction. - Asks Ss to correct the keys. - Corrects comments.. 3) T 4) T - Reading the dialogue in individual & check their prediction. - Correcting the keys. * Answer keys: a. F; b. T; c. T; d. F;. 3. Post-reading.(8ms) -Ss predict the name of the public a.T asks Ss to predict the name of the public holiday holiday in each of the pictures P.74. in each of the pictures P.74 *Answer. a) Thanksgiving b) Independence Day c) New Year’s Day -Ss work in groups to list holidays in d) Christmas VietNam. b.T asks Ss to work in groups to list holidays in VietNam. Ex:  New Year’s day  Children’s Day  ....etc. -T controls and corrects. IV. Consolidation.(1m) -T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson.Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson & compare the holidays between America & Viet Nam. V.Homework.(1m) - Study the vocabularies by heart . - Writing five sentences talking about what you do on your vacation. - Prepare the vocabulary & the picture on page 75 & the time in which Ss work in school. -Preparing: Unit 7: A4. Pre: / /2015 Tea: / / 2015 Period: 42 Unit 7 : THE WORLD OF WORK Lesson 3: A STUDENT’S WORK<A4> A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the details about a typical day of a student. I.Knowledge. -A typical day of a student. II. Skill -Reading skill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision.(6ms) -christmast/young/orange/expensive/turkey III.New lesson. Teachers activities Students’activities 1. Pre-reading.(10ms).

(98) a.T/F statements prediction. -Ss perdict. 1) Many people think that students have an easy life. 2) Students work a few hours week. 3) Students do not have to work hard at school. 4) Hoa is in grade. - Introduces the statement & ask Ss to work in pairs to decide which the - Working in pairs to decide which the statements is true or false. statements is true or false. - Asks Ss to compare the keys give the - Comparing & Giving the keys. keys. - Comments. b. Presentation text: A4 /P75. - Introduces & Helps Ss to read the text. - Asks Ss to read the text in individual & - Reading the text in individual & check their prediction. check their prediction. - Correcting the keys. - Asks Ss to correct the keys. - Corrects & comments. 2. While-reading.(20ms) * Answer keys: a.t asks Ss to read the text and check a. T; b. F; c. F; d. F; their prediction. b.Wh-questions. - a)-d) P.75 - Introduces the questions & asks Ss to - Working in pairs to ask & answer the work in pairs to ask & answer the questions. - Giving the answer keys. questions. - Correcting the answer keys - Asks Ss to give the answer keys. &Commenting - Helps Ss to correct & comments. T adds 5 question to ask Ss to play a game "Lucky nuber". 1) How many periods a day does Hoa have? 2) L 3) Does Hoa study hard? 4) What does she have to do before tests? 5) L 6) How many periods a day do you have? 7) Do you think you are lazy? 8) L 3. Post-reading.(7ms) - Retell a story about Hoa - Introduces the requirement & ask Ss to - Working in individual to retell the work in individual to retell the story story about Hoa. - Retelling the story. about Hoa. - Asks Ss to retell the story. - Comments. IV. Consolidation.(1m) -.Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson & compare the working time between Hoa & themselves. V.Homework.(1m) - Writing five sentences talking about how long does it take you to work on a week. - Prepare the vocabulary & the picture on page 76 . -Preparing: Unit 7: B1+4.

(99) Pre: / /2015 Tea: / / 2015 Period: 43 Unit 7 : THE WORLD OF WORK Lesson 4: THE WORKER<B1,4> A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to talk about a typical working day. I.Knowledge. -A typical working day. III. Skill -Reading and speaking drill II. Teaching aids - Posters. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision.(5ms) cook - "Brainstorming" Activities ................ ...... watch T.V (Ss brainstorm activities they do everyday) III.New lesson. Teacher’s activities Students’activities 1. Pre teach.(15ms) *Vocabulary: -(to) work part time : lµm viÖc b¸n thêi gian -(to) repair machine : (picture) : söa ch÷a m¸y mãc. -Morning shift: ca s¸ng -homeless people : ngêi v« gia c - Listening to the words. -days off : ngµy nghÜ - Repeating the words in chorus & in - Introduces the words by explaining the individual. meaning, using the situation. - Correcting the mistakes. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times - Giving the meaning & the ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). pronunciation. - Checks S’s reading in individual & - Copying the words. corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. a.Checking vocab. -Ss enjoy the game. - R.O.R b.Presentation text..

(100) - B1 P.76 - Introduces & Asks Ss to read the letter - Checks S’s reading. - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments . c.Comprehension questions. - Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work in pairs to ask & answer the questions. - Asks Ss to give the answer keys. - Helps Ss to correct & comments. 1) where does Mrs Jones work? 2) What does she do for homeless people ? 3) What does Mr Jones do? 4) Where does he work? 5) How many days a week does he work? 6) How many public holidays does he get? 2. Practice.(15ms) - "Question-Answer drill" - Introduces the real questions & asks Ss to work in pairs to answer truthfully. - Asks Ss to give the answer by practicing in pairs. - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. T asks Ss real questions. 1) What does your father/ mother do? 2) Where does he/she work? 3) How many hours a day does your father /mother work? 4) How many days a week does your father/mother work? 5) How many days off a week does he/she get? 3. Production.(8ms) - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work in pairs to transform the information & write a new message by replacing the underlined words. - asks Ss to report their writing. - Corrects & comments "Transformation writing" My mother works at school. She takes care of her students. she gets off at 6:00 every morning. She has breakfast, and hen she goes to class. She always helps weak students.She works 40 hours a week.She has four vacations a year. My father is a worker. He works 8 hours day. He has two days off a month . When he has free time he plays soccer. -T controls and corrects. IV. Consolidation.(1m). - Reading the text. - Correcting the pronunciation.. - Working in pairs to ask & answer the questions. - Giving the answer keys. - Correcting the answer keys &Commenting * Answer: a. Mrs. John work at home. b. She cooks lunch for homeless people. c. Mr. John is a mechanic. d. He works in a factory. e. He work five days a week . f. He gets about seven public holidays. -Ss must answer truthfully and then Ss work in open pairs-close pairs. (Step of practice: T-Ss-open pairs-close pairs) - Working in pairs to answer the questions. - Giving the answer by practicing in pairs. - Corrects the pronunciation. Answer: 1. My father/ mother is a. 2. He/ she work in a . 3. My father/ mother works...hours a day. 4. My father/ mother work....days a week. 5. He / she gets ...days off a week .. - Working in pairs to transform the information & writing a new message by replacing the underlined words. - Reporting their writing..

(101) -T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson. V.Homework.(1m) - Study the vocabulary . - Write about you typical day. - Prepare the vocabulary & the picture on P77 & read the text at home.. - Preparing: Unit 7: B2-3 * Feedback. Pre: / /2015 Tea: / / 2015 Period: 44 Unit 7 : THE WORLD OF WORK Lesson 5 : THE WORKER<B2-3> A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the details about a typical working day of Vietnamese and American. I.Knowledge. -A typical working day of Vietnamese and American. III. Skill - Reading skill. II. Teaching aids - Posters. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision.(5ms) - "Slap the board" have breakfast. work in the field. vacation.

(102) day off. clean. III.New lesson. Teacher’s activities 1. Pre-reading.(15ms) a.pre - teach. -(to) start work -(to) feed -(to) rest -(to) eat lunch -buffalo shed -chicken coop - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. b.Checking vocab. - R.O.R c.T/F prediction - Introduces the statement & ask Ss to work in pairs to predict the statements. - Asks Ss to compare the keys give the keys & Comments. 1) Hoa’s father is a farmer. 2) Her father works in the fields at 5 p.m 3) Her father rests and eats lunch from 12 to 1 o’clock. 4) A farmer has real vacations. c. Presentation text: B1 / P76. - Introduces & Helps Ss to read the letter. - Asks Ss to read the letter in individual & check their prediction. - Asks Ss to correct the keys. - Corrects & comments. 2. While-reading.(15ms) a.Check prediction. b.Wh-questions. -T gives 9 qs to ask Ss to play a game"Noughts and Crosses". - Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work in pairs to ask & answer the questions. - Asks Ss to give the answer keys. - Helps Ss to correct & comments. a) What is Hoa’s father name? b) Does he work more hours than Tim’s father? c) What time does he usually start work? d) What does he do in the morning? e) When does he work in the field?. look after Students’activities. - Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. - Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words.. -Ss enjoy the game. - Introduces the statement & ask Ss to work in pairs to predict the statements. - Asks Ss to compare the keys give the keys & Comments.. - Reading the letter in individual.. -Check their prediction. - Correcting the keys. Answer keys: a. T; b. F; c. T; d. F; - Working in pairs to ask & answer the questions. - Giving the answer keys. - Correcting the answer keys &Commenting * Answer: a. Hoa’s father’s name is Tuan. b. Yes. He works more hours than Tim’s father . c. He usually starts work at six in the morning. d. In the morning, he has breakfast, then he feeds the animals & collects the eggs. e. He works in the field from about 9 until 4 in the afternoon ..

(103) f) What does he do in the field? g) What time does he come back home? h) What does he do after he feeds the animal again? i) How often does he take a day off?. f. He grows some rice & vegetable in the field . g. He come back home at 4 in the afternoon. h. He cleans the buffalo shed & the chicken cool after he feeds the animal again. i. He takes a day off four or five times a year.. - Working in pairs to predict the statements & fill in the table.. 3. Post-reading.(8ms) - Comparing & Giving the keys. *Pre-listening. b.Open prediction. Name Job Hours Amount per of - Listening to the tape & getting the week vacation information. Peter - Listening to the tape & checking the Susan information of their prediction. Jane - Comparing & giving the keys. Phong - Listening to the tape & Correcting the *While-listening. keys. T turns on the tape. *Answer key. Name Job Hours Amount per of week vacation Peter doctor 70 four weeks Susan nurse 50 three weeks Jane shop 35 one assitant weeks Phong factory- 48 two worker weeks T controls and corrects. IV. Consolidation.(1M) -T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson. -Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson & compare The differences of a typical working day between America & Vietnamese V.Homework.(1m) - Study the vocabularies by heart . - Writing five sentences talking about your typical working day. -Preparing: Unit 8: A1-2 * Feedback. Pre: / /2015 Tea: / / 2015 Period: 45.

(104) Unit 8 :. Places. Lesson 1: ASKING THE WAY<A1-2> A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to ask for and give the directions. I.Knowledge. - Asking for and giving the directions. III. Skill - Reading and speaking drill. II. Teaching aids - Poster, card. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision.(5ms) - "Matching"( Matching the words with the pictures A1 P.79) 1) National bank of Vietnam picture a 2) Xanh pon hospital picture b 3) Hotel picture c 4) Post office picture d 5) Rainway station picture e 6) Market picture f III.New lesson. Teacher’s activities Students’activities 1. Presentation.(15ms) a.Pre teach. -Souvenir shop -shoe store -toy store -museum - Listening to the words. - Introduces the words by explaining the - Repeating the words in chorus & in meaning, using the situation. individual. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). - Correcting the mistakes. Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Giving the meaning & the - Checks S’s reading in individual & pronunciation. corrects the mistakes. - Copying the words. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. b.Check vocab. - "slap the board" - Listening to the dialogue . c.Presentation dialogue. - Practicing the dialogue in groups & - A1 P.79 pairs. - Introduces & Asks Ss to listen to the in Correcting the pronunciation. dialogue . Model sentences: - Helps Ss to practice the dialogue in + Could you show me the way to the groups & in pairs. shop ? - Checks S’s practicing in groups & in souvenir + Could you tell me how to get to the pairs. souvenir shop ? - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments . + Go straight ahead. - Introduces the model sentences & + turn right / left. explains how to use. street on the right. - Helps Ss to practice the model sentences + Take the first second left in groups & in pairs. - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments - Repeating in chorus & in individual. 2. Practice.(18ms) - Making sentences for the next cues. - "Word cue drill" - Practicing in groups & in pairs . - Introduces the example exchange & Helps - Correcting the pronunciation.

(105) Ss to practice. - Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. Example exchange: - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. S1: Could you show me the way to the - Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing zoo? in groups & in pairs . S2: Go straight ahead. - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. -shoe store/ go ahead -toy store/ go ahead/ turn right -museum/ go straight/ take the first street -bus stop/ turn left - Working in pairs to fill in the 3. Production.(5MS) dialogue. - Giving the answer keys by role- A1 P.47 (work book) playing in pairs. Complete the dialogue: A1-P47- S’s book - Correcting S’s pronunciation. - Introduces the dialogues & asks Ss to work in pairs to fill in the dialogue. - Asks S’s to give the answer keys by roleplaying in pairs. - Corrects & comments S’s pronunciation. IV. Consolidation.(1M) -T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson. V.Homework.(1M) - Study the vocabulary & the exchanges . - Exercise: A1 / 2 P47 Work book - Prepare the vocabulary & the poster on page 81. -Preparing: Unit 8: A3 * Feedback. Pre: /12/2014 Tea: /12/ 2014 Period:46 Unit 8 : Lesson 2: ASKING THE WAY<A3> A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to ask for and give the directions. I.Knowledge. - Asking for and giving the directions, using " Where is ......?" II. Skill - Reading and speaking drill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision.(3ms) -Revision of prepositions. on,in,next to, on the right, between, in front of, behind. III.New lesson. Teacher’s activities Students’activities 1. Presentation. (12M) *.Dialogue build: - Listening to the dialogue. - Reads & gives the symbols present for the - Reading the dialogue to remember. dialogue. - Practice the dialogue in pairs. -Helps Ss to read the dialogue to remember. - Asks Ss to practice the dialogue in pairs. - Correcting the pronunciation. - Corrects & comments S’s pronunciation..

(106) * Sample dialogue: S1: ______ _____ _____ bank ? S2: The _____ is between _____ and _____ Model sentences. S1: Where is the bank? S2: The bank is between the hotel and the restaurant. 2. Practice.(20ms) -Using the street map B3 P.81 - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to practice. - Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in groups & in pairs . Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. Shoe store Toy store. Museum Bus stop Bookstore. Bank Police station Restaurant Hotel School. 3. Production.(7ms) -T asks Ss to listen to the tape and writing the places. - Introduces & asks Ss to listen to the dialogues to get the name of the places. - Asks Ss to work in pairs to compare the information. - Asks S’s to give the name of the places. - Corrects & comments. Listening & writing the places: * Listening task is in the teacher’s book P.90 a) souvenir shop b) shoe store c) hotel d) drug store e) hospital nb: Listening task is in the teacher’s book P.90. _T controls and corrects.. * Model sentences: S1: Where is the bank ? S2: The bank is between the hotel and the restaurant.. - Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs . - Correcting the pronunciation * Example exchange: S1: Where is the shoe store ? S2: It’s opposite the supermarket. - Listening to the dialogues to get the name of the places. - Working in pairs to compare the information. - Giving the name of the places. - Correcting the name of the places. * Answer keys:     hospital. IV. Consolidation.(2ms) -T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson. -Asks Ss to give the way used to ask & give directions with “WHERE IS?” * Example exchange: S1: Where is the shoe store ? S2: It’s opposite the supermarket . V.Homework.(1m) - Study the vocabulary & the exchanges . - Exercise: A2 P48 Work book. souvenir shop shoe store hotel drugstore.

(107) - Prepare the vocabulary & the map of Viet Nam. -Preparing: Unit 8: A4-5 * Feedback. Pre: /12/2014 Tea: /12/ 2014 Period: 47 Unit 8 : Lesson 3: ASKING THE WAY<A4-5> A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to ask about distances,use "How far is it from...........to...........?" I.Knowledge. - Asking about distances,using "How far is it from...........to...........?" II. Skill - Reading and speaking drill B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision.(3ms) -"Bingo" 18,680,1030,367,976,635,325,132,87,75,46,937,1000,700,600,570. III.New lesson. Teacher’s activities Students’activities 1. Presentation.(17ms) a.Presentation dialogue. - A4 P.82 - Introduces & Asks Ss to listen to the dialogue . - Listening to the dialogue . - Helps Ss to practice the dialogue in groups & in - Practicing the dialogue in groups & in pairs. pairs. - Correcting the pronunciation. - Checks S’s practicing in groups & in pairs. - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments . - Introduces the model sentences & explains how * Model sentences: How far is this from...to ...? to use. It’s about 1.300 km. - Helps Ss to practice the model sentences in groups & in pairs. - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments . b.Model sentences. S1: how far is it from Dong Ha to Gio Linh? S2:It’s about 12km 2. Practice. (15ms) - "Word cue drill" - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to practice. - Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in groups & in pairs . - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. -Vinh/ 319km -Hue/ 688km -Da Nang/ 791km -Ho Chi Minh city/ 1726km. - Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs . - Correcting the pronunciation * Example exchange: S1: How far is this from Vinh to Hanoi ? S2: It’s about 319 km..

(108) 3. Production.(7ms) - "Noughts and Crosses" T asks Ss to make qs and answer about distances from your town to some places. - Introduces the name of the places & divides Ss into two groups to practice by making questions & answers about distances from their town to some places . - Asks S’s to give the answer keys by roleplaying in pairs. - Corrects & comments the game. Nha Trang. Hue. Ho Chi Minh city. Vinh. Quy Nhon. Quang Binh. Hai Phong HaNoi Da Nang. - Working in groups to make questions & answers about distances from their town to some places . - Giving the answer keys by role-playing in pairs. - Correcting S’s pronunciation. Example exchange: S1: How far is it from Quang Tri to Nha Trang? S2: It’s about 900km.. -T asks Ss to use real distance to answer the question. -T corrects. IV. Consolidation.(2ms) -T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson. -Asks Ss to give the question & answer asking about distances: S1: How far is this from Quang Tri to Hanoi ? S2: It’s about 630 km. V.Homework.(1m) - Study the vocabulary & the exchanges . -Write about the distances from your house to some places in your neighborhood. - Prepare the vocabulary for the dialogue & the picture on page 83. -Preparing: Unit 8: B1,4 * Feedback. Pre: /12/2014 Tea: /12/ 2014 Period: 48 Unit 8 : Lesson 4: AT THE POST OFFICE<B1,4> A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to enquire about price and make purchases, use "I’d like..../how much is/are....?" I.Knowledge. - Enquiring about price and making purchases, using "I’d like..../how much is/are....?" II. Skill - Reading and speaking drill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision.(5ms) -"Slap the board".

(109) 9.500. 2.000 85.000.. 12.500. 15.000. 10.000. III.New lesson. Teacher’s activities I. Listen and read 1.Presentation.(20ms) a.Pre teach. -change (n) -altogether -(to) send -(to) mail -(to) receive -(to) pay - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.. Students’activities - Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. - Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words.. -Ss enjoy the game.- Listening to the dialogue . - Practicing the dialogue in groups & in pairs. - Correcting the pronunciation.. .Model sentences. S1: I’d like to send this letter to USA. b.Check vocab. How much is it? - "What and Where" S2: It’s 9.500 dong. c.Presentation dialogue. - B1 P.83 - Introduces & Asks Ss to listen to the dialogue . - Helps Ss to practice the dialogue in groups & in pairs. - Checks S’s practicing in groups & in pairs. - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments . - Introduces the model sentences & explains how to use. - Helps Ss to practice the model sentences in groups & in pairs. - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments d.Comprehension questions. - asks Ss to read the dialogue again and answer the questions: Answer key:  Liz will mail letter to USA.  That is 11.000 dong.  She receives 15.000 changes *. Model sentences: - asks some questions to elicit the model - reads the model sentences and writes on board  I’d like to send this letter to USA?  How much is it?  It’s 9.500 dong  I’d like to send......to .....  How much is/ are ........?  It’s/ They are.......... - read the dialogue again and answer the questions. - copy.

(110) 2. Practice: - writes the cues on board and asks Ss to work in pairs, make the questions and answers:  buy/ 3 stamps/ 2.400dong  send/ this letter/ 13.000 dong.  Buy/ magazine/ 15.000 dong.  Buy/ a newspaper/ 4500 dong.  Buy/ some envelopes/ 4500 dong. Ex:  S1: I’d like to buy a magazine? How much is it?  S2: It’s 3000 dong.. - work in pairs, make the questions and answers. - work in pairs, complete and then practice. II. Listen: (b4) a.Pre-listening. T asks Ss to predict the prices of each of these five items. - Ss listen the price of each of these item Price five items and check their prediction. 1 a packet of envelope 2 a pen 3 a writing pad 4 5 stamps 5 a phone card b.While-listening. a.T turns on the tape to ask Ss listen the price of each of these five items and check their -Ss answer two questions in B4 P85 prediction. (text book *Answer key. 1. 2.000 2.1.500 3.3.000 4.2.500 5. 50.000 total: 59.000dong b.T asks Ss answer two questions in B4 P85 (text book). *Answer key. -the total cost is 59.000 dong * Answers: -She will have 1.000 dong in change. a. It’s about 2.000 dong to mail a letter III.Production(7ms) in Viet Nam. Answer the questions: B5-P85: - Introduces the questions & Asks Ss to work in b. It’s about 20.000 dong to send a letter America pairs to answer the questions. c. It sells newspaper, magazine. - Asks Ss to give the answers & corrects. d. Yes, I do / No I don’t. * Questions: (in page 85) IV. Consolidation.(2ms) -T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson. -Asks Ss to give the question & answer asking about prices: - S1: How much is it card ? S2: Its 9.500 dong. V.Homework.(1m) - Study the vocabulary & the exchanges . - Exercise: B3 - P52 Workbook. - Prepare the vocabulary for the dialogues & the picture on page 84. -Preparing: Unit 8: B2-3.

(111) * Feedback. Kiểm tra nghe 1 tiết lần 1 lớp 7 Tapescript There are four people in Minh's family: his father, mother, his older sister and him. His father is a worker. He works in a factory. His factory produces bicycles. His mother is a nurse. She takes care of sick people in the hospital. His sister studies at university and she will be a teacher next year. Minh is a pupil. He studies very well. All the members of the family feel happy together. They will go to Nha Trang for their holidays this summer.. Key 1. people 2. factory 3. hospital 4. well 5. happy 6. holidays.

(112) PHÒNG GD & ĐT THỊ XÃ BA ĐỒN TRƯỜNG THCS QUẢNG LONG Lớp:............................................................ Họ và Tên: .................................................. ĐỀ KIỂM TRA NGHE NĂM HỌC: 2014 – 2015 MÔN: TIẾNG ANH LỚP 7 Thời gian làm bài: 15 phút. ĐIỂM. I. Listen and complete the following passage. There are four(1) …………….in Minh's family: his father, mother, his older sister and him. His father is a worker. He works in a(2)…………….. ...His factory produces bicycles. His mother is a nurse. She takes care of sick people the(3)………………... His sister studies at university and she will be a teacher next year. Minh is a pupil. He studies very (4) ………..... ..................All the members of the family feel (5) …………….........together. They will go to Nha Trang for their (6)…………....................this summer. II.Listen again and answer the questions. 1. How many people are there in Minh's family? ...……………………………………………………. 2.Where does Minh’s father work? …………………………………………………. 3.How does Minh study? ………………………………………………… 4.Are his family happy? ..................................................................... PHÒNG GD & ĐT THỊ XÃ BA ĐỒN TRƯỜNG THCS QUẢNG LONG Lớp:............................................................ Họ và Tên: .................................................. ĐỀ KIỂM TRA NGHE NĂM HỌC: 2014 – 2015 MÔN: TIẾNG ANH LỚP 7 Thời gian làm bài: 15 phút. ĐIỂM. I. Listen and complete the following passage. There are four(1) …………….in Minh's family: his father, mother, his older sister and him. His father is a worker. He works in a(2)…………….. ...His factory produces bicycles. His mother is a nurse. She takes care of sick people the(3)………………... His sister studies at university and she will be a teacher next year. Minh is a pupil. He studies very (4) ………..... ..................All the members of the family feel (5) …………….........together. They will go to Nha Trang for their (6)…………....................this summer. II.Listen again and answer the questions. 1. How many people are there in Minh's family? ...……………………………………………………. 2.Where does Minh’s father work? …………………………………………………..

(113) 3.How does Minh study? ………………………………………………… 4.Are his family happy? ..................................................................... Key 1. people 2. factory 3. hospital 4. well 5. happy 6. holidays. Kiểm tra nghe 15 phút lần 2 lớp 7 Tapescript. Dear John, How are you? I'm still working on the farm, but fortunately I am going to leave here at the end of winter. Let me tell you why. We had a terrible time a month ago. Thousands of insects came and ate many of the crops in the fields. The farmer is very worried because he thinks the insects will come again and destroy all the crops. He became so worried that he sold the farm last week, and that is why I have to leave here. Soon I will have to look for another job. Do you think you could help me find one? I like working on farms so if you know anyone who needs a hard worker, please recommend me to them. I know that you are very busy at the moment and that you don't have much free time. But I really hope you can find time to help me. I don't know what else to do. If I can't find a job, I'll have to go back home and stay with my parents. I know they would be very upset if I did that. They are old and they don't have much money. They couldn't support me as well as themselves. Love David.

(114) PHÒNG GD & ĐT THỊ XÃ BA ĐỒN TRƯỜNG THCS QUẢNG LONG Lớp:............................................................ Họ và Tên: .................................................. ĐỀ KIỂM TRA NGHE NĂM HỌC: 2014 – 2015 MÔN: TIẾNG ANH LỚP 7 Thời gian làm bài: 15 phút. I.Listen and choose the best answer 1. At the end of the month, David is going to A. work on a farm B. start a new job C. leave the farm D. buy a farm 2. What did the farmer do last week? A. He destroyed his crops. B. He liked many insects. C. He sold his farm. D. He became very worried. 3. At the moment John is A. working on a farm. B. very busy. C. helping David. D. living with his parents. 4. If David can't find a new job, he will go home andA. support his parents. B. work on his parents'farm. C. live with his parents. D. make his parents rich. 5. How does David feel at the moment? A. He felt happy. B. He felt angry.. ĐIỂM.

(115) C. D.. He felt ill. He felt sad.. II.Listen again and check true(T) or false(F). .................1. David is going to leave the farm at the end of winter. ..................2. Thousands of insects came and ate many of the crops in the fields. ..................3. The farmer is very worried because he thinks the insects will come again and destroy all the crops. ..................4. David doesn’t like working on farms .................5. David’s parents are young and they have much money. *Answer keys: I. 1, C 2. D 3. B 4, C 5. D.

(116) Pre: 14/12/2014 Tea: 15/12/ 2014 Period: 49 Unit 8 : PLACE Lesson 5: AT THE POST OFFICE<B2-3> A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to how to use post office vocabulary. I.Knowledge. - Post office vocabulary. II. Skill - Reading skill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision(5ms) - "Matching" Matching a part of word in column A with a part of word in column B to make a rihgt word. post velope Ame ge en phone sta ter chan card tele mp let rica post office III.New lesson. Teacher’s activities Students’activities 1. Pre-reading.(10ms) a.Pre teach. -a local stamp -a writing pad -a pen pal - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, - Listening to the words. using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the - Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning pronunciation. - Copying the words. & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. b.Check vocab. - R.O.R c.Open prediction. Things Hoa needs from the post office a local stamp. -Ss predict things Hoa needs from the post office..

(117) 2. While-reading.(15ms) a.T asks Ss to read the dialogue and check their prediction. b.Muntiple choice. 1)Hoa has a........in American. A.brotrer B.Friends C.sister D.pen pal 2)Hoa and Tim write to each other about......... A.once a week B.once a month C.everyday D.twice a year 3)Tim tells Hoa about................ A.his studing B.his family C.America D.his life in America 4)Hoa needs a phone cards because she phones........ A.her boyfriend B.her brother C.her parents D.her friends 3. Post-reading.(13ms) a.Pre-listening. T asks Ss to predict the prices of each of these five items. item Price 1 a packet of envelope 2 a pen 3 a writing pad 4 5 stamps 5 a phone card b.While-listening. a.T turns on the tape to ask Ss listen the price of each of these five items and check their prediction. *Answer key. 2. 2.000 3. 1.500 4. 3.000 5. 2.500 6. 50.000 total: 59.000dong b.T asks Ss answer two questions in B4 P85 (text book). *Answer key. -the total cost is 59.000 dong -She will have 1.000 dong in change. IV. Consolidation.(1m) -T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson. V.Homework.(1m) -Doing exercise : 1,2,3 (B) in the workbook, P.50-52 -Preparing: Review all knowledge from unit 1 to unit 8 * Feedback. -Ss read the dialogue and check their prediction. -Ss choice the best answer A,B,C,orD to complete the sentences. -Ss work individually-in pairs-in groups.. -Ss predict the prices of each of these five items.. - Ss listen the price of each of these five items and check their prediction.. -Ss answer two questions in B4 P85 (text book)..

(118) Pre: 17/12/2014 Tea: 18/12/ 2014 Period: 50 REVIEW A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to remind all knowledge from unit 1 to unit 8. I.Knowledge. -The future tense -Future simple tense & Question with “Would..?” & Vocabulary. II. Skill - Reading and speaking drill B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision III.New lesson. Teacher’s activities Students’activities 1.PRESENTATION(15ms) Shark attack:.

(119) - Introduces the game & explains the way to play & divides the class into 2 groups to play the - Playing the game in 2 groups. game. - Commenting the game. - Helps Ss to play the game. - Corrects & comments. * The words for the game: 1. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ (Television). 2. _ _ _ _ _ (chair). 3. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ (Picture). 4. _ _ _ _ _ _ (Stove). 5. _ _ _ _ _ (Table) 2.PRACTICE(20ms) -Introduces the requirement & Asks Ss to give the form & use of the future simple tense then - Giving the form & use of the work in pairs to write things they will do or will future simple tense. - Working in pairs to write not do tomorrow. things will do or will not do * Form: S + Will/shall + V. * Use: Talk about things will do in the future. tomorrow. - Comparing the keys & give the - Asks Ss to compare the keys. keys by practicing in pairs. -Asks Ss to practice in pairs. - Correcting the keys. - Corrects & comments. I will see a movie but he won’t watch TV. He will write to his grandmother but he won’t meet Minh. Word cue drill: A1/ P19-20. - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to practice. Repeating in chorus & in - Reads the first modal for example & asks Ss to -individual. repeat in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the next - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in cues. - Practicing in groups & in groups & in pairs . pairs . - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. - Correcting the pronunciation.  Cues: * Example exchange: -go to the movie / S1: Would you like to go for a -go shopping / walk ? -listen to music / S2: Yes, I’d love to./ I’m sorry. I - go out for dinner / -play video games / can’t. 3.PRODUCTION(8ms) - Asks Ss the questions & requires them to answer. - Corrects S’s answers & comments. * Questions: a. What time do your classes start ? b. What time do they finish ? c. How many lessons do you have on Mondays ? d. How many hours do you do your homework ? e. When will you have a vacation ? f. How long does your vacation last ?. - Answering the questions. -Correcting the pronunciation. a. My classes start at 7.00. b. They finish at 11.15. c. I have five lessons on Monday. d. It takes two hour for me to do my home work . e. I will have a vacation in June. f. It will last in three months.. IV. Consolidation.(1m) -T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson. V.Homework.(1m) -Doing again all exercises in your notebook. -Preparing: review 2 * Feedback.

(120) Pre: 18/12/2014 Tea: 19/12/ 2014 Period: 51 REVIEW A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to consolidate the knowledge I.Knowledge. -The present simple. II. Skill -Reading and speaking drill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision. III. New lesson. Teacher’s activities 1. Present simple tense. a. With (to) be:(10ms) -T asks ss to remember the way to use the structure,use. -T calls some ss to go to the board and write. -T controls and corrects with ss. -T asks Ss to give the structures and the way to use them. Structure: Khẳng định: S + (to) be +(a/an) + O. Phủ định: S + (to) be-not +(a/an) + O. Nghi vÊn:(to) be + S +a/an + O ?. Tr¶ lêi: Yes, S + (to)be No, S + (to) be-not. Students’activities -Ss remember and answer the question of teacher.. -Ss give examples. + He is a teacher. + Nam isnot a student. + Is she tall? Yes, she is/ No, she isn’t. ...etc - Ss take notes.. -T asks ss to give more example .Example: 1.They are students. 2.He isnot an engineer. - Ss copy the notes and learn by 3. Are they students ? heart. Yes, they are. No, they aren’t T controls and corrects. Notes: I + am She,He,It + is You, They, We + are 2.Exercise: (10ms) -Ss work individual then share . Put the verbs in the correct answer: - Introduces the way to practice & devides the with your partners. Expected: class into 2 groups to practice..

(121) - Helps Ss to practice. 1.She isn’t a student. -Calls ss to go to the board write the answer. 2.Is she a good student? - Corrects & comments 3. I’m a farmer. 1. She...................(to)be not ) a student. 4.They are nurses. 2...............she a good student ? ((to) be) 5.Mr.Nam and Mrs.Nga aren’t 3. I...................a farmer. ((to)be) workers. 4. They.............nurses. ((to)be) -Ss go to the board write the 5. Mr.Nam andMrs. Nga..................... workers. answer ((to)be-not) - Correcting the answer keys. 2. Present simple tense.(10ms) a. With regular verbs. -T asks ss to remember the way to use the structure,use. -T calls some ss to go to the board and write. -T controls and corrects with ss. -T asks Ss to give the structures and the way to use them. Structure: Khẳng định: S + V(s/es) + O. Phủ định: S + don’t/doesn’t + V(inf) + O. Nghi vÊn: Do/ Does + S + V(inf) + O ?. Tr¶ lêi: Yes, S + do/does No, S + don’t/ doesn’t. -T asks ss to give more example b.Example: 1.They play chess. 2.He works in a hospital. 3. Does nam like oranges? Yes, he does No, he doesn’t. T controls and corrects. Notes: She,He,It + V(s/es) You, They, We + V(inf) 2.Exercise: (10ms) a.Put the following verbs in simple presnt. -T aks ss to work in groups of 4 to do the exercises. -T asks ss the way to do. - T calls ss to go to the board write the answer. -T comment and correct. 1. The swimming bath..................(open) at 9:00 and ..............(close) at 18:30 every day. 2.I have a car but I.................(not-use) it very often. 3.I.......................(play) the piano, but I...................(not-play) very well. 4.I don’t understand the word”decide”. What.........................(“decide”/ mean)? 5.I ............................(work) in a bank. Nam.........................(work) in an office.. -Ss remember and answer the question of teacher.. -Ss give examples. + He teaches in a school.. + Nam doesn’t play volleyball.. + Do you want to learn English? Yes, I do/ No,I don’t. ...etc - Ss take notes.. - Ss copy the notes and learn by heart.. Practicing in groups. -Expected: 1. opens........closes 2.don’t use 3.play.........don’t play. 4.does the “decide” mean? 5.work..........doesn’t work...... -Ss go to the board write the answer. - Correcting the answer keys.. IV. Consolidation.(3ms) -T calls some Ss to read again the model sentences and th cocept check. V.Homework.(2ms) -Preparing the simple present tense . -Preparing the present progressive tense ..

(122) * Feedback. Pre: 21/12/2014 Tea: 22/12/ 2014 Period: 52 REVIEW A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to remind all knowledge from unit 1 to unit 8. I.Knowledge. -The present progressive tense -Adjectives and adverbs -Prepositions. III. Skill - Reading and speaking drill. II. Teaching aids - posters, card, book, workbook. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision III.New lesson. Teacher’s activities Students’activities 1. The present progressive tense. (15ms) T asks Ss to remind. -Ss renind and show the way to give the *Answer key. use and the structure. S + (to)be + V-ing + O. S + (to)be-not + V-ing + O..

(123) (To)Be + S + V-ing + O ? Ex: S1:What is he doing? S2: He is playing football. -"Word cue drill" a)Lan/walk to school b)They/go to school by bus. c)We/play computer game. d)She/travel to work. e)He/sing a song. Ex: S1: What is Lan doing? S2: She is walking to school. .....etc 2. Adjectives.(10ms) T asks Ss to show the way to use & structure (short adjectives and long adjectives). Ex: 1)Lan is taller than Hoa. Mai is the tallest. 2)This pen is more expensive than that pen. The dress "C" is the most expensive. -"picture drill" (T asks Ss depend on ex 5 P.40 in text book). Ex: -A toy is cheaper than a ball. -A ball is cheaper than a car. -A toy is the cheapest. .....etc. 3. Adverbs of frequency.(10ms) -Exercise 5 P.71 (text book) Ex: Ba never goes to the cafeteria at lunch time. .........etc T controls and corrects. 4. Prepositions(5ms) -Exercise4 P.39 (text book). -Take notes. -Ss practice well.. -Ss show the way to use & structure (short adjectives and long adjectives).. -Ss practice well.. -Ss renind and show the way to give the use and the structure. -Ss practice well. -Ss renind and show the way to give the use and the structure. -Ss practice well.. IV. Consolidation.(3ms) -T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson. V.Homework.(2ms) -Doing exercise : -Preparing: -Preposition of place; Must & Can; Question words. -Yes / No question with Present progressive * Feedback.

(124) Pre: /12/2014 Tea: /12/ 2014 Period: 53 REVIEW A . Objectives . -Helps Ss to further practice in Preposition of place; Must & Can; Question words & Yes / No question with Present progressive. By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use these grammars completely . I.Knowledge. -Preposition of place; Must & Can; Question words. -Yes / No question with Present progressive III. Skill - Reading and speaking drill. II. Teaching aids - posters, card, book, workbook. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision III.New lesson. Teacher’s activities Students’activities I.PRESENTATION(15ms) 1. Yes/ No question of Present * Mapped dialogue: - Practicing the dialogue in chorus; in progressive groups & in pairs. - Corrects the pronunciation & comments. - Introduces the dialogue & helps Ss to * * Example exchanges: S1: Are you watching TV ?. practice in chorus. - Asks Ss to practice the dialogue in S2: No, I’m not. S1: Are you listening to the radio ? groups & in pairs. - Check S’s practicing the dialogue in S2: No, I’m not. S1: Are you reading ?. groups & in pairs. - Corrects the pronunciation & S2: No, I’m not. S1: What are you doing ? comments. S2: I’m playing video games. TV ? radio ? reading ? What.....?. x x x video games.. 2. Preposition of place: * Listen & Draw: - Reads the text & Asks Ss to listen to the text & draw the position of things that they hear. - Reads the text again & Asks Ss to compare & give the picture they drew. - Corrects & comments. * “There is a house. Behind the house there are mountains. To the left of the house there is a tree. In front of the house there is a river. To the right of the. -Working in pairs to look at the picture & use the Preposition of place in the box to complete the paragraph. - Comparing the keys & give the keys..

(125) house a man is riding a bike.” II.PRACTICE(10ms) 2. Question words: - Grid. - Introduces the topic & asks Ss to practice in groups, using the past simple to talk about their vacation. - Asks Ss to give the answers. - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. * Example exchanges: S1: What is his name ?. S2: John. S1: How old is he ? S2: He is thirty-five.. S1: What does he do ?. S2: Hoe is a teacher. John 35 Teacher Hoa 21 Farmer Binh 12 student III.PRODUCTION(10ms) 3. Must & Can: Noughts & Crosses: - Introduces the example exchange & helps Ss to work in groups to answer the questions about the road signs with Must & Can. - Asks Ss to compare the keys. - Corrects & comments the game. * Example: S1: What does this sign mean ? S2: You [ must slow down ]. [ can park here ].. - Practicing in groups, using the past simple to talk about their vacation. - Giving the answers. - Correcting the pronunciation. S1: Where does he live ?. S2: In Hue. S1: What time does he get up ?. S2: Five-thirty.. S1: What time does he come home ?. S2: One o’clock Hue Ha Tinh HCMC. 05.30 04.00 06.00. 13.00 18.00 15.30. -Working in groups to answer the questions about the road signs with Must & Can. - Comparing the keys. - Correcting the keys.. IV. Consolidation.(3ms) -T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson. V.Homework.(2ms) - Study the grammar & the modal sentence & do the exercises at home. -Preparing: written test (The first term examination) * Feedback. Period:54. THE FIRST TERM EXAMINATION (Đề và đáp án do Phòng GD-ĐT ra). Pre: 04/01/2015 Tea: 05/01/ 2015 Period: 55 Unit 9 : AT HOME AND AWAY Lesson 1: A holiday in Nha Trang <A1> A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to talk about vacation. I.Knowledge. - The simple past. II. Skill - Communicative approach..

(126) B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision(3ms) - "Jumpled words" notivaca=? Answer key: (vacation,wonderful,visit,take,buy) wofulnder=? tisvi=? ktae=? yub=? III.New lesson. Teacher’s activities 1. Presentation.(12ms) a.Pre teach. -aquarium (n) picture -gift (n) explaination -trip (n) explaination -(to) return translation - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation & gives example. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. b.Checking vocab. - R.O.R c.Presentation dialogue. - A1 P.86 - Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the dialogue. - Asks Ss to practice the dialogue in pairs. - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. - Introduces the model sentence & explains the form & use of the past simple tense: d.Model senrences. T sets a sence to give the model sentences. The people were friendly The food was delicious I visited Cham temples I bought a lot of gifts 2. Practice.(20ms) T asks Ss to match the infinitives with the verbs in the simple past tense. - Introduces model sentences & the drill & helps Ss to practice by substitute the drill. - Practices with Ss then checks their practicing in pairs. - Corrects S’s substitution & comments be visited have was/were. Students’activities. -Ss guess the meaning, pronunciation, funtion of the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual & Correcting the mistakes - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words.. -Ss play the game well. -Ss read and take note the main ideas. - Practicing the dialogue in pairs -Correcting the pronunciation. *Model sentence: The people were friendly. The food was delicious. I visited Cham temple. I bought a lot of gifts. * Regular verbs: V + ed. Look + ed = looked. Visit + ed = visited -Ss give the concept check.. -Ss match the infinitives with the verbs in the simple past tense. *Steps of drill: Teacher- class -open pairs- closed pairs. - Practicing in pairs by substitute the drill. -Correcting the pronunciation..

(127) buy had take took return bouhgt "Substitution drill" 1)have a good time 2)visit Cham Temple 3)take him to the movie theater 4)buy some gifts 5)return to Hue Example exchange: T: have a good time Ss: We had a good time 3.Production(8ms) -Do exercise A2 P.53 (a-i) in the work book.( Using a game Noughts and Crosses" ).. * Model sentences: T: have a good time. Ss: We had a good time. * Answer: 1. We had a good time 2. We visited Cham temple. 3. We took him to the movie theater. 4. We bought some gifts. We returned to Hue. - Practicing in groups, using the past simple to talk about their vacation. - Giving the answers. - Correcting the pronunciation.. IV. Consolidation.(2ms) -T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson. V.Homework.(1m) - Study the vocabularies & the model sentences by heart . -Writing five sentences talking about what you did on your vacation. - Prepare the vocabulary for the text on page 87 & the pictures on page 88. -Preparing: Unit 9: A2,3 * Feedback. Pre: 07/01/2015 Tea: 08/01/ 2015 Period: 56 Unit 9 : AT HOME AND AWAY Lesson2: A holiday in Nha Trang <A2,3> A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the details about The Robinson’s trip to Tri Nguyen aquarium. I.Knowledge. - The Robinson’s trip to Tri Nguyen aquarium. - The simple past. II. Skill - Reading skill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision(3ms - "Pelmanism" eat go see think have buy wear went ate bought had wore thought saw III.New lesson. Teacher’s activities Students’activities Ss guess the meaning, pronunciation, 1. Pre-reading.(15ms) funtion of the words. a.Pre-teach. -a shark -a dolphin -a turtle -a crab.

(128) -a cap -aposter -an aquarium - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation & gives example. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. b.Check vocab. "Matching" c.Prediction. -T asks Ss to label the pictures on the P.88 ( text book).. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual & Correcting the mistakes - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words.. -Ss play the game well. -Ss label the pictures on the P.88 ( text book). - Working in pairs to label for them. - Comparing & give their labels. - Correcting the labeling.. - Listening to the text. - Reading the text in silence. d.Presentation text: A2/P87. - Reading the text aloud. - Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the - Checking their labeling. text. - Correcting the pronunciation - Asks Ss to read the text in silence. - Asks Ss to read the text aloud. - Asks Ss to check their labeling. -Ss read the text and check their ideas. Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments *Answer key. 2. While-reading.(10ms) a).going to the aquarium. *-T asks Ss to read the text and check their b)seeingsharks,dolphins,turtles,and ideas. many colorful fish. *Wh - questions. c)sourvenir shop. A2 - P.88 a - f - text book d)buying a cap - Introduces the questions & asks Ss to e)eating fish and crabs work in pairs to read the text then answer - Working in pairs to read the text then the questions. answer the questions. - Asks Ss to give the answer keys. - Giving the answer keys. - Helps Ss to correct & comments. - Correcting the answer keys * Questions: &Commenting a. Who went to the aquarium with Liz ? * Answer: b. What did the Robinson see there ? a. Her parents went to the aquarium c. What did they buy in the souvenir with her. shop ? b. They saw sharks, dolphins, turtles, & d. Did Liz like the cap? Which sentence many colorful fish. tell you this ? c. They bought Liz a cap & a poster. e. Do Mr. & Mrs. Robinson like to eat d. Yes, she did. She wore it all day. seafood ? e. Yes, they do. They ate fish & craps. f. Why did Liz eat noodles for lunch ? f. Because she remember the beautiful 3.Post - reading(3ms) fish in the aquarium & she likes them. -Tell the story of Liz’s trip Tri Nguyen -Ss using the pictures to tell the story of aquarium (using pictures P.88 text book) Liz’s trip Tri Nguyen aquarium . -Ss work individually. -T corrects the mistakes. * Example: A3.PRE-LISTENING(10ms) I and my parents went to Tri Nguyen … 1. True – False prediction: A3 – P89. -Take notes. - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work in pairs to predict which statements - Working in pairs to predict which are true . statements are true . - Asks Ss to compare & give their - Comparing & give their prediction. prediction. - Comments S’s prediction..

(129) * Statements: a. The Robinson returned to Hanoi by train. b. The Robinson returned to Hanoi by bus c. This was the second times Liz saw the paddies. d. This was the first times Liz saw the paddies. e. They stopped at the restaurant for a short time. f. They stopped at the restaurant for a long time. g. Mr. Robinson bought some food for Liz. h. Mrs. Robinson bought some food for Liz i. They arrived home in the afternoon. j. They arrived home in the evening.. - Listening to the text & get the idea. - Listening to the text & check the prediction. Answer keys: - True statements: b – d – e – h – i.. IV. Consolidation.(2ms) -T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson. V.Homework.(1m) - Study the vocabularies by heart . -Writing a short story talking about what you did on your vacation. - Prepare the vocabulary for the text on page 89. -Preparing: Unit 9: A4 * Feedback. Pre: 08/01/2015 Tea: 09/01/ 2015 Period: 57 Unit 9 : AT HOME AND AWAY Lesson 3: A holiday in Nha Trang <A 4> A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the details about Ba’s daily. I.Knowledge. - Ba’s daily. - The simple past. II. Skill -Listening and Reading skill. B. Proceduce..

(130) I.Greeting "sing a song" II- Revision(7ms) - "Slap the board" went bought. took ate. saw thought. III.New lesson. Teacher’s work Student’s work . I.Pre - reading (12ms) 1, pre - teach: Students guess the words listen & repeat. * Teacher elicits to teach vocab (to) rent : explanation - Listening to the words. (to) keep in touch : traslation - Repeating the words in chorus & in (to) teach : example individual. (to) improve : translation - Introduces the words by explaining the - Correcting the mistakes.- Giving themeaning & the pronunciation. meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 - Copying the words. times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). Copy down. - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. Students match the word in simple *, checking vocab :matching present with a word in simple past. 2, T / F statement prediction(15ms - Introduces the statement & ask Ss to work in pairs to predict which statements are true or false. - Asks Ss to give the keys & Comments. Students predict which statements 1. Liz lived a long way from Ba. are true and which statements are 2. Liz learned VietNamese in the USA. false. 3. Ba collects stamps. 4. Liz’s aunt lives in NewYork. 5. The Robisons moved to HCM city. 6. The Robisons moved now Ba is happy. 7. Ba will see Liz next week. - T corrects 3.Post reading(7ms) -Students read & check their predictions -Teacher asks students do Ex3 P54 in and make the wrong sentence true. Unit 9 in work book. Take note. - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work in pairs to write the question & give answer with YES or NO. - Asks Ss to compare & give the keys. - Corrects & comments. Students play well. * Answer keys; a. Did his uncle take him to see Cham Temple ? – No, he didn’t. b. Did Liz buy a lot of souvenirs ? – -Working in pairs to write the question & give answer with YES or NO. Yes, she did. c. Did they put the fish in the bags ? – - Comparing & giving the keys. No, they didn’t. d. Did Liz teach Ba some English ? – Yes, she did. IV.Consolidation :(2ms) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content..

(131) V.Homework :(1m) Doing exercise 5 in work book. Learning by heart all vocab + words in simple past. Preparing new lesson : Unit 9 Lesson 4. * Feedback. BAI SO¹N NµY ThõA kh«ng dïng Teaching day: Period: 57. /1/2013 Unit 9 : AT HOME AND AWAY Lesson 3: A holiday in Nha Trang <A 4>. A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the details about Ba’s daily. I.Knowledge. - Ba’s daily. - The simple past. II. Skill -Listening and Reading skill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting "sing a song" II- Revision(5ms) - "Slap the board" went took saw bought. ate. thought. III.New lesson. Teacher’s work Student’s work I.PRE-LISTENING(10ms) 1. True – False prediction: A3 – P89. - Working in pairs to predict which - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to statements are true . work in pairs to predict which statements - Comparing & give their prediction. are true . - Asks Ss to compare & give their prediction. - Comments S’s prediction. * Statements: a. The Robinson returned to Hanoi by train..

(132) b. The Robinson returned to Hanoi by bus c. This was the second times Liz saw the paddies. d. This was the first times Liz saw the paddies. e. They stopped at the restaurant for a short time. f. They stopped at the restaurant for a long time. g. Mr. Robinson bought some food for Liz. h. Mrs. Robinson bought some food for Liz i. They arrived home in the afternoon. j. They arrived home in the evening. II.WHILE-LISTENING(15ms) 2. Presentation text: (Teacher’s book). - Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the text. - Asks Ss to listen to the text & get the idea. - Asks Ss to check their prediction. - Corrects S’s prediction & comments. II.Pre - reading (15ms) 1, pre - teach: * Teacher elicits to teach vocab (to) rent : explanation (to) keep in touch : traslation (to) teach : example (to) improve : translation - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. 2, checking vocab :matching 3, T / F statement prediction - Introduces the statement & ask Ss to work in pairs to predict which statements are true or false. - Asks Ss to give the keys & Comments. 8. Liz lived a long way from Ba. 9. Liz learned VietNamese in the USA. 10.Ba collects stamps. 11.Liz’s aunt lives in NewYork. 12.The Robisons moved to HCM city. 13.The Robisons moved now Ba is happy. 14.Ba will see Liz next week. - T corrects I. Post reading(7ms) -Teacher asks students do Ex3 P54 in Unit 9 in work book. - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work in pairs to write the question & give answer with YES or NO. - Asks Ss to compare & give the keys. - Corrects & comments. * Answer keys;. - Listening to the text & get the idea. - Listening to the text & check the prediction. Answer keys: - True statements: b – d – e – h – i.. Students guess the words listen & repeat. - Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. - Correcting the mistakes.- Giving themeaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words. -. Copy down.. Students match the word in simple present with a word in simple past.. -. -. -. -. Students predict which statements are true and which statements are false.. Students read & check their predictions and make the wrong sentence true. Take note.. Students play well.. -Working in pairs to write the question & give answer with YES or NO..

(133) a. Did his uncle take him to see Cham - Comparing & giving the keys. Temple ? – No, he didn’t. b. Did Liz buy a lot of souvenirs ? – Yes, she did. c. Did they put the fish in the bags ? – No, they didn’t. d. Did Liz teach Ba some English ? – Yes, she did. IV.Consolidation :(2ms) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(1m) Doing exercise 5 in work book. Learning by heart all vocab + words in simple past. Preparing new lesson : Unit 9 Lesson 4. * Feedback. Pre: 11/01/2015 Tea: 12/01/ 2015 Period: 58 Unit 9 : AT HOME AND AWAY Lesson 4: NEIGHBORS <B1-2>. A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to pactice and use ( Yes/ Noquestion). I.Knowledge. - The simple past with Yes/No question. II. Skill - Reading and speaking skill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision - "Pelmanism"(5ms) help take talk go give see.

(134) helped. took. talked. went. gave. saw. III.New lesson. Teacher’s activities I. Presentation(20ms) 1. Pre teach Teacher elicticts to teach vocab. -hair dresser : expaination -material: translation -dressmaker: explaination -(to) make - made : translation -cushion -useful -hobby -sewing machine -(to) sew - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. 2.Checking vocabulary. - R. O. R 3.Presentation dialogue - Teacher asks students to read B1 P.92 - Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the dialogue. - Asks Ss to read the dialogue in pairs. - Asks Ss to practice the dialogue in groups & in pairs. - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. - Introduces the model sentence & explains the way to use simple past using “YES / NO question” 4.Model sentences Teacher sets a sence to give the models sentences. - Did your uncle cut your hair? Do it? - Yes, he did. - No, he didn’t. Did + S + V(inf) + O ?  Yes, S + did ( No, S + didn't) -T controls and corrects. II. Practice(15ms) a. word cue drill 1. Hoa / buy/ dress/ 2. Lan / cut / flowers / 3. Her mother / make / cake / 4. Boys / paly / soccer / III.Futher practice Ask Ss to practice themselves. Students’activities. -Ss guess the meaning,pronunciation,...of the words.. - Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words. -Ss enjoy the game . -Ss listen to the their teacher and get the meaning of the dialogue. - Reading the dialogue in pairs. - Practicing the dialogue in groups & in pairs. -Correcting the pronunciation.. -Ss give the concept check. ( using, meaning, structure ) Expected: Did + S + V(inf) + O ?  Yes, S + did ( No, S + didn’t). -Ss take notes. -Ss depend to the model sentences and practice well. - Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs . -Correcting the pronunciation. Expected: S1:Did Hoa buy a dress? S2: Yes,she did....etc..

(135) IV.Consolidation :(3m) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(2ms) Doing exercise 5 in work book. Learning by heart all vocab + words in simple past. Preparing new lesson : Unit 9 Lesson5 B3,4. * Feedback. Pre: 14/01/2015 Tea: 15/01/ 2015 Period: 59 Unit 9 : AT HOME AND AWAY Lesson 4: NEIGHBORS <B3-4>. A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to pactice and use ( Yes/ Noquestion). I.Knowledge. - The simple past with Yes/No question. II. Skill - Reading and speaking skill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision - "Pelmanism"(5ms) Work Buy live Eat Write Send worked bought lived ate wrote sent III.New lesson. Teacher’s activities I.Presentation 1. Pre teach(5ms) Teacher elicticts to teach the text. *. B3-P93. - Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work in pairs to ask & answer the questions. *White teach(15ms) - Asks Ss to give the answer by asking & answering in pairs. - Corrects & comments. Questions: a) What did Hoa learn to use ? a) What did she make first ? b) What color was it ? c) What did she make next ? d) What color was it ? e) How did it look ?. Students’activities. .-Working in pairs to write the question with WH-word . - Comparing & giving the keys. Answer keys: a. She learned how to sew. b. She made a cushion for her armchair. c. It was blue and white. d. Next she made a skirt. e. It was green with flowers on it. f. It looked very pretty. g. It was too big. h. Hoa’s neighbor helped her. It fitted her very well..

(136) f) problem ?. What. was. the. g) Who helped her ? How did it fit finally ? *Production.(15ms) Write: B4-P94. - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work in pairs to put the verbs in brackets in the simple past tense. - Asks Ss to compare & give the keys. - Corrects & comments. Statements: a. Hoa…(watch) her neighbor make her dress. b. First, she …(buy) some material. c. Then, she …(cut) the dress out. d. Next, she …(use) a sewing machine to sew the dress. e. Hoa …(decide) that sewing…(be) a useful f. She …(make) a cushion and a dress. The cushion…(be) fine, but the dress…(be+not) g. Then, her neighbor …(help) her, so finally it…(fit) her.. -Working in pairs to put the verbs in brackets in the simple past tense. - Comparing & giving the keys.. * Answer keys; a. watched. b. bought. c. cut. d. used. e. decided – was f. made – was – wasn’t. g. helped – fitted.. IV.Consolidation :(3m) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(2ms) Doing exercise 5 in work book. Learning by heart all vocab + words in simple past. Preparing new lesson :language focus3. * Feedback. Pre: 15/01/2015 Tea: 16/01/ 2015 Period: 60 LANGUAGE FOCUS 3.

(137) A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to remind the knowledge from unit 8 to unit 9. I.Knowledge. - The simple past - Making suggestions. - more, less and fewer (*) II. Skill - Reading and speaking skill B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision III.New lesson. Teacher’s activities Students’activities 1. How much is it? -Ss remind and answer. T asks Ss to remind the way to ask and answer the price. 1) violet dress/ 35.000 2) green hat/ 15.000 3) yellow cap/ 12.000 4) green shirt/ 20.000 5) red shirt/ 22.000 Ex: -Take notes. S1:How much is the violet dress? S2:It’s 35.000 dong. ........etc 2. Preposition. T asks Ss to look at the table and ask and -Ss practice well. answer with their partners. from to meter shoestore minimart 500 clothing store book store 450 restaurant library 400 library shoe store 800 Ex: S1:How far is it from shoe store to minimart? S2:It’s 500 meter. ..........etc 3. The simple past tense.( 10ms) -SS write the past form of the verbs in T gives some words in the simple the table. present form to ask Ss write them into the past form. a) - Introduces the requirement & asks a) - Working in individual to write the Ss to work in individual to write the past past form of the verbs in the table. - Comparing & giving the keys. form of the verbs in the table. - Asks Ss to compare & give the keys. - Corrects & comments. b) - Introduces the requirement & asks b) - Working in individual to complete Ss to work in individual to complete the the sentences using the words in the box. - Comparing & giving the keys. sentences using the words in the box. - Asks Ss to compare & give the keys. - Corrects & comments. * Answer keys: * Answer keys: a)Write the past form of the verbs in the b) Complete the sentences table. using the words in the box..

(138) Verb Buy Help Remember Take Send Think Talk. Past form Bought Helped Remembered Took Sent Thought Talked. -T corrects the mistake.. Play. send buy work. talk. a. b.. I played volleyball last week. Yesterday, I talked to my grandma. c. Last week, Mom bought me a new bike. d. Dad worked in Hue a few year ago. I sent a letter to my pen pal last week. -Ss do the exercise well.. IV.Consolidation :(2ms) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(1m) Doing again all exercise in the notebook. Preparing new lesson :Unit 10: <A1,4.> * Feedback. Pre: 18/01/2015 Tea: 19/01/ 2015 Period: 61 Unit 10 : HEALTH AND HYGIENE Lesson 1: Personal hygiene <A1-4> A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the main ideas and details of this letter. I.Knowledge. - Activities you do everyday II. Skill - Reading skill B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision III.New lesson. Teacher’s activities Students’activities 1. Pre-reading.(15ms) a.Pre teach. -harvest -receive -helpful.

(139) -iron - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. b.Checking vocab. R.O.R c.Open prediction. T asks Ss to guess what Hoa’s mother wants her to do and she wants her not to do. Ex: Do Not do get up early don’t stay up late ....... ....... 2. While-reading.(20ms) Activity 1: -T asks Ss to read the letter and check their ideas. Activity 2: "Wh-questions" T give a game "shark attack" to ask Ss practice. a)- d) A1. P.99. * Questions: a. Why are Hoa’s parents busy ? b. Who helps them on the farm ? c. When will they go to Hanoi ? d. How is Hoa different now ? e. What does Hoa’s mother want her to do & what does she want her not to do ? Write two list.. 3. Post-reading.(7ms) - A4 P.102 (text book). - Introduces the requirement & ask Ss to work in individual next in pairs & in groups to complete Hoa’s reply to her with suitable words. - Asks Ss to compare the keys give the keys. - Comments.. - Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. - Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words. -Ss enjoy the game. - Ss guess what Hoa’s mother wants her to do and she wants her not to do.. -. -. Ss read the letter and check their ideas. Ss enjoy the game.. * Answer: a. Because it’s nearly harvest time. b. Hoa’s grandfather helps them on the farm. c. They probably go to Hanoi after the harvest. d. She gets up early & take morning exercises. e. She wants Hoa to wash & iron her own clothes. She doesn’t want her to eat too much candy & stay up late.- Ss work individually- in pairs- in groups. - Working in individual next in pairs & in groups to complete Hoa’s reply to her with suitable words. - Asks Ss to compare the keys give the keys. * Answer key: was - having – take – take – get go – wash – iron – eating – told – go.. IV.Consolidation :(2ms) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(1m) -Writing a short reply letter to your parents to talk about what you do & about what you not do. - Prepare the vocabulary & the picture on page 76 . -Preparing new lesson :Unit 10: <A 2,3>.

(140) Pre: 21/01/2015 Tea: 22/01/ 2015 Period: 62 Unit 10 : HEALTH AND HYGIENE Lesson 1: Personal hygiene <A2-3> A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the main ideas and details about activities Hoa did yesterday. I.Knowledge. Activities Hoa did yesterday. Simple past tense II. Skill - Listening skill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision(5ms) - "Slap the board" harvest recieve hope iron III.New lesson. Teacher’s activities I.Pre -listening (7ms) 1.Pre - teach Teacher elicits to teach vocab. (to) put on clothers : picture (to) polish the shoes : mime red pans : translation - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. helpul. probably. Students’activities guess listen & repeat -. copy down. - Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. - Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. -. Copying the words.. -Ss enjoy the game. -. Check vocab’ What and where ‘ put on clothes polish the shoes. put on sandals red pans. -. Look & predict. Students guess the order of the.

(141) picture P.100. A2. Students listen to the tape and check their ideas. - Working in individual then in pairs & in groups to predict the missing words to fill in the dialogue - Comparing & give their prediction Take note. -. *orderning pictures - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work in individual then in pairs & in groups to predict the missing words to fill in the dialogue - Asks Ss to compare & give their prediction. - Comments S’s prediction. 2. While - listening(10ms) Teachers turns on the tapes 3 times. Teacher gives answer key : 1. a 5. g 2. e 6. c 3. f 7. h 4. d 8. b Teacher corrects II.1.Pre -writing(5ms) Teacher gives a question : _+ What time does Nam get up? Ex: S1: What time does Nam get up ? S2: He gets up at 6 : 30 Teacher corrects 2.While - writing(10ms) Act1: Teacher gives some information. 5 : 00 get up. 6 : 00 listen to the music. 6 : 30 wash face. Act2: Teacher gives some questions: What time do you get up ? What ... have breakfast? ....... go to bed ? Ex: S1 : What time do you have breakfast ? S2: I have breakfast at 6 : 00. (or): S1 : What time do you go to bed ? S2: I go to bed at 10 : 00 Teacher corrects. Teacher gives exercises A1. in P61 work book ? What did Nam do yesterday? 3.Post-writing(5ms) -T correct the writing o f students.. -. Students work in groups to retell the story.. -. Share Read Students work in pair to ask the question.. -. Students write a daily entry themselves.. -. Students work in pairs. Ask & answer the questions.. -. take note.. -. Students write the sentences. -Ss take note.. IV.Consolidation :(2ms) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content..

(142) V.Homework :(1m) Learning by heart all content. Doing exercises in workbook. Preparing new lesson Unit 10. B1.. Pre: 18/01/2015 Tea: 19/01/ 2015 Period: 62 Unit 10 : HEALTH AND HYGIENE Lesson 2: Personal hygiene <A2> Period: 62 A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the main ideas and details about activities Hoa did yesterday. I.Knowledge. Activities Hoa did yesterday. Simple past tense II. Skill - Listening skill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision III.New lesson. -. -. Teacheractivities corrects - Students’activities Take note. Teacher’s put on clothes Take note. I.Pre -listening (15ms) red putpans on polish guess 1.Pre - teach sandals the - Students work in groups to retell listen & repeat Teacher elicits to teach vocab. shoes Students work in groups to retell the story. (to) put on clothers : picture copy down (to) polish the shoes : mime red pans : translation - Introduces the words by explaining the - Listening to the words..

(143) the story. Share Read I. Pre -writing(10ms) Teacher gives a question : _+ What time does Nam get up? Ex: S1: What time does Nam get up ? S2: He gets up at 6 : 30 Teacher corrects II. While - writing(25ms) Act1: Teacher gives some information. 5 : 00 get up. 6 : 00 listen to the music. 6 : 30 wash face. Act2: Teacher gives some questions: What time do you get up ? What ... have breakfast? ....... go to bed ? Ex: S1 : What time do you have breakfast ? S2: I have breakfast at 6 : 00. (or): S1 : What time do you go to bed ? S2: I go to bed at 10 : 00 Teacher corrects. Teacher gives exercises A1. in P61 work book ? What did Nam do yesterday? III.Post-writing(7ms) -T correct the writing o f students -. -. Share Read Students work in pair to ask the question.. -. Students write a daily entry themselves.. -. Students work in pairs. Ask & answer the questions.. -. take note.. -. Students write the sentences.. -. -Ss take note. Students work in pair to ask the question.. -. Students write a daily entry themselves.. -. Students work in pairs. Ask & answer the questions.. -. take note.. -. Students write the sentences.. -Ss take note. IV.Consolidation :(2ms) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(1m) Learning by heart all vocab. Doing exercise in "post listening" in your exercise notebook. Preparing new lesson Unit 10. A3..

(144) Unit 10 : HEALTH AND HYGIENE Lesson 3: Personal hygiene <A3> Period: 63 A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the main ideas and details about activities Hoa did yesterday. I.Knowledge. Activities Hoa did yesterday. Simple past tense II. Skill - Writting skill B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision III.New lesson. Teacher’s activities I. Pre -writing(10ms) Teacher gives a question : _+ What time does Nam get up? Ex: S1: What time does Nam get up ? S2: He gets up at 6 : 30 Teacher corrects II. While - writing(25ms) Act1: Teacher gives some information. 5 : 00 get up. 6 : 00 listen to the music. 6 : 30 wash face. Act2: Teacher gives some questions: What time do you get up ? What ... have breakfast? ....... go to bed ? Ex: S1 : What time do you have breakfast ? S2: I have breakfast at 6 : 00. (or): S1 : What time do you go to bed ? S2: I go to bed at 10 : 00 Teacher corrects. Teacher gives exercises A1. in P61 work book ? What did Nam do yesterday? III.Post-writing(7ms) -T correct the writing o f students.. Students’activities -. Students work in pair to ask the question.. -. Students write a daily entry themselves.. -. Students work in pairs. Ask & answer the questions.. -. take note.. -. Students write the sentences. -Ss take note..

(145) IV.Consolidation :(2ms) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(1m) Learning by heart all content. Doing exercises in workbook. Preparing new lesson Unit 10. B1 - 4.. VI.Can improved ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................................ ..................................................................................................................... THE END. Pre: 22/01/2015 Tea: 23/01/ 2015 Period: 63 Unit 10 : HEALTH AND HYGIENE Lesson 4: A bad toothache <B1> A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to talk about a visit to the dentist using "Why and because". I.Knowledge. Simple past tense II. Skill - Reading and speaking skill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting. II- Revision(7ms) -"Wordsquare" ( Answer key: looked,saw,drank,stopped,ate,felt ) T S H O D V T A O L S P H L M A L O O K E D Q B D R A N K I T V F E L T M D Y T S A W N E X H N Z H K L M O A C S T O P P E D V III.New lesson. Teacher’s activities Students’activities 1. Presentation.(15ms) a.Pre-teach. -dentist -cavity -to be scared -(to) have a toothache -(to) fill -(to) fix - Introduces the words by explaining the - Listening to the words. meaning, using the situation. - Repeating the words in chorus & in - Reads the words for the modal (3 individual. times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 - Correcting the mistakes. times ). - Giving the meaning & the - Checks S’s reading in individual & pronunciation. corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. Copying the words..

(146) - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. b.Check vocab. -"What and Where" c.Presentation dialogue. B1 P.103 Questions a- b text book. Model sentences. S1: I have an appointment at 10:30 this morning,but I’m scared. S2: Why? S1: Because I hate the sound of the drill.. 2. Practice.(10ms) Questions a- b text book 3. Production.(7ms) B1,2 P.64 (Workbook) T controls and corrects. IV.Consolidation :(3ms) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(3m) Learning by heart all content. Doing exercises in workbook. Preparing new lesson: Unit 10. B2,3 -. Pre: 25/01/2015 Tea: 26/01/ 2015 Period: 64 Unit 10 : HEALTH AND HYGIENE Lesson 5: A bad toothache <B2,3> A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the details about how the dentist helps the children teeth. I.Knowledge..

(147) - How the dentist helps the children teeth. II. Skill - Listening-reading skill. .B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision -"Slap the board" (5ms) scared. dentist. clearn the teeth. look after wash the hands. -T reads the words in VietNamese. -Ss slap the words in English. III.New lesson Teacher’s activities I.Pre-listening.(10ms) a.Pre teach. -(to) explain -advice -sebsible/ sensibly -surgery -important - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. b.Check vocab. "What and Where" c.Open prediction. Students’activities. - Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. - Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words.. -Ss enjoy the game. - Working in pairs to predict . - Comparing & Giving the keys.. Dr. Lai’s Job Dr. Lai’s clothes How chidlren feel ? Dr. Lai helps children. Gives........ Tells..... Reminds.... II.While-listening.(7ms) T turns on the tape to aks Ss listen and check their prediction. III.Pre-reading.(3ms) c.T/F statement prediction. 1) Dr. Lai is very kind -Ss predict.T or F ? 2) Minh has one big cavity. 3) minh brushes his teeth regulary. 4) Clearn teeth are healthy teeth. -Ss read the text and check their IV.While-reading.(10ms).

(148) Activity 1: T asks Ss to read the text and check their prediction.. prediction. *Answer key:. 1) 2) 3) 4). T F F T. Ss read the text again and Activity 2: complete the story B3 P.104. T asks Ssto read the text again and complete ( Ss work individually- in pairs- in the story B3 P.104. groups ) Activity 3: B5 P.106 ( Text book) T corrects. -Ss work in groups and write their ideas V.Post-reading and listening.(3ms) on the posters. T gives a question" how do you look after your teeth ?" to aks Ss to discuss. - T corrects. IV.Consolidation :(1m) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(1m) Learning by heart all content. Doing exercises in workbook. Preparing new lesson: Unit 10B4. Pre: 28/01/2015 Tea: 29/01/ 2015 Period: 65 Unit 10 : HEALTH AND HYGIENE Lesson 4: A bad toothache <B4> A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to talk about a visit to the dentist using "Why and because". I.Knowledge. Using "Why and because". II. Skill - Reading and speaking skill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting. II- Revision -"What and where" (5ms) important. serious. cavity III.New lesson. Teacher’s activities 1Presentation.(15ms) a.Pre-teach. -hurt -nervous - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2. surgery forget. Students’activities.

(149) times ). - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. b.Check vocab. -Rub out and remember". - Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. - Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. -. -. -. 2.Practice.(15ms) "Picture drill" b) tooth/ hurt- have cavity c) nervous- see/ dentist d) cavity/ not serious- small e) happy- teeth/ OK 3.Production.(7ms) B4 P.65 (Workbook) T controls and corrects.. Copying the words.. . . Example exchange: S1: Minh’s tooth hurt S2: Why? S1: Because he has a cavity. .........etc.. IV.Consolidation :(2ms) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(1m) Learning by heart all content. Doing exercises in workbook. Preparing new lesson: Unit 11A1.

(150) Pre: 29/01/2015 Tea: 30/01/ 2015 Period: 66 Unit 11 : KEEP FIT, STAY HEALTHY Lesson 1: A CHECK - UP <A1> A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to talk about temperature, height and weight. I.Knowledge. -Simple past tense. -Temperature, height and weight. II. Skill - Reading and speaking skill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision -"Pelmanism" (5ms) leave. fill. take. tell. be. go. left. filled. took. told. was/were went. see. know. saw. knew. III.New lesson Teacher’s activities 1. Presentation.(15ms) a.Pre teach. -a medical check up -medical record -height -(to) weigh -(to) measure -(to) take temperature - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words b.Check vocab. R.O.R c.Presentation text. A1 P.108 - Introduces & Helps Ss to read the letter. - Asks Ss to read the letter in individual & check their prediction. - Asks Ss to correct the keys. - Corrects & comments.. -. 2. Practice.(20ms) "picture drill" (Using the pictures P.70 - workbook). Students’activities. - Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. - Correcting the mistakes. - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words.. -Ss enjoy the game. - Reading the text in individual & check their prediction. - Correcting the keys. d.Model sentences: -The nurse weighed Hoa called measure ( ed -/d/ , /t/ , /id/ ) -Ss give the concept check..

(151) Example: The nurse weighed Hoa The nurse measured Hoa The nurse took Hoa’s temperature. The nurse started a medical chek up . ..........etc. 3. Production.(3ms) A4 P.70 ( workbook) T corrects .. -Ss practice well.. -Ss work individually - in pairs - in groups.. IV.Consolidation :(1ms) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(1m) Learning by heart all content. Doing exercises in workbook. Preparing new lesson: Unit 11: A2-3. PHÒNG GD & ĐT THỊ XÃ BA ĐỒN TRƯỜNG THCS QUẢNG LONG. ĐỀ KIỂM TRA 15 PHÚT NĂM HỌC: 2014 – 2015 MÔN: TIẾNG ANH LỚP 7. ĐIỂM. Lớp:............................................................ Họ và Tên: ................................................. I/: Chọn đáp án đúng nhất A , B,C hoặc D. (5 ®iÓm). 1. I …………..late for the party last night. a. be b. am c. was d. were 2. Hoa’s Mom received a letter from her Aunt ………… week. a. this b. that c. next d. last 3. He sees a dentist because he has a ……………….. a. toothache b. headache c. earache d. stomachache 4. Hoa filled …………… her medical record. a. in b. on c. at d. to 5. Would you like ……………….. table tennis ? a. play b. to play c. playing d. played. II/. Cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc(5 điểm) 1. I (meet)_______________ them at the movie theater last night.. 2. Next week, we (have) ____________________dinner together. 3. I’m scared of (watch) ______________the ghost movies. 4. The children (be)__________________ in class now, but ten minutes ago they (be) ___________ in the school yard..

(152) PHÒNG GD & ĐT THỊ XÃ BA ĐỒN TRƯỜNG THCS QUẢNG LONG. ĐỀ KIỂM TRA 15 PHÚT NĂM HỌC: 2014 – 2015 MÔN: TIẾNG ANH LỚP 7. ĐIỂM. Lớp:............................................................ Họ và Tên: ................................................. I/: Chọn đáp án đúng nhất A , B,C hoặc D. (5 ®iÓm). 1. I …………..late for the party last night. a. be b. am c. was d. were 2. Hoa’s Mom received a letter from her Aunt ………… week. a. this b. that c. next d. last 3. He sees a dentist because he has a ……………….. a. toothache b. headache c. earache d. stomachache 4. Hoa filled …………… her medical record. a. in b. on c. at d. to 5. Would you like ……………….. table tennis ? a. play b. to play c. playing d. played. II/. Cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc(5 điểm) 1. I (meet)_______________ them at the movie theater last night.. 2. Next week, we (have) ____________________dinner together. 3. I’m scared of (watch) ______________the ghost movies. 4. The children (be)__________________ in class now, but ten minutes ago they (be) ___________ in the school yard.. Pre: 01/02/2015 Tea: 02/02/ 2015 Period: 67 Unit 11 : KEEP FIT, STAY HEALTHY Lesson 2: A CHECK - UP <A2-3> A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the details about personal information. I.Knowledge. -Simple past tense. - Personal information II. Skill - Listening skill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision -"Jumbled words" (5ms) KAS=? (Answer key: ask, short, measure, heavy, height) EIGHTH=? MSUREEA=? EAHVY=? HORST=? III.New lesson Teacher’s activities Students’activities 1. Pre-listening.(15ms) a.T gives A2 P.108 (text book) to aks Ss.

(153) to predict the missing words. D: I want to.........you a few questions before I start, Hoa, ......old are you? H: fourteen. D: And......height is one meter...........centimeter? H: No, I think I’m........The nurse measure ......... D: Oh.how .......are you? H: One.......45............. D:I........aks the ........to check your.........again. How heavy are you? H: I.......I’m 42 kilos. D: ....It says on your.....that you’re 40 kilos. - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work in individual then in pairs & in groups to predict the missing words to fill in the dialogue - Asks Ss to compare & give their prediction. - Comments S’s prediction. b. Presentation dialogue: A2 - P108 - Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the dialogue. - Asks Ss to listen to the dialogue & get the idea. - Asks Ss to check their prediction. - Corrects S’s prediction & comments. 2. While-listening.(15ms) -T turns on the tape to ask Ss to check their prediction.. 3. Post-listening.(8ms) - A3 P.108-109 Text book - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work in pairs to play one is A & one is B then look at the medical records & cover the other to fill in the missing information - Asks Ss to use these questions form to ask & answer for information. ? – Which…? ? – What is his…? ? – Where does he …? ? – How…is he ? - Asks Ss to compare & give their answers. - Corrects & comments.. -. Ss predict the missing words.. - Working in individual then in pairs & in groups to predict the missing words to fill in the dialogue - Comparing & give their prediction.. - Listening to the dialogue & get the idea. - Listening to the dialogue & check the prediction. -Ss listen to the tape and check their prediction. Answer keys: 1.ask 2.how 3.your 4.50 5.shorter 6.me 7.tall 8.meter....cetimeter 9.nurse 10.height 11.think. 12.no 13.form - Working in pairs to play one is A & one is B then look at the medical records & cover the other to fill in the missing information - Using the questions form to ask & answer for information. - Comparing & give their answers. - Correcting the answer keys. Answer keys: MEDICAL RECORD School: Nguyen Du school. Class: 7A. FULL NAME  Fore name: Van Kien.  Surname: Tran. Address: 66 Ham long Street Hanoi. Male:  Female: Age: 12. Weight: 41 kg. Height: 140 cm..

(154) IV.Consolidation :(1m) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(1m) Learning by heart all content. Doing exercises in workbook. Preparing new lesson: Unit 11: B1. Pre: 04/02/2015 Tea: 05/02/ 2015 Period: 68 Unit 11 : KEEP FIT, STAY HEALTHY Lesson 3: WHAT WAS WRONG WITH YOU ?<B1> A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to talk about names of illness. I.Knowledge. -Simple past tense. - Names of illness. II. Skill - Reading and speaking skill. .B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision -"Slap the board" (5ms) I’m 14 years old.. I’m 40 kilos. 15 Le loi Street Ss listen and slap the suitable responses. 1) What class are you in? 2) How old are you? 3) Where do you live? 4) How heavy are you? 5) How tall are you? III.New lesson Teacher’s activities 1. Presentation.(15ms) a.Pre teach. -(to) have a headache a stomachache a toothache a cold the flu a virus - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation & gives example. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. b.Check vocab: R.O.R c.Presentation dialogue. B1 P.110 - Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the dialogue & practice the dialogue in pairs.. 1m50 class 7A. Students’activities. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual & Correcting the mistakes - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words.. - Practicing the dialogue in pairs.

(155) - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. d.Comprehension questions. a)- e) text book P.110 - Introduces the questions & Asks Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions. - Asks Ss to give the answers & corrects. * Questions: a. Why didn’t Lan go to school yesterday ? b. What was wrong with her ? c. What does Mr. Tan tell Lan to do ? d.What did the doctor say about Lan’s problem? e. Who wrote Lan’s sick note ? e.Model sentences: - Introduces the model sentence & explains the form & use of the past simple tense. 2. Practice.(15ms) "Word cues drill" a.you/ a headache d) Mary/ a cold b.He/ a stomachache e)Tom/ the flu c.She/ a toothache f)Lan/ a virus - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to practice. - Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in groups & in pairs & Corrects 3. Production.(5ms) - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work in pairs ask & answer these questions & check the table. - Asks Ss to give the answers. - Corrects & comments.. -Correcting the pronunciation.. - Working in pairs to answer the questions. - Giving the answers & correcting. * Answers: a. Because she had a bad cold. b. She was sick. c. He asked her to stay inside at recess. d. She had a virus. e. The doctor write the sick note for her.. Model sentences: S1: What was wrong with you? S2: I had a bad cold.. - Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs . - Correcting the pronunciation. Example exchange: S1:What was wrong with you? S2: He had a toothache.. . IV.Consolidation :(3m) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(2m):Learning by heart all content.- Preparing new lesson: Unit 11: B2. Pre: 05/02/2015 Tea: 06/02/ 2015 Period: 69 Unit 11 : KEEP FIT, STAY HEALTHY Lesson 3: WHAT WAS WRONG WITH YOU ?<B2> A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to talk about names of illness. I.Knowledge. -Simple past tense. - Names of illness. II. Skill - Reading and speaking skill. .B. Proceduce..

(156) I.Greeting II- Revision -"Slap the board" (5ms) headache tell. a cold. III.New lesson Teacher’s activities 1Presentation.(15ms) a.Pre teach. a stomachache a cold the flu - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation & gives example. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. b.Check vocab. R.O.R e.Model sentences: - Introduces the model sentence & explains the form & use of the past simple tense. 2.Practice.(15ms) "Word cues drill" a) you/ a headache b) He/ a stomachache c) She/ a toothache - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to practice. - Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in groups & in pairs & Corrects 3Production.(8ms) - Survey B2 P.111 -text book - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work in pairs ask & answer these questions & check the table. a.Were you absent from school last year ? b. Were you sick ? c. Did you have a headache/ a stomachache/ a toothache/ a cold/ a virus/ the flu ? - Asks Ss to combine their answering for the whole class & answer this question: ? What was the most common illness ? - Asks Ss to give the answers.. a virus Sick note Students’activities. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual & Correcting the mistakes - Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. - Copying the words.. - Practicing the dialogue in pairs -Correcting the pronunciation.. - Working in pairs to answer the questions. - Giving the answers & correcting. .. Model sentences: S1: What was wrong with you? S2: I had a bad cold. - Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs . - Correcting the pronunciation. - Working in pairs to ask & answer the questions & checking the table. - Comparing their answering. - Giving the answers. - Combining their answering for the whole class & answer this question:.

(157) - Corrects & comments.. ? What was the most common illness ? - Comparing their answering. - Giving the answers.. IV.Consolidation :(1m) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(1m) Learning by heart all content. Doing exercises in workbook. Preparing new lesson: Unit 11:B4. Unit 11 : KEEP FIT, STAY HEALTHY Lesson 4: WHAT WAS WRONG WITH YOU ?<B3> Period: 69 A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the details about days lost through sickness in class 7A last semester. I.Knowledge. -Simple past tense. -Days lost through sickness in class 7A last semester II. Skill - Listening skill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision -"Slap the board" (5ms) headache. stomachache. a toothache T calls out in VietNamese. Ss slap the words in English. III.New lesson Teacher’s activities 1. Pre-listening.(15ms) a.Pre teach. -absence -sickness -due to -(to) account -(to) cause - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation.. cold virus. Students’activities. - Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual. - Correcting the mistakes. Giving the meaning & thepronunciation. - Copying the words..

(158) - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. b.Check vocab. R.O.R c.Open prediction. Name of Group Group Group Group illness A C D B cold flu stomachache headache toothache -T asks Ss work in group to predict the days lost through sickness. - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work in four groups to predict the day lost through sickness to fill in the table. - Asks Ss to compare & give their prediction & Comments S’s prediction. d. Presentation dialogue: B3 -P111. - Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the dialogue. - Asks Ss to listen to the dialogue & get the idea. - Asks Ss to check their prediction. - Corrects S’s prediction & comments.. -Enjoy the game.. - Working in four groups to predict the day lost through sickness to fill in the table. - Comparing & give their prediction. - Listening to the dialogue & get the idea.. 2. While-listening.(15ms) -T turns on the tape to aks Ss to listen to the tape carefully and fill in the table above.. - Listening to the dialogue & check the prediction. *Answer key: cold: 10 flu: 43 stomachache: 37 headache: 5 toothache: 17. 3. Post-listening.(8ms) B2 P.72 (work book) T asks Ss to complete the dialogue and then work in pairs to practise speaking. - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work in pairs to complete the conversation using the correct form of the verbs in the brackets. - Asks Ss to compare & give the. - Working in pairs to complete the conversation using the correct form of the verbs in the brackets. - Comparing & give their answers. - Correcting the answer keys. * Answer keys: a. didn’t b. was c. had d. had e. was. IV.Consolidation :(1m) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(1m) Learning by heart all content. Doing exercises in workbook. Preparing new lesson: Unit 11: B4-5. f. g. h. i. j. k.. had ate did feeling am going.

(159) Pre: 08/02/2015 Tea: 09/02/ 2015 Period: 70 Unit 11 : KEEP FIT, STAY HEALTHY Lesson 5: WHAT WAS WRONG WITH YOU ?<B4> A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the details about the common cold. I.Knowledge. -Simple past tense. - The common cold. II. Skill - Reading skill B. Proceduce. I.Greeting -.

(160) II- Revision -"Matching"(3ms) have a cold have the flu have a stomachache have headache have a toothache to be sick - Introduces the word & the meaning & asks Ss to work in pairs to match the word to its meaning. - Corrects & comments. III.New lesson Teacher’s activities Students’activities 1. Pre-reading.(15ms) a.Pre teach. -(to) cough -(to) sneeze -disease -a runny nose -a slight fever -symptom - Introduces the words by explaining the - Listening to the words. meaning, using the situation. - Repeating the words in chorus & in - Reads the words for the modal (3 times individual. ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Correcting the mistakes. - Checks S’s reading in individual & - Giving the meaning & the corrects the mistakes. pronunciation. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks - Copying the words. the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. b.Check vocab. R.O.R c.Open prediction. ..... What are the symptoms of the common cold ? .... runny nose - Introduces the requirement & ask Ss to work in pairs to predict what are the symptom of the common cold. - Asks Ss to compare the keys give the keys & Comments. d.Presentation text: B4 – P112 - Introduces & Helps Ss to read the text. - Asks Ss to read the text in individual & check their prediction & give the main ideals of the text. - Asks Ss to correct the keys. - Corrects & comments. 2. While-reading.(15ms) Activity 1: T asks Ss to read the text and check their prediction.. Activity 2: -_ Wh-questions. ( a)- d) P. 112 text book). - Working in pairs to predict what are the symptom of the common cold. - Comparing & Giving the keys.. - Reading the text in individual & check their prediction then give the main ideals of the text. - Correcting the keys.. Ss read the text and check their prediction. *Answer key: 1) cough 2) sneeze 3) a runny nose 4) a slight fever - Working in pairs to ask & answer the questions..

(161) - Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work in pairs to ask & answer the questions. - Asks Ss to give the answer keys. - Helps Ss to correct & comments. Questions: a. Why do we call the cold common ? b. What are the symptom of the common cold ? c. Is there a cure for common cold ? d. Do cold cure work ?What do they do ? e. How can you help prevent a cold ?. - Giving the answer keys. - Correcting the answer keys &Commenting Answer: a. Because every year million of people catch it. b. They’re: running nose; slight fever; coughing & sneezing. c. No, there isnt. d. No, they don’t. But they do relieve symptom. e. We can prevent a cold by eating well, doing exercise, keeping fit & staying healthy.. 4. Post-reading(10ms). "Discission" - Working in groups to discuss about the "How can you help prevent a cold?" - Introduces the requirement & ask Ss to topic “How can you help prevent a cold ?”. work in groups to discuss. - Reporting their information. - Asks Ss to report their information. - Comments. -T cotrols and corrects. IV.Consolidation :(1m) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(1m) Learning by heart all content. Doing exercises in workbook. Preparing new lesson -.

(162) Pre: 11/02/2015 Tea: 12/02/ 2015 Period 71 :. Written test 45 minutes. I / Objectives : - Ss will be able to summarize the knowledge they have learnt to do the test well . II / Content: Exercises that contains the knowledge from U 9 to U11. III/ Teaching aids : Test IV/ Procedures : * MATRIX NhËn biÕt. Chủ đề I. Listen II. Reading III. Language focus. TN 4 1,0. TL. 4. Th«ng hiÓu TN. TL 4 1,0. TL. TN. 8 2.0. 4 1.0 4 2,0. IV. Writing Tæng sè:. 12 3,0. Quang Long Secondary School Code 1 Fullname: ______________________ Class: 7____ Marks. 14 5,0. Tæng sè 8 2,0. 2 1,0. 1,0. 4 1.0. VËn dông. 8 3,0. ONE PERIOD TEST (No 3) Subject : English 7 School year : 2014-2015 Teacher’s comments. PART I: LISTENING You will listen to the passage about the Robinsons’ vacation three times. Section I: Listen and choose the correct answer.(1,0 m) 1. The Robinsons had a great holiday in................ A. Nha Trang B. Vung Tau C. Ho Chi Minh 2. Liz was ........... as the bus drove through the countryside. A. bored B. excited C. tired 3. Everything looked calm and..................... A. peaceful B. peace C. noisy 4. The bus stopped at a small roadside restaurant at ............o’clock. A. 2 B. 3 C.4. 6 2,0 16 4.0 4 2,0 34 10.

(163) Section II: Listen and tick () True or False .(1,0 m) Statements. Tru e. Fals e. 5.The Robinsons returned to Hanoi by bus. 6. This was the second time Liz saw the paddies. 7. They stopped at the restaurant for a long time. 8. Mr Robinson was asleep. PART II: USE OF LANGUAGE Choose the word with the different pronunciation of the underlined part. (1,0m) 9. A. Visited B. Wanted C. Needed D. Helped 10. A. Buy B. Try C. Country D. Why 11 A.Exercise B.Learning C.English D Think 12 A.Rest B. Tell B.Before D.Get Choose the best answer. (2m) 13. What was wrong ________you ? A. to B. with C. about D. for 14. Yesterday they had a ________check up. A. medical B. medicines C. medicine D. medically 15. Last week, the dentist _______ a cavity in my tooth. A. repaired B. fixed C. filled D. painted 16. Wash your ________ before meals. A. teeth B. tooth C. foot D. hands 17 . What is your__________ ? – I’m one meter fifty centimeters. A. height B. weight C. age D. school 18 .What are the _________ of the common cold? A. diseases B. symptoms C. medicines D. medical 19 .It ___________hot yesterday . A. are B was C. is D. were 20. Would you __________the door , please ? A. open B. to open C. opening. D. opened Use the Past form of the verbs (1m) 21. What did you (do) ___________ last night? – I watched TV. 22. I (not visit) ________________ her yesterday. 23. Liz (see)____________ sharks, dolphins and turtles at Tri Nguyen aquarium. 24__________you (do)_________your homework yesterday? PART III: READING Read the text, then do the tasks. How can we keep our teeth healthy? First, we ought to visit our dentist twice a year. He can fill the small holes in our teeth before they destroy the teeth. Secondly, we should brush our teeth at least twice a day – once after breakfast and once before we go to bed. We can also use wooden toothpicks to clean between our teeth after meals. Thirdly, we should eat food that good for our teeth and our body: milk, fish, potatoes, raw vegetables.

(164) and fresh fruit. Chocolate, sweets, biscuits are bad especially when we eat them between meals. They are harmful because they stick to our teeth and cause decay. * T ( True) or F ( False): (1m) 25. We ought to visit our dentist twice a year. ___________ 26. We should brush our teeth once a day. ___________ * Fill in the blanks: (1m) 27. The dentist can fill the small _________ in our teeth before they destroy the teeth. 28. We can use ___________________________ to clean between our teeth. 29. Chocolate, sweets, biscuits are _________ for our teeth. 30. Milk, fish, potatoes, raw vegetables __________ fresh fruit are good for our teeth. PART IV. WRITING. Rearrange these words to make sentences. (2m) 31. went/ I/ theatre/ to/ movie/ the/ yesterday./  __________________________________________________________. 32. tall/ you ?/ How/ are/  __________________________________________________________? 33 . does/ Minh/ nervous ?/ feel/ Why/  __________________________________________________________? 34. did/ What/ do/ last/ you/ night?/  __________________________________________________________ Quang Long Secondary School Code 2 Fullname: ______________________ Class: 7____ Marks. ONE PERIOD TEST (No 3) Subject : English 7 School year : 2014-2015 Teacher’s comments. PART I: LISTENING You will listen to the passage about the Robinsons’ vacation three times. Section I: Listen and choose the correct answer.(1,0 m) 2. The Robinsons had a great holiday in................ A. Nha Trang B. Vung Tau C. Ho Chi Minh 2. Liz was ........... as the bus drove through the countryside. A. bored B. excited C. tired 3. Everything looked calm and..................... A. peaceful B. peace C. noisy 4. The bus stopped at a small roadside restaurant at ............o’clock. A. 2 B. 3 C.4 Section II: Listen and tick () True or False .(1,0 m) Statements Tru e 5.The Robinsons returned to Hanoi by bus.. Fals e.

(165) 6This was the second time Liz saw the paddies. 7.They stopped at the restaurant for a long time. 8.Mr Robinson was asleep. PART II. WRITING. Rearrange these words to make sentences. (2m) 9. went/ I/ theatre/ to/ movie/ the/ yesterday./  __________________________________________________________. 10. tall/ you ?/ How/ are/  __________________________________________________________? 11 . does/ Minh/ nervous ?/ feel/ Why/  __________________________________________________________? 12. did/ What/ do/ last/ you/ night?/  __________________________________________________________ PART III: USE OF LANGUAGE Choose the word with the different pronunciation of the underlined part. (1,0m) 13. A. Visited B. Wanted C. Needed D. Helped 14. A. Buy B. Try C. Country D. Why 15 A.Exercise B.Learning C.English D Think 16 A.Rest B. Tell B.Before D.Get Choose the best answer. (2m) 17. What was wrong ________you ? A. to B. with C. about D. for 18. Yesterday they had a ________check up. A. medical B. medicines C. medicine D. medically 19. Last week, the dentist _______ a cavity in my tooth. A. repaired B. fixed C. filled D. painted 20. Wash your ________ before meals. A. teeth B. tooth C. foot D. hands 21 . What is your__________ ? – I’m one meter fifty centimeters. A. height B. weight C. age D. school 22 .What are the _________ of the common cold? A. diseases B. symptoms C. medicines D. medical 23 .It ___________hot yesterday . A. are B was C. is D. were 24. Would you __________the door , please ? A. open B. to open C. opening. D. opened Use the Past form of the verbs (1m) 25. What did you (do) ___________ last night? – I watched TV. 26. I (not visit) ________________ her yesterday. 27. Liz (see)____________ sharks, dolphins and turtles at Tri Nguyen aquarium. 28__________you (do)_________your homework yesterday? PART IV: READING Read the text, then do the tasks..

(166) How can we keep our teeth healthy? First, we ought to visit our dentist twice a year. He can fill the small holes in our teeth before they destroy the teeth. Secondly, we should brush our teeth at least twice a day – once after breakfast and once before we go to bed. We can also use wooden toothpicks to clean between our teeth after meals. Thirdly, we should eat food that good for our teeth and our body: milk, fish, potatoes, raw vegetables and fresh fruit. Chocolate, sweets, biscuits are bad especially when we eat them between meals. They are harmful because they stick to our teeth and cause decay. * T ( True) or F ( False): (1m) 29. We ought to visit our dentist twice a year. ___________ 30. We should brush our teeth once a day. ___________ * Fill in the blanks: (1m) 31. The dentist can fill the small _________ in our teeth before they destroy the teeth. 32. We can use ___________________________ to clean between our teeth. 33. Chocolate, sweets, biscuits are _________ for our teeth. 34. Milk, fish, potatoes, raw vegetables __________ fresh fruit are good for our teeth.. Pre: 12/ 02/ 2015 Tea: 13/ 02/ 2015.

(167) Period : 72 TEST CORRECTION A./ OBJECTIVES: I. Knowlege: - Helps Ss to examinize and evaluate their learning - Helps T to consolidate the knowledge in Unit 9,10and 11. II. Skills: Writing, reading, vocab. and grammar practice. III.Teaching aid & Preparation : * Teacher's : Lesson plan; test papers. * Student's : notebooks, books B./ PROCEDURES: I. Settlement: Greets and checks attendance II. Control: - Gives out the testing paper. - Controls the class. III. COLLECTION: - Asks Ss to hand in the tests and evaluates the lesson. - Asks them to revise the knowlege at home for the test correction Code 1. PART I: LISTENING You will listen to the passage about the Robinsons’ vacation three times. Section I: Listen and choose the correct answer.(1,0 m) 1.The Robinsons had a great holiday in................ A. Nha Trang B. Vung Tau C. Ho Chi Minh 2. Liz was ........... as the bus drove through the countryside. A. bored B. excited C. tired 3. Everything looked calm and..................... A. peaceful B. peace C. noisy 4. The bus stopped at a small roadside restaurant at ............o’clock. A. 2 B. 3 C.4 Section II: Listen and tick () True or False .(1,0 m) Statements Tru Fals e e 5.The Robinsons returned to Hanoi by bus. T 9. This was the second time Liz saw the paddies. F 10.They stopped at the restaurant for a long time. F 11.Mr Robinson was asleep. T PART II: USE OF LANGUAGE Choose the word with the different pronunciation of the underlined part. (1,0m) 9. A. Visited B. Wanted C. Needed D. Helped 10. A. Buy B. Try C. Country D. Why 11 A.Exercise B.Learning C.English D Think 12 A.Rest B. Tell B.Before D.Get Choose the best answer. (2m) 13. What was wrong ________you ? A. to B. with C. about D. for.

(168) 14. Yesterday they had a ________check up. A. medical B. medicines C. medicine D. medically 15. Last week, the dentist _______ a cavity in my tooth. A. repaired B. fixed C. filled D. painted 16. Wash your ________ before meals. A. teeth B. tooth C. foot D. hands 17 . What is your__________ ? – I’m one meter fifty centimeters. A. height B. weight C. age D. school 18 .What are the _________ of the common cold? A. diseases B. symptoms C. medicines D. medical 19 .It ___________hot yesterday . A. are B was C. is D. were 20. Would you __________the door , please ? A. open B. to open C. opening. D. opened Use the Past form of the verbs (1m) 21. What did you ___do________ last night? – I watched TV. 22. I _____didn’t visit___________ her yesterday. 23. Liz _____saw___ sharks, dolphins and turtles at Tri Nguyen aquarium. 24_________Did_you- do_________your homework yesterday? PART III: READING Read the text, then do the tasks. How can we keep our teeth healthy? First, we ought to visit our dentist twice a year. He can fill the small holes in our teeth before they destroy the teeth. Secondly, we should brush our teeth at least twice a day – once after breakfast and once before we go to bed. We can also use wooden toothpicks to clean between our teeth after meals. Thirdly, we should eat food that good for our teeth and our body: milk, fish, potatoes, raw vegetables and fresh fruit. Chocolate, sweets, biscuits are bad especially when we eat them between meals. They are harmful because they stick to our teeth and cause decay. * T ( True) or F ( False): (1m) 25. We ought to visit our dentist twice a year. ________T___ 26. We should brush our teeth once a day. _______F_ * Fill in the blanks: (1m) 27. The dentist can fill the small ____holes_____ in our teeth before they destroy the teeth. 28. We can use ______wooden toothpicks _______ to clean between our teeth. 29. Chocolate, sweets, biscuits are ____bad_____ for our teeth. 30. Milk, fish, potatoes, raw vegetables _______and___ fresh fruit are good for our teeth. PART IV. WRITING. Rearrange these words to make sentences. (2m) 31. went/ I/ theatre/ to/ movie/ the/ yesterday./  I went to the theater movie yesterday. 32. tall/ you ?/ How/ are/  How tall are you?.

(169) 33 . does/ Minh/ nervous ?/ feel/ Why/  Why does Minh fell nervous? 34. did/ What/ do/ last/ you/ night?/  What did you do last night? Code 2: PART I: LISTENING You will listen to the passage about the Robinsons’ vacation three times. Section I: Listen and choose the correct answer.(1,0 m) 1.The Robinsons had a great holiday in................ A. Nha Trang B. Vung Tau C. Ho Chi Minh 2. Liz was ........... as the bus drove through the countryside. A. bored B. excited C. tired 3. Everything looked calm and..................... A. peaceful B. peace C. noisy 4. The bus stopped at a small roadside restaurant at ............o’clock. A. 2 B. 3 C.4 Section II: Listen and tick () True or False .(1,0 m) Statements Tru Fals e e 5.The Robinsons returned to Hanoi by bus. T 6.This was the second time Liz saw the paddies. F 7.They stopped at the restaurant for a long time. F 8.Mr Robinson was asleep. T PART II. WRITING. Rearrange these words to make sentences. (2m) 9. went/ I/ theatre/ to/ movie/ the/ yesterday./  I went to the theater movie yesterday. 10. tall/ you ?/ How/ are/   I went to the theater movie yesterday. 11 . does/ Minh/ nervous ?/ feel/ Why/   I went to the theater movie yesterday. 12. did/ What/ do/ last/ you/ night?/   What did you do last night? PART III: USE OF LANGUAGE Choose the word with the different pronunciation of the underlined part. (1,0m) 13. A. Visited B. Wanted C. Needed D. Helped 14. A. Buy B. Try C. Country D. Why 15 A.Exercise B.Learning C.English D Think 16. A.Rest B. Tell B.Before D.Get Choose the best answer. (2m) 17. What was wrong ________you ? A. to B. with C. about D. for 18. Yesterday they had a ________check up. A. medical B. medicines C. medicine D. medically.

(170) 19. Last week, the dentist _______ a cavity in my tooth. A. repaired B. fixed C. filled D. painted 20. Wash your ________ before meals. A. teeth B. tooth C. foot D. hands 21.What is your__________ ? – I’m one meter fifty centimeters. A. height B. weight C. age D. school 22 .What are the _________ of the common cold? A. diseases B. symptoms C. medicines D. medical 23 .It ___________hot yesterday . A. are B was C. is D. were 24. Would you __________the door , please ? A. open B. to open C. opening. D. opened Use the Past form of the verbs (1m) 25. What did you ___do________ last night? – I watched TV. 26. I _____didn’t visit___________ her yesterday. 27. Liz _____saw___ sharks, dolphins and turtles at Tri Nguyen aquarium. 28_________Did_you- do_________your homework yesterday? PART IV: READING Read the text, then do the tasks. How can we keep our teeth healthy? First, we ought to visit our dentist twice a year. He can fill the small holes in our teeth before they destroy the teeth. Secondly, we should brush our teeth at least twice a day – once after breakfast and once before we go to bed. We can also use wooden toothpicks to clean between our teeth after meals. Thirdly, we should eat food that good for our teeth and our body: milk, fish, potatoes, raw vegetables and fresh fruit. Chocolate, sweets, biscuits are bad especially when we eat them between meals. They are harmful because they stick to our teeth and cause decay. * T ( True) or F ( False): (1m) 29. We ought to visit our dentist twice a year. ________T___ 30. We should brush our teeth once a day. _______F_ * Fill in the blanks: (1m) 31. The dentist can fill the small ____holes_____ in our teeth before they destroy the teeth. 32. We can use ______wooden toothpicks _______ to clean between our teeth. 33. Chocolate, sweets, biscuits are ____bad_____ for our teeth. 34. Milk, fish, potatoes, raw vegetables _______and___ fresh fruit are good for our teeth.. C. CONSOLIDATION: Review some knowlrge they learnt D. HOMEWORK: Asks Ss to prepare Unit 12: A1,2 for the next lesson.

(171) Tea: /0 / 2013 Period : 71.

(172) WRITTEN TEST 3 Time : 45 minutes. A . Objectives -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to consolidate the knowledge from unit 9 to unit 11. I.Knowledge. -The present simple. -The "Will" future -The near future The simple past. -the present progressive. -The prepositions II. Skill -Writting skill B. Proceduce. *- Ma trËn: Chủ đề. I.Pronunciatio n. NhËn biÕt TL TN 4 1,0. Th«ng hiÓu TN. TL. 4 2,0 3 1,5. 5. 2,5. 10 2,0. IV. Writing Tæng sè:. 1,0 7 2,5. Tæng sè: 4 1,0. II. Reading III. Language focus. TL. TN. VËn dông. 9 4,5. 10 30. 4 2,0 18 6,0 1,0 26 10. Number 1 I./ Choose the word which has the underlined letter pronounced differenttly from the others (1,0 pt) 1. A. wanted B. lived C. learned D. listened 2. A. helped B. saved C. looked D. dripped 3. A. washes B. cooks C. coughs D. stops 4. A. who B. what C. why D. where II.Choose the best answer (2,5Ms) 1.He played football....................... A. everyday B.now C.lastweek 2.How far is it from the toystore...................... the minimart ? A. from B.to C.in 3.There isn’t.................water. A. any B.an C.Some 4.What .................wrong with him? He had a toothache. A. is B.were C.was 5.There are...................oranges in the fridge..

(173) A. a lot of B.an C.any III.Put the verbs in brackets into corrects forms. ( 1,5Ms) 1.She ..............(have) rice, fish and meat last night. 2.We ( learn)............ English now 3.Next summer holiday, My family.........(go) to Ho Chi Minh city. IV.Put the verbs in the simple past tense. (2,0M) 1.look -..................... 6.cut - .................. 2.make -..................... 7.be -.................. 3.think -..................... 8.clearn -............... 4.do -..................... 9.have -................ 5.help -..................... 10.give -................ V.Read the passage and answer the question below.( 2,0M) Hoa was born in Hue but now, she is living in Ha Noi with her aunt and her uncle. She left Hue two years ago. Now she is studying at Quang Trung school. At school she ate a lot of food and cakes. In the evening Hoa had a stomachache. Her aunt was worried. She called the doctor arrived and gave her somemedicine . She took the medicines and went to bed. Today Hoa is going to shool. 1.Where is she living now? .......................................................... 2.Where is she studying? ……………………………………… 3.What did she eat at school? ........................................................... 4.What was wrong with Hoa? .......................................................... VII Write a passage to tell about someone that you like best.( 1,0M) Number 2 I./ Choose the word which has the underlined letter pronounced differenttly from the others (1,0 pt) 1. A. washes B. cooks C. coughs D. stops 2. A. who B. what C. why D. where 3. A. wanted B. lived C. learned D. listened 4. A. helped B. saved C. looked D. dripped II.Choose the best answer (2,5Ms) 1.There isn’t.................water. A. any B.an C.Some 2.What .................wrong with him? He had a toothache. A. is B.were C.was 3.There are...................oranges in the fridge. A. a lot of B.an C.any 4.He played football....................... A. everyday B.now C.lastweek 5.How far is it from the toystore...................... the minimart ? A. from B.to C.in III.Put the verbs in brackets into corrects forms. ( 1,5Ms) 1.Next summer holiday, My family.........(go) to Ho Chi Minh city. 2.She ..............(have) rice, fish and meat last night. 3.We ( learn)............ English now IV.Put the verbs in the simple past tense. (2,0M) 1.give -..................... 6.think - .................. 2clean -..................... 7.do -.................. 3.cut -..................... 8.make -................

(174) 4.be -..................... 9.help -................ 5.have -..................... 10.look -................ V.Read the passage and answer the question below.( 2,0M) Hoa was born in Hue but now, she is living in Ha Noi with her aunt and her uncle. She left Hue two years ago. Now she is studying at Quang Trung school. At school she ate a lot of food and cakes. In the evening Hoa had a stomachache. Her aunt was worried. She called the doctor arrived and gave her somemedicine . She took the medicines and went to bed. Today Hoa is going to shool. 1.Where is she living now? .......................................................... 2.Where is she studying? ……………………………………… 3.What did she eat at school? ........................................................... 4.What was wrong with Hoa? .......................................................... VII Write a passage to tell about someone that you like best.( 1,0M). WRITTEN TEST3-A Time: 45 minutes. Name: Class:7 I./ Choose the word which has the underlined letter pronounced differenttly from the others (1,0 pt) 1. A. wanted B. lived C. learned D. listened 2. A. helped B. saved C. looked D. dripped 3. A. washes B. cooks C. coughs D. stops 4. A. who B. what C. why D. where II.Choose the best answer (2,5Ms) 1.He played football....................... A. everyday B.now C.lastweek 2.How far is it from the toystore...................... the minimart ? A. from B.to C.in 3.There isn’t.................water. A. any B.an C.Some 4.What .................wrong with him? He had a toothache. A. is B.were C.was 5.There are...................oranges in the fridge. A. a lot of B.an C.any III.Put the verbs in brackets into corrects forms. ( 1,5Ms) 1.She ..............(have) rice, fish and meat last night. 2.We ( learn)............ English now 3.Next summer holiday, My family.........(go) to Ho Chi Minh city. IV.Put the verbs in the simple past tense. (2,0M) 1.look -..................... 6.cut - ...................

(175) 2.make -..................... 7.be -.................. 3.think -..................... 8.clearn -............... 4.do -..................... 9.have -................ 5.help -..................... 10.give -................ V.Read the passage and answer the question below.( 2,0M) Hoa was born in Hue but now, she is living in Ha Noi with her aunt and her uncle. She left Hue two years ago. Now she is studying at Quang Trung school. At school she ate a lot of food and cakes. In the evening Hoa had a stomachache. Her aunt was worried. She called the doctor arrived and gave her somemedicine . She took the medicines and went to bed. Today Hoa is going to shool. 1.Where is she living now? .......................................................... 2.Where is she studying? ……………………………………… 3.What did she eat at school? ........................................................... 4.What was wrong with Hoa? .......................................................... VI Write a passage to tell about someone that you like best.( 1,0M) ……………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………….

(176) WRITTEN TEST3-B Time: 45 minutes. Name: Class:7 I./ Choose the word which has the underlined letter pronounced differenttly from the others (1,0 pt) 1. A. washes B. cooks C. coughs D. stops 2. A. who B. what C. why D. where 3. A. wanted B. lived C. learned D. listened 4. A. helped B. saved C. looked D. dripped II.Choose the best answer (2,5Ms) 1.There isn’t.................water. A. any B.an C.Some 2.What .................wrong with him? He had a toothache. A. is B.were C.was 3.There are...................oranges in the fridge. A. a lot of B.an C.any 4.He played football....................... A. everyday B.now C.lastweek 5.How far is it from the toystore...................... the minimart ? A. from B.to C.in III.Put the verbs in brackets into corrects forms. ( 1,5Ms) 1.Next summer holiday, My family.........(go) to Ho Chi Minh city. 2.She ..............(have) rice, fish and meat last night. 3.We ( learn)............ English now IV.Put the verbs in the simple past tense. (2,0M) 1.give -..................... 6.think - .................. 2clean -..................... 7.do -.................. 3.cut -..................... 8.make -............... 4.be -..................... 9.help -................ 5.have -..................... 10.look -................ V.Read the passage and answer the question below.( 2,0M) Hoa was born in Hue but now, she is living in Ha Noi with her aunt and her uncle. She left Hue two years ago. Now she is studying at Quang Trung school. At school she ate a lot of food and cakes. In the evening Hoa had a stomachache. Her aunt was worried. She called the doctor arrived and gave her somemedicine . She took the medicines and went to bed. Today Hoa is going to shool. 1.Where is Hoa studying? .......................................................... 2.Where is she living now? ……………………………………… 3.What was wrong with Hoa? ........................................................... 4.What did she eat at school? .......................................................... VI Write a passage to tell about someone that you like best.( 1,5M).

(177) ……………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………. Answer WRITTEN TEST3-A I.(1,0ms) 1.A 2.B 3.A 4.A II. 1.C 2.B 3.A 4.A 5.A III.(1,5ms) 1.had 2.is learning.

(178) 3.will go IV.(1,0ms) 1.looked 2.made 3.thought 4.did 5.helped 6.cut 7.was/were 8.cleaned 9.had 10.gave V.(1,5ms) 1.living 2.studying 3.ate 4.called 5.medicine. VI.(1,5ms) 1.She is living in Ha Noi 2.She ate a lot of food and cakes 3. Hoa had a stomachache. VII.(1,0ms) -Depend on the students’ wringting.. Tea: /0 / 2013 Period: 72. Test remark. A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to consolidate the knowledge from the text. I.Knowledge. -The present simple. -The "Will" future -The prepositions -The simple past. II. Skill -Writting skill B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision. Teacher’s activities Students’activitie s answer key I./ Choose the word which has the underlined letter -Ss give the pronounced differenttly from the others (1,0 pt) asnwer and takes 1. A. wanted B. lived C. learned D. listened notes the correct of teacher 2. A. helped B. saved C. looked D. -copy the answer dripped I. 3. A. washes B. cooks C. coughs D. 1.A.

(179) stops 4. A. who B. what C. why D. where II.Choose the best answer (2,5Ms) 1.He played football....................... A. everyday B.now C.lastweek 2.How far is it from the toystore...................... the minimart ? A. from B.to C.in 3.There isn’t.................water. A. any B.an C.Some 4.What .................wrong with him? He had a toothache. A. is B.were C.was 5.There are...................oranges in the fridge. A. a lot of B.an C.any III.Put the verbs in brackets into corrects forms. ( 1,5Ms) 1.She ..............(have) rice, fish and meat last night. 2.We ( learn)............ English now 3.Next summer holiday, My family.........(go) to Ho Chi Minh city. IV.Put the verbs in the simple past tense. (2,0M) 1.look -..................... 6.cut - .................. 2.make -..................... 7.be -.................. 3.think -..................... 8.clean -............... 4.do -..................... 9.have -................ 5.help -..................... 10.give -................ V.Read the passage and answer the question below.( 2,0M) Hoa was born in Hue but now, she is living in Ha Noi with her aunt and her uncle. She left Hue two years ago. Now she is studying at Quang Trung school. At school she ate a lot of food and cakes. In the evening Hoa had a stomachache. Her aunt was worried. She called the doctor arrived and gave her somemedicine . She took the medicines and went to bed. Today Hoa is going to shool. 1.Where is she living now? .......................................................... 2.Where is she studying? ……………………………………… 3.What did she eat at school? ........................................................... 4.What was wrong with Hoa? .......................................................... VII Write a passage to tell about someone that you like best. ( 1,0M). IV. Consolidation. -T calls some Ss to give the main grammar in this text. V.Homework. -Doing exercise : doing again the text at home. -Preparing: Unit 12 :A1-2. 2.B 3.A 4.A II. 1.C 2.B 3.A 4.A 5.A III. 1.had 2.is learning 3.will go IV. 1.looked 2.made 3.thought 4.did 5.helped 6.cut 7.was/were 8.cleaned 9.had 10.gave V. 1.She is living in Ha Noi 2.she is studying at Quang Trung school. 3.She ate a lot of food and cakes 4. Hoa had a stomachache. VI. -Depend on the students’ wringting..

(180) Pre: 25/02/2015 Tea: 26/02/ 2015 Period: 73 Unit 12 : LET’S EAT ! Lesson 1: WHAT SHALL WE EAT ? <A1-2> A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to use "too/so" to talk about preferences. I.Knowledge. - Using "too/so" to talk about preferences. II. Skill - Reading and speaking skill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision -"Jumbled words"(3MS) tmea =? ( Answer key: meat,beef,chicken,vegetable,carrot,pea) feeb =? nkechic =? rcarot =? ape =? III.New lesson Teacher’s activities Students’activities 1. Presentation.(15ms) a.Pre teach. -pork -spinach -cucumber -papaya -pineapple -durian - Introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using - Repeating the words in chorus & in individual & the situation & gives example. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). Then helps Correcting the mistakes - Giving the meaning & Ss to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the the pronunciation. - Copying the words. mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. b.Check vocab. "Matching" (Using pictures) c.Presentation dialogue..

(181) - A1 P.114-115 - Practicing the dialogue - Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the dialogue & in pairs practice the dialogue in pairs. -Correcting the - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. pronunciation. - Introduces the model sentence & explains the form & Model sentences: use of the past simple tense. S1: I like beef. S2: I like,too < So do I > 2. Practice.(17ms) - Repeating in chorus & "Word cue drill" in individual. a) spinach/ Tom - Making sentences for b) pork/ She the next cues. c) pineapple/ He - Practicing in groups & d) durian/ Mary in pairs . e) chicken/ They Correcting the - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to pronunciation. practice. - Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to repeat Example exchange: S1: I like spinach. in chorus & in individual. S2: Tom likes - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in groups & spinach,too/So does Tom. .............etc. in pairs & Corrects. 3.Production.(8ms) "Noughts and Crosses" I/eat/fish She/like/banana Tom/hate/fish (Mary) (we) (You) He/like/coffee (Lan). I/eat/bread (Mai). we/love/apple (Hoa). They/eat/meat (We). Mai/drink/coffee (Nga). My house/big (An). -T controls and corrects. IV.Consolidation :(1m) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(1m) Learning by heart all content. Doing exercises in workbook. And preparing new lesson: Unit 12: A3a,4. Unit 12 : LET’S EAT ! Lesson 2: WHAT SHALL WE EAT ? <A1-2 (cont)> Period: 74 A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to use "either/neither" to express preferences. I.Knowledge. - Using"either/neither" to express preferences. II. Skill - Reading and speaking skill. B. Proceduce..

(182) I.Greeting II- Revision -"Matching"(3ms) Matching a part of words in column A with a part words in column B to make a right word. A B be apple pine ana chic ef (beef) ban rian du ken ri range ox rot car ce III.New lesson Teacher’s activities Students’activities 1. Presentation.(15ms) a.Presentation dialogue. A1 (P. 114-115) - Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the - Practicing the dialogue in pairs dialogue & practice the dialogue in - Role-playing the dialogue. -Correcting the pronunciation. pairs. - Asks Ss to role-play the dialogue. - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. - Introduces the model sentence & Model sentence: explains the form & use of the past S1: I don’t like beef. simple tense. S2: I don’t like beef, either. Neither do I. 2. Practice.(18ms) "Word cue drill" f) a) spinach/ Tom g) pork/ She h) pineapple/ He i) durian/ Mary j) chicken/ They - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to practice. - Reads the first model for example & asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in groups & in pairs & Corrects. Example exchange: S1: I don’t like papaya. S2: I don’t like papaya ,either./Neither do I. ................etc. 3. Production.(7ms) Make sentences with “Either & neither”. - Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to work in individual to make sentences with “Either & neither”. - Asks Ss to compare & give the answers. - Corrects & comments.. - Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs . - Correcting the pronunciation. Example exchange:. S1: I don’t like papaya. S2: I don’t like papaya, either. Neither do I.. - Working in individual to make sentences with “Either & neither”. - Comparing & giving the answers. - Correcting the answers..

(183) Cues: a. I eat a little in the morning. Answer keys: a. They eat either. ( they ) b. I don’t like either. / Neither do I. b. They don’t like pork. ( I ). c. My sister eats either. c. I eat bread for breakfast. ( my d. They don’t have either. / Neither sister ) do they. d. He doesn’t have big lunch. e. Those fruits aren’t either. / Neither ( they ) those fruits . e. These vegetable aren’t fresh. f. Our cousins love either. (those fruit ) f. We love apple juice. (our Fresh fruit are either cousins ) g. Beans are very good for our health. ( fresh fruit ) T corrects. IV.Consolidation :(1m) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(1m) Learning by heart all content. Doing exercises in workbook. Preparing new lesson: Unit 12: A 3-4 VI.Can improved ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................................ .....................................................................................................................THE END.

(184) Period: 74 Unit 12 : LET’S EAT ! Lesson 3: WHAT SHALL WE EAT ? <A3-4> A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the details about how did Hoa’s aunt cook dinner. I.Knowledge. - How did Hoa’s aunt cook dinner. II. Skill - Reading skill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision -"Chain game"(3ms) S1: Yesterday I ate bread for lunch. S2: Yesterday I ate bread, fish for lunch. S3: Yesterday I ate bread, fish, spinach for lunch. S4:...............etc. III.New lesson Teacher’s activities Students’activities 1. Pre-reading.(15ms) a.Pre teach. -(to) slice -(to) stir-fry -(to) add -(to) boild -(to) heat -soy sauce - Introduces the words by explaining the - Listening to the words. - Repeating the words in chorus & in meaning, using the situation. - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). individual. - Correcting the mistakes. Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Checks S’s reading in individual & -Giving the meaning & the pronunciation. corrects the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the - Copying the words. meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. b.Check vocab. "Matching" (Using pictures B3 P.116-text book ) - Ss predict the right order of the c.Ordering picture. -T asks Ss to predict the right order of the pictures P.117. (text book ). pictures P.117. (text book ). - Introduces the requirement & ask Ss to work in pairs to predict the steps Hoa’s.

(185) aunt does to cook dinner. - Asks Ss to compare the keys give the keys - Comments. d. Presentation text: A3 – P116 - Introduces & Helps Ss to read the text. - Asks Ss to read the text in individual & check their prediction. - Asks Ss to correct the prediction. 2. While-reading.(18ms) Activity 1: -T asks Ss to read the text and check their prediction.. - Reading the text in individual & check their prediction. - Correcting the keys.. Ss read the text and check their prediction. *Answer key: 1. c 2. e 3. d 4. g 5. a 6. b 7. f -. - Working in pairs to ask & answer the questions then make the menu for what Hoa’s uncle family have for dinner. - Giving the answer keys. - Correcting the answer keys &Commenting Answer: - Rice - Boiled spinach * Questions: -Cucumber salad with onion a. What did Hoa, her uant & uncle have - Stir-fried beef with green foe dinner ? Write the menu. peppers & onion. Activity 2: T asks Ss to read the text again and do A3 P.116 -text book. - Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work in pairs to ask & answer the questions then make the menu for what Hoa’s uncle family had for dinner. - Asks Ss to give the answer keys. - Helps Ss to correct & comments.. -. 3. Post-reading.(7ms) B2 P.77 (workbook) T controls and corrects .. -Ss work individually - in pairs - in groups.. IV.Consolidation :(1m) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(1m) Learning by heart all content. Doing exercises in workbook. Preparing new lesson: Unit 12: B1. Pre: 26/02/2015 Tea: 27/02/ 2015 Period: 74 Unit 12 : LET’S EAT ! Lesson 3: WHAT SHALL WE EAT ? <A3a-4> A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the details about how did Hoa’s aunt cook dinner. I.Knowledge. - How did Hoa’s aunt cook dinner. II. Skill.

(186) - Reading skill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision -"Chain game"(3ms) S1: Yesterday I ate bread for lunch. S2: Yesterday I ate bread, fish for lunch. S3: Yesterday I ate bread, fish, spinach for lunch. S4:...............etc. III.New lesson Teacher’s activities Students’activities 1.Pre-reading.(15ms) a.Pre teach. -(to) slice -(to) stir-fry -(to) add -(to) boild -(to) heat -soy sauce - Introduces the words by explaining the - Listening to the words. meaning, using the situation. - Repeating the words in chorus & in - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). individual. Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Correcting the mistakes. - Checks S’s reading in individual & - Giving the meaning & the corrects the mistakes. pronunciation. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the - Copying the words. meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. b.Check vocab. "Matching" (Using pictures B3 P.116-text book ) c. Presentation text: A3 – P116 - Introduces & Helps Ss to read the text. - Asks Ss to read the text in individual & check their prediction. - Asks Ss to correct the prediction. 2.While-reading.(18ms) Activity 1: - Reading the text in individual & -T asks Ss to read the text and check their check their prediction. prediction. - Correcting the keys. Activity 2: T asks Ss to read the text again and do A3 P.116 -text book. - Introduces the questions & asks Ss to Ss read the text and check their work in pairs to ask & answer the prediction. questions then make the menu for what Hoa’s uncle family had for dinner. - Working in pairs to ask & answer the - Asks Ss to give the answer keys. questions then make the menu for - Helps Ss to correct & comments. what Hoa’s uncle family have for dinner. - Giving the answer keys. * Question: a. What did Hoa, her uant & uncle have - Correcting the answer keys &Commenting foe dinner ? Write the menu. Answer: - Rice 3.Post-reading.(7ms) - Boiled spinach B2 P.77 (workbook) -Cucumber salad with onion T controls and corrects ..

(187) - Stir-fried beef with green peppers & onion. -Ss work individually - in pairs - in groups. IV.Consolidation :(1m) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(1m) Learning by heart all content. Doing exercises in workbook. Preparing new lesson: Unit 12: B1. Pre: / /2015 Tea: / / 2015 Period: 75. Unit 12 : LET’S EAT ! Lesson 4: OUR FOOD <B1>. A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to talk about health. I.Knowledge. The simple past tense. Food and vegetables vocabulary. II. Skill - Reading and speaking skill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision -"Braistorming"(3ms) spinach fish Food vegetables ............. III.New lesson Teacher’s activities Students’activities 1. Pre-reading.(10ms) a.Pre teach. - Listening to the words. -dirt - Repeating the words in chorus & in -sick individual. -medicine - Correcting the mistakes. -soup - Giving the meaning & the b.Check vocab. pronunciation. "What and Where" - Copying the words. c.Open prediction. T gives a question to asks Ss to predict - Working in pairs to predict what Ba ate What did Ba ate Yesterday? yesterday. ......

(188) bread 2. While-reading.(10ms) Activity 1: -T asks Ss to read the text and check their prediction. Activity 2: ""Wh-questions" 1. What’s matter with Ba ? 2. Are his parents O.K ? 3. Did his Mom eat spinach ? 4. Dis his Mom wash the spinach well ? 5. Why must we wash the spinach well ? _- T gives a game " Hang man " to ask Ss to practice. 3.Retell the story. - Ask ss to retell the story -T remarks.. - Comparing & Giving the keys. - Working in pairs to ask & answering the questions. - Giving the answer by asking & answering in pairs. - Correcting the answers. Answer keys: 1.He had an awful stomachache. 2.Yes, they are fine. 3.No, she didn’t. 4.No, she didn’t wash it. 5.It often have dirt from the farm. - Working in individual then in pairs & in groups to predict what Lan, Ba, Hoa, Nga ate & drank. - Comparing & give their prediction. -Ss work individually - in pairs - in groups.. . IV.Consolidation :(1m) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(1m) Learning by heart all content. Doing exercises in workbook. Preparing new lesson: Unit 12: B2. Pre: / /2015.

(189) Tea: / / 2015 Period: 76. Unit 12 : LET’S EAT ! Lesson 5: OUR FOOD <B2>. A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the details about diet and practice writing a menu for meals. I.Knowledge. Practising writing a menu for meals. II. Skill - Reading skill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision -"Braistorming"(3ms) What do you eat for breakfast, lunch, dinner ? fish breakfast lunch dinner bread meat III.New lesson Teacher’s activities Students’activities 1. Pre-reading.(15ms) a.Pre teach. -energy -a balanced diet -moderate amount -body-building food -dairy product -fatty food - Introduces the words by explaining the - Listening to the words. meaning, using the situation. - Repeating the words in chorus & in - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). individual. Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Correcting the mistakes. - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects - Giving the meaning & the the mistakes. pronunciation. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the - Copying the words. meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. b.Check vocab. "Slap the board" c.T/F statement prediction. -Ss read and predict the sentences. a) Sugar isn’t an healthy food. b) We eat moderate amount of fatty food and suger. c) Meat and dairy products are not body building foods. d) Eat plenty of cereals fruit and vegetables. e) Eat too much food you enjoy. d.Presentation text: B2 – P120 - Introduces & Helps Ss to read the dialogue. - Reading the dialogue in individual - Asks Ss to read the dialogue in individual & check their prediction. & check their prediction & correct the - Correcting the keys. prediction. - Corrects & comments. 2. While-reading.(18ms).

(190) Activity 1: -T asks Ss to read the text and check the prediction.. Activity 2: -T asks Ss to read the text again and answer the questions: a, b, c P.120 B2-text book. - Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work in pairs to ask & answer the questions. - Asks Ss to give the answer by asking & answering in pairs. - Corrects & comments. Questions: 1. Name two advantages of eating sugar ? 2. Is a balanced diet alone enough for a healthy lifestyle ? 3. Do you think your diet is balanced ? Why ? Why not ?. -Ss read the text and corect. *Answer key: a) T b) T c) F d) T e) F - Working in pairs to ask & answering the questions. - Giving the answer by asking & answering in pairs. - Correcting the answers. * Answer keys: 1.It adds taste to food & gives energy. 2.No, it isn’t. Because all people need exercise to keep the life healthy. 3.No, she didn’t. I think my diet is balanced / not balanced because.. 3. Post-reading.(7ms) Ask Ss write the new menu,ask them to compare it with the menu they write at the beginning of the lesson and decide what - Working in groups to discuss. they should eat for eat meal. - Reporting the ideals. - T controls and corrects. IV.Consolidation :(1m) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(1m): Doing exercises in workbook-.Preparing new lesson: B4..

(191) Teaching’s day: 7A:. Unit 12 : LET’S EAT ! Lesson 5: OUR FOOD <B2-3> Period: 77 A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the details about diet and practice writing a menu for meals. I.Knowledge. Practising writing a menu for meals. II. Skill - Reading skill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision -"Braistorming"(3ms) What do you eat for breakfast, lunch, dinner ? fish breakfast lunch dinner bread meat III.New lesson Teacher’s activities Students’activities 3. Pre-reading.(15ms) a.Pre teach. -energy -a balanced diet -moderate amount -body-building food -dairy product -fatty food - Introduces the words by explaining the - Listening to the words. meaning, using the situation. - Repeating the words in chorus & in - Reads the words for the modal (3 times ). individual. Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ). - Correcting the mistakes. - Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects - Giving the meaning & the.

(192) the mistakes. - Writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. b.Check vocab. "Slap the board" c.T/F statement prediction. f) Sugar isn’t an healthy food. g) We eat moderate amount of fatty food and suger. h) Meat and dairy products are not body building foods. i) Eat plenty of cereals fruit and vegetables. j) Eat too much food you enjoy. d.Presentation text: B2 – P120 - Introduces & Helps Ss to read the dialogue. - Asks Ss to read the dialogue in individual & check their prediction & correct the prediction. - Corrects & comments. 4. While-reading.(18ms) Activity 1: -T asks Ss to read the text and check the prediction.. Activity 2: -T asks Ss to read the text again and answer the questions: a, b, c P.120 B2-text book. - Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work in pairs to ask & answer the questions. - Asks Ss to give the answer by asking & answering in pairs. - Corrects & comments. Questions: 4. Name two advantages of eating sugar ? 5. Is a balanced diet alone enough for a healthy lifestyle ? 6. Do you think your diet is balanced ? Why ? Why not ?. pronunciation. - Copying the words.. -Ss read and predict the sentences.. - Reading the dialogue in individual & check their prediction. - Correcting the keys.. -Ss read the text and corect. *Answer key: a) T b) T c) F d) T e) F - Working in pairs to ask & answering the questions. - Giving the answer by asking & answering in pairs. - Correcting the answers. * Answer keys: 1.It adds taste to food & gives energy. 2.No, it isn’t. Because all people need exercise to keep the life healthy. 3.No, she didn’t. I think my diet is balanced / not balanced because.. 4. Post-reading.(7ms) B3 -P.120 -text book. (After Ss write the new menu,ask them to - Working in groups to discuss. compare it with the menu they write at the - Reporting the ideals. beginning of the lesson and decide what they should eat for eat meal.) - T controls and corrects. IV.Consolidation :(1m) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(1m) Learning by heart all content. Doing exercises in workbook. Preparing new lesson: Language focus 4..

(193) Pre: / /2015 Tea: / / 2015 Period: 77. Unit 12 : LET’S EAT ! Lesson 4: OUR FOOD <B4>. A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to talk about health. I.Knowledge. The simple past tense. Food and vegetables vocabulary. II. Skill - Reading and speaking skill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting -.

(194) II- Revision -"Brainstorming"(5ms). eating a moderate amount.... a balanced diet. III.New lesson. IV.Consolidation :(3m) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(2m) Learning by heart all content. Doing exercises in workbook. Preparing new lesson: Language focus 4..

(195) Pre: / /2015 Tea: / / 2015 Period: 78 LANGUAGE FOCUS 4 A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to remind all knowledge from unit 9 to unit 12. I.Knowledge. - The simple past tense - Indefinite quantifiers - Too and either/ So and neither II. Skill - Reading and speaking skill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision III.New lesson Teacher’s activities Students’activities 1. The simple past tense.(20ms) -T asks ss to give the example , structure, use. - Practicing in pairs & in pairs by asking Ex: & answering the questions with “NO”. I ate pork last night - Giving the answers. She went to school last week. -Correcting the pronunciation. T asks ss to do exercise 1 . *Answer key: .No,I didn’t. I went to thr movie theater. .No,I didn’t .I read book. -T corrects. 2. Indefinite quantifiers(10ms) - Working in individual to use “A T asks Ss how to use. LITTLE – A LOT OF / LOTS OF – a little TOO MUCH” to fill in the dialogue. a lot of/ lots of too much - Comparing & giving the keys. T gives exercise 2 and ask ss to do. (P.124) - Working in pairs to practice the dialogue..

(196) 3. too and either.(5ms) - Correcting the pronunciation. -T asks Ss to give the way to use them. Ex: S1: i like pork - Repeating in chorus & in individual. S2: I don’t like cat, either. - Making sentences for the next cues. .........etc. - Practicing in groups & in pairs . 4. so and neither.(5ms) - Correcting the pronunciation. -T asks Ss to give the way to use them. Ex: S1: I like cat,so does she. - Repeating in chorus & in individual. S2: I don’t like cat, neither does she. - Making sentences for the next cues. .........etc. - Practicing in groups & in pairs . -T gives exercise 5 P.127-128 - Correcting the pronunciation. -T controls and corrects. IV.Consolidation :(3ms) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(2ms) Learning by heart all content. Doing exercises in workbook. Preparing new lesson: Unit 13:A1-2. Pre: /03/2015 Tea: /03/ 2015 Period: 79. Unit 13 : ACTIVITIES Lesson 1: SPORTS <A1-2>. A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the details and the main ideas about the most popular sports in the USA. I.Knowledge. - The most popular sports in the USA. II. Skill.

(197) - Reading skill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision -"Brainstorming"(3ms) football Sports III.New lesson Teacher’s activities 1. Pre-reading.(15ms) a.Pre teach. T elicits to teach vocabulary. - skate-boarding (n): môn trượt ván - roller- skating: trượt ba-tin( giày có bánh xe dọc ở đế giày) - basketball: môn bóng rổ - rollerblading: trượt ba tanh (giày có bánh xe ở 4 góc - athletics : (n) điền kinh - T introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation & gives example. - T models (3 times) and helps Ss to repeat (2 times). - T checks S’s reading in individual and corrects the mistakes. - T writes the words on the Bb and checks the meaning, the pronunciation. - T corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. b.Check vocab. "Matching" (Using pictures) c.Open prediction. -T asks Ss to predict what sports is the first choice and what sports is the tenth choice of teenagers in the USA. -T ticks the poster on the board.. Students’activities. - Ss repeat the words in chorus & in individual and correct the mistakes - Ss give the meaning & the pronunciation - Ss copy the words.. -Ss predict. SPORTS A.football B.volleyball C.skateboarding D.tennis E.baseball F.swimming G.badminton H.roller-skating. POSITION.

(198) 2. While-reading.(18ms) Activity 1: T asks ss to read A1 P.129 -text book and check their prediction. Activity 2: T asks ss to read A1 again and work in pairs to ask the questions: ?What sport is the third choice - the nineth choice? 3. Post-reading.(5ms) -T asks Ss work individually - in pairs in groups to list the most popular sports in Viet nam. -T controls and corrects.. K.basketball I.rolleblading - Ss read A1 (P129- textbook) and check their prediction. *Answer key: baseball: first swiming: tenth Example exchange: S1: What sport is the third choice? S2: Roller-skating is the third choice. ......etc. - Ss work individually -> in pairs-> in groups to list the most popular sports in Viet Nam. IV.Consolidation :(1m) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(1m) Learning by heart all content. Doing exercises in workbook. Preparing new lesson: Unit 13: A3,5. Pre: Tea:. /03/2015 /03/ 2015. Period: 80 Unit 13 : ACTIVITIES Lesson 2: SPORTS <A3,5> A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to talk about sporting activities.. I.Knowledge. - Sporting activities. II. Skill - Reading and speaking skill. B. Proceduce..

(199) I.Greeting II- Revision -"Guessing game" (3ms) I play tennis. Ex: S1: Do you play soccer? S2: No, I don’t. S1: Do you play tennis? S2: Yes, I do. ...etc. III.New lesson Teacher’s activities 1. Presentation.(15ms) a.Pre teach. - skillful (adj): điêu luyện, có kỉ thuật - slow (adj): chậm - quick (adj): nhanh - safe (adj): an toàn - careful (adj): cẩn thận - careless (adj): cẩu thả - (to) cycle : quay vòng, đạp xe đạp - T introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation & gives example. - T models (3 times) and helps Ss to repeat (2 times). - T checks S’s reading in individual and corrects the mistakes. - T writes the words on the Bb and checks the meaning, the pronunciation. - T corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. - T helps Ss to practice the vocabulary b.Check vocab. "What and Where" c.Presentation text. A3 P.131 (text book ) - T asks Ss to look at the picture of Kim Hue and answer the questions: ? Who is Kim Hue? ? How does she play? -. Students’activities. - Ss repeat the words in chorus & in individual and correct the mistakes - Ss give the meaning & the pronunciation - Ss copy the words.. - Ss look at the picture of Kim Hue and answer the questions: * Model sentences: - She is a good volleyball player. - Ss: She plays well * Formation: S+ be + (a/an) + adj + N S + Verb(s/es) + adv * Concept checking:. -T asks Ss to give their keys on the Bb. Adjectives come before a noun..

(200) ? What comes before the noun “Volleyball player”? ? Is it an adjective? ? What come after subject? ? Is it ordinary verb? ? What come after the ordinal verb?. -. -. Adverbs come after the ordinary verb. - Ss repeat in choral. - Ss present the question and answer. - Ss work in pairs -> open pairs Example exchange: She is a slow simmer. She swims slowly. ....etc.. 2. Practice.(18ms) Picture drill. 1) good/well 2) slow/slowly 3) quick/quickly 4) bad/badly. 3. Production.(7ms) Activity 1: A5 p.132-133 -text book. Activity 2: T asks Ss to read the text A5 P.132-133 and list some of the advice every kid should clearly remember when he/she swims in the swimming pool. -T controls and corrects.. -Ss read the text A5 P.132-133 and list some of the advice every kid should clearly remember when he/she swims in the swimming pool.. IV.Consolidation :(1m) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(1m) Learning by heart all content. Doing exercises in workbook. Preparing new lesson: Unit 13: A4. Pre: Tea:. /03/2015 /03/ 2015. Period: 81. Unit 13 : ACTIVITIES Lesson 3: SPORTS <A4> A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the details about walking-one of the sports activities. I.Knowledge. - Walking-one of the sports activities II. Skill - Reading skill B. Proceduce. I.Greeting -.

(201) II- Revision -A1 P.82 (work book) (3ms) - Students write adverbs corresponding to the adjectives - bad -> - slow -> - quick -> - safe -> - skillful -> - sudden -> - dangerous -> III.New lesson Teacher’s activities 1. Pre -reading.(15ms) a.Pre teach. - (to) take part in : tham gia - (to) organize: tổ chức - (to) volunteer: xung phong - volunteer (n) người xung phong - participant (n): người tham gia - prize (n) : giải thưởng - competition (n): cuộc tranh tài - T introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation and gives example. - T models (3 times) and helps Ss to repeat (2 times). - T checks S’s reading in individual and corrects the mistakes. - T writes the words on the Bb and checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - T corrects & asks Ss to copy the words b.Check vocab. R.O.R c.Open prediction. -T asks Ss to predict two activities of the club chieldren take part in. ? Close your book. - T writes the questions the Bb and asks Ss to predict. - T asks Ss to work in groups of 5 or 6 2. While -reading.(20ms) Activity 1: -T asks Ss to read the text and check their prediction. *Answer key: 1) WFF: walking for fun.. Students’activities. - Ss repeat the words in chorus and in individual and correct the mistakes - Ss give the meaning & the pronunciation - Ss copy the words.. - Ss predict the answer of the question. - Ss work in groups of 5 or 6. - Ss read the text (A4-P132) and check their prediction. * Answers keys: a. Walking. b. WFF is walking for fun WTS is walk-to school day.

(202) 2) WTS day: walk to school - Ss read the text again and answer the day. questions. Activity 2: - Ss work in groups of 4 (one table) -T asks Ss to read the text again and key: answer the questions a-f ( question c has a. The writer takes part in Walking For been answerd in the pre stage). Fun club/ walking -T gives a game "Hang man" to asks Ss b. Because last years, they won the 1st to practice. prize in a district walking competition; they were so happy and wished / wanted to keep this activity. c. One activity is a 5 km walk/ walking 5km to the beach on Sunday morning; and the other is walk- to- school day. d. It’s 5 km from school to the beach e. Wednesday is the WTS day. f. Members living near school often take part in the WTS day. 3.Post- reading.(5ms) -T asks Ss to practice in groups to dicuss - Ss work in groups of 5 or 6 to discuss the question" What sports activities do the question. you like best ? Why?". - T controls and corrects. IV.Consolidation :(1m) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(1m) Learning by heart all content. Doing exercises in workbook. Preparing new lesson: Unit 13: B1-2.

(203) Pre: 15/03/2015 Tea: 16/03/ 2015 Period: 82 Unit 13 : ACTIVITIES Lesson 4: COME AND PLAY <B1-2> A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to give advice and futher practice with making an invitation. I.Knowledge. - Using model verbs "can, must, should, ought to" - Giving advice and futher practice with making an invitation. II. Skill - Reading and speaking skill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision -"Slap the board"(3ms) (using pictures P.134-135 -text book) play tennis play badminton play volleyball play chess Write the words on the board. Call 2 teams of students (6 students each team) to in front if class. Make sure they stand at an equal distance from the board. Teacher calls out one word in Vietnamese, the two Ss must run forward and slap the word on the Bb. The one who slaps the correct word first is winner..

(204) -. Continue to ask two more Ss to come forward... until all the words are slapped. IIlI.New lesson Teacher’s activities I.Presentation(15ms) 1. Vocabulary: - ought to = should (modal verb): nên - must = have to (modal verb): phải - paddle (n): cây vợt bãng bàn - T introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation & gives example. - T models and helps Ss to repeat. - T checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - T writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - T corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. - T helps Ss to practice the vocabulary 2.Presentation text. - B1 P.134 . Comprehension questions a d (P.134text book) T gives a game "Shark attack" to practice. Model sentences: You ought to finish it before I play table tennis. You must do your homework first. Structure: S + ought to/must/should/can + V(inf) + O. II.Practice.(18ms) "Word cue drill" 1) Lan/toothache - She/ought to/see doctor. 2) Nam/somehomework He/must/do/homework. 3) Minh/late/school - He/should/get up/early. 4) Ba/eat/too much/meat - He/ought to/eat/more/vegetables. III.Production.(7ms) B2 P.135 (text book) T asks Ss to work individually to change the underlined and then practice with a partner.. Students’activities. - Ss repeat the words in chorus and in individual and correct the mistakes - Ss give the meaning and the pronunciation - Ss copy the words.. - Ss listen and read the dialogue at the same time. - Ss work in pairs, practice the dialogue -Form Modal verbs + infinitive. - Ss repeat in choral. - Ss present the question and answer. - Ss work in pairs -> open pairs Example exchange: Lan has toothache. She ought to see a doctor. ..........etc. - Ss open the books (P135). - Ss change the underlined details - Ss work in pairs -> open pairs. * Basketball Ba: Come and play basketball, Nam? Nam: I’m sorry. I don’t think I can..

(205) T controls and corrects .. Ba: That’s too bad. Why not? Nam: well, I should clean my room. Ba: Can you play on Friday? Nam: yes, I can. Ba: All right. See you at seven Nam: OK. Bye. Ba: Bye.. IV.Consolidation :(1m) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(1m) Learning by heart all content. Doing exercises in workbook. Preparing new lesson: Unit 13: B3. Pre: 18/03/2015 Tea: 19/03/ 2015 Period: 83 Unit 13 : ACTIVITIES Lesson 5: COME AND PLAY <B3> A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the details about another kind of sports--scuba -diving and futher practice with model verb "can/could". I.Knowledge. - Another kind of sports--scuba -diving -Practicing with model verb "can/could". II. Skill - Reading skill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision -"Matching"(3ms) 1.besaball 2.skateboarding 3.roller-skating 4.basketball 5.volleyball 6.badminton III.New lesson Teacher’s activities Students’activities 1. Pre-reading.(15ms) a.Pre teach. - (to ) stay underwater: đứng dới nớc - (to) invent: ph¸t minh, s¸ng chÕ - invention (n) sù ph¸t minh - (to) explore: th¸m hiÓm - scuba- diving : lÆn cã sö dông b×nh dìng khÝ - Ss repeat the words in chorus & in - diver (n): thî lÆn individual and correct the mistakes - ocean(n): đại dơng - Ss give the meaning & the.

(206) - T introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation & gives example. - T models (3 times) and helps Ss to repeat (2 times). - T checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - T writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - T corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. - T helps Ss to practice the vocabularyb.Check vocab. "What and Where" c.T/F prediction. - B3 P.137 (text book) 2. While -reading.(18ms) Activity 1: -T asks Ss to read the text and check their prediction. Activity 2: -" Answer given" a. 2 minutes b.a long time c.1997 d.the early 1940s e.spencial T.V cameras.. pronunciation - Ss copy the words.. -. Ss work in groups of 4 or 5 to predict. - Ss read the text again and check their prediction. - Students make the suitable question. * Key: a) Who could stay underwater for longer two minutes? b) How long can a diver stay underwater? c) When did Jacques Cousteau die? - Students work individually -> in groups.. 3. Post-reading.(7ms) T asks Ss to write about invention. Invention Verbs Sentences special -explore before spencial breathing the ocean breathing equipment equipment we couldn’t explore the ocean, we couldn’t learn about the sea. electricity -read at Before night electricity, we -watch T.V couldn’t read at -use night. computer -listen to music the -travel far Before the motorbike -get home motorbike,we quickly couldn’t travel -visit far. places IV.Consolidation :(1m) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(1m) Learning by heart all content. Doing exercises in workbook. Preparing new lesson: Unit 14: A1 -. Pre: 19/03/2015 Tea: 20/03/ 2015 Period: 84.

(207) Unit 14 : FREETIME FUN Lesson 1: TIME FOR T.V <A1> A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to talk about freetime activities and expressing preferences, use "like/ prefer + to -infinitive". I.Knowledge. - Freetime activities and expressing preferences - Using "like/ prefer + to -infinitive II. Skill -Reading and speaking skill. .B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision -"Matching"(5ms) read friends play to the movie have homework go T.V listen chess watch dinner meet books III.New lesson Teacher’s activities Students’activities 1. Presentation.(15ms) a.Vocabulary - adventure (n): cuéc phu lu - cricket (n): con dế - series (n): phim nhiều tập - (to) guess: ®o¸n - Ss repeat the words in chorus and in - T introduces the words by explaining individual and correct the mistakes the meaning, using the situation and - Ss give the meaning and the gives example. pronunciation - T models and helps Ss to repeat. - Ss copy the words. - T checks S’s reading in individual and corrects the mistakes. - T writes the words on the Bb and checks the meaning, the pronunciation. - T corrects and asks Ss to copy the words. - T helps Ss to practice the vocabulary. b.Presentation dialogue. - A1 P.139 T asks Ss to read the dialogue carefully to get the main of this content. c.Model sentences: -T sets a sence to give the model sentences. My aunt and uncle don’t like it. -Model sentences They prefer to do other thing. They prefer to do other things 2.Practice.(13ms) Prefer+ to –infinitive/ V-ing. a."word cue drill" 1.He/music - He/play sports. 2..She/movies - She/listen to music. 3.They/game - They/read book 4.Lan/T.V - Lan/meet friends. 3.Production.(7ms.

(208) b.Comprehension questions. -Ss to read the dialogue carefully to get - A1 P.140 (a- e) the main of this content. T gives a game "hang man" to ask Ss tp practice well. cts. IV.Consolidation :(3m) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(2m) Learning by heart all content. Doing exercises in workbook. Preparing new lesson: Unit 14: A2. Pre: 22/03/2015 Tea: 23/03/ 2015 Period: 85. Unit 14 : FREETIME FUN Lesson 1: TIME FOR T.V <A2> A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to talk about freetime activities . I.Knowledge. - Using "like/ prefer + to -infinitive II. Skill -Reading and speaking skill. .B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision -"Matching"(5ms) series ®o¸n news con dÕ adventure thich h¬n cricket cuéc phiªu liªu prefer buån ch¸n boring thêi sù guess phim truyÒn h×nh nhiÒu tËp III.New lesson Teacher’s activities Students’activities 2. Presentation.(15ms).

(209) a.Vocabulary - cowboy (n) cao båi - detective (n) th¸m tö - advertisement (n) qu¶ng c¸o - similar (a) t¬ng tù - T introduces the words by explaining - Ss repeat the words in chorus and in the meaning, using the situation and individual and correct the mistakes gives example. - Ss give the meaning and the - T models and helps Ss to repeat. pronunciation - T checks S’s reading in individual and - Ss copy the words. corrects the mistakes. - T writes the words on the Bb and checks the meaning, the pronunciation. - T corrects and asks Ss to copy the words. - T helps Ss to practice the vocabulary. - A2 P.141(10ms) T asks Ss to read the dialogue carefully to get the main of this content. c.Model sentences: -Ss to read the dialogue carefully to get -T sets a sence to give the model the main of this content. sentences. -Look at the advertisements. My aunt and uncle don’t like it. -What do you want to do? They prefer to do other thing. -Work with a partner. 3.Production.(7ms) -Make up a similar conversation. b.Comprehension questions. - A1 P.140 (a- e) T gives a game "hang man" to ask Ss tp practice well. . IV.Consolidation :(3m) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(2m) Learning by heart all content. Doing exercises in workbook. Preparing new lesson: Unit 14: A3.

(210) Pre: 25/03/2015 Tea: 26/03/ 2015 Period: 86 Unit 14 : FREETIME FUN Lesson 2: TIME FOR T.V <A3> A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the details about T.V. I.Knowledge. - Time for T.V II. Skill - Reading skill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision(3m) @ Chatting ? What do you often do after school? ? Do you like watching TV every night? ? What programs do you like best? ? Is your TV colorful? III.New lesson Teacher’s activities 1. Pre-reading.(15m) a.Pre teach. - owner (n) : người làm chñ - neighbor (n) : ngời hàng xóm - (to) gather : tập trung, tụ tập - (to) spend time: dùng thời gian - outside (prep) : ở trong nhà - inside (prep) : ở ngoài nhà - T introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation and gives example. - T models (3 times) and helps Ss to repeat (2 times). - T checks S’s reading in individual and corrects the mistakes. - T writes the words on the Bb and checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - T corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. b.Check vocab. "What and where" - T helps Ss to practice the vocabulary. c.T/F statement prediction. a) Forty years ago in Viet Nam,very few people had T.V sets. b) These T.V owners were very popular. c) All morning poeple watched the. Students’activities. - Ss repeat the words in chorus and in individual and correct the mistakes - Ss give the meaning & the pronunciation - Ss copy the words..

(211) black and white programs d) Today, many families have a T.V set. e) Now people spend much time together. ? Close your book! -T hangs a poster with 5 statements on the board. - T asks Ss to work in groups of 5 or 6 students to guess which statements are true and which are false. - T asks Ss to stick their prediction on the board. 2.While-reading.(18m) Activity 1: T asks Ss to read the text and check their prediction. Activity 2: "Answer given" 1) thirty years ago 2) black and white programs 3) in their own living room 4) life is more comfortable - T asks Ss to read the text again and answer the questions. - T asks Ss to work in pairs. Example: 1.How many years ago did people in Viet Nam have sets ? 2...........etc. 4. Post-reading.(7m) - Gap fill A3 P.142 (text book) - T asks Ss to work individually to complete the missing words in the gap. - T asks Ss to compare with partners. - T gives feed back.. - Ss predict guess which statements are true and which are false. - Ss work in groups of 5 or 6. - Ss read the text (A 4-P142) and check their predictions. * Answers keys: 1. F 4. F 2. T 5. T 3. F - Ss read the text again and find out the questions of these answers. - Ss work in pairs. key: 1. How many years ago did people in Vietnam have TV sets? 2. Did they watch the black and white programs all evening? 3. Today, where do they sit to watch TV? 4. How is the life today? @ Gap fill A3(P142- text book) In 1960s, most (1) people in Vietnam did (2) not have a (3) TV set. The people with TVs were (4) popular. In the (5) evening the neighbors would (6) gather around the TV. (7) They (would stay until the TV programs finished. Vietnam is different (8) today. More families (9) have a TV set and (10) life is more comfortable. But neighbors don’t (11) know each other as well as they did in the past.. IV.Consolidation :(1m) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(1m) Learning by heart all content. Doing exercises in workbook. Preparing new lesson: Unit 14: B1,2.

(212) Pre: 26/03/2015 Tea: 27/03/ 2015 Period: 87 Unit 14 : FREETIME FUN Lesson 3 : WHAT S ON ? <B1,2> A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to talk about t.v programs.. I.Knowledge. - Time for T.V - Practicing with " prefer/like + gerund" II. Skill - Reading and speaking skill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision -" Brainstorming"(3ms) sports ......... T.V programs. III.New lesson Teacher’s activities I.1.Presentation.(10m) a.Pre teach. - The World Today: thế giới ngày nay - Cartoon (n) : phim hoạt hình - Music program (n) :ch¬ng trình âm nhạc. music Students’activities.

(213) - Children’s corner (n) : góc trẻ thơ - Early news (n) : bản tin sím - Weather forecast (n) : dự báo thời tiết - Sports show (n): buổi chiếu về thể thao T introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation and gives example. - T models and helps Ss to repeat. - T checks S’s reading in individual and corrects the mistakes. - T writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - T corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. - T helps Ss to practice the vocabulary b.Check vocab. R.O.R c.Presentation dialogue. - B1 p.144 * set the scene: Ba and Nga are talking about the programs which they like. - T asks Ss to listen and repeat the dialogue at the same time. - T asks Ss to work in pairs, practice the dialogue. d.Comprehension questions. a- e P.144 T gives a game "Hang man" to ask Ss to practice well. - T asks Ss to read the dialogue silently and answer the questions on page 144. - T asks Ss to work individually.. e.Model sentences: - T elicits and presents modal sentences. 1. Practice.(7m) "Substitution drill" 1) Listen to music 2) read book 3) go to the movie 4) meet friends 5) watch cartoon 6) watch sports. II.1Pre-listening.(10m) -Open prediction. T shows the way a ask Ss to predict the time of the programs. Order Programs Time a Children’s programs b Early news c Weather forecast d The world today. - Ss repeat the words in chorus and in individual and correct the mistakes - Ss give the meaning and the pronunciation. - Ss copy the words.. - Ss listen and read the dialogue at the same time. - Ss work in pairs, practice the dialogue - Ss read the dialogue silently and answer the questions on page 144. - Ss work individually. a. No, she doesn’t. Because there aren’t any good programs for teenagers. b. Ba watches sports shows, cartoons and movies. c. She likes to watch programs about teenagers in other countries. d. Nga doesn’t like the music program because they don’t play the kind of music she likes. e. This evening Nga is going to listen to the radio and maybe read a book. I don’t really like watching sports. I prefer talking part in them. like/prefer + gerund Example exchange: I like listening to music show. ......etc. Ex: I prefer watching children’s corner. (Ask Ss to talk about T.V programs). Ss read the sentences and predict the time of the programs..

(214) e. Movie"A fistful of dollars" 1. While-listening.(10m) T turns on the tape and asks Ss to listen to the tape and check their prediction.. 3.Post-listening.(3m) -T asks Ss to work in groups tp write a list of the T.V programs. -T cotrols and corrects.. Ss listen to the tape and check their prediction. *Answer key: a) 5:00 b) 6:00 c) 6:10 d) 6:15 e) 7:00 Ss work in groups tp write a list of the T.V programs. Example: VTV1 VTV2 VTV3 6:00a.m .... 6:00 a.m -Early -football news match. 7:00 a.m ........ Film ..... .. IV.Consolidation :(1m) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(1m) Learning by heart all content. Doing exercises in workbook. Preparing new lesson: Unit 14: B3,4. Teaching:. Period: 87 Unit 14 : FREETIME FUN Lesson 4 : WHAT S ON ? <B1,2> A . Objectives ..

(215) -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the main ideas and the details about T.V programs. I.Knowledge. - T.V programs II. Skill - Listening skill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision -"Slap the board"(3m) the wold today children’s corner. cartoon early new. III.New lesson Teacher’s activities 2. Pre-listening.(15m) -Open prediction. T shows the way a ask Ss to predict the time of the programs. Order Programs Time a Children’s programs b Early news c Weather forecast d The world today e Movie"A fistful of dollars" 3. While-listening.(18m) T turns on the tape and asks Ss to listen to the tape and check their prediction.. 3.Post-listening.(7m) -T asks Ss to work in groups tp write a list of the T.V programs. -T cotrols and corrects.. music program weather forecast Students’activities Ss read the sentences and predict the time of the programs.. Ss listen to the tape and check their prediction. *Answer key: f) 5:00 g) 6:00 h) 6:10 i) 6:15 j) 7:00 Ss work in groups tp write a list of the T.V programs. Example: VTV1 VTV2 VTV3 6:00a.m .... 6:00 a.m -Early -football news match. 7:00 a.m ........ Film ...... IV.Consolidation :(1m) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(1) Learning by heart all content. Doing exercises in workbook. Preparing new lesson: Unit 14: B3-4.

(216) Pre: 29/03/2015 Tea: 30/03/ 2015 Period: 88 Unit 14 : FREETIME FUN Lesson 5 : WHAT S ON ? <B3-4> A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the main ideas and the details about popular T.V programs. I.Knowledge. - T.V programs II. Skill - Reading skill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision -"Guessing game"(3ms) I like watching music. Example exchange: S1:Do you like watching cartoons? S2: No. I don’t. S1: Do you like waching music? S2: Yes, I do. .......etc. III.New lesson Teacher’s activities Students’activities 1. Pre-reading.(15m) -Ss repeat the words in a.Pre teach. chorus & in individual and T elicits to teach vocabulary. correct the mistakes - Ss give the meaning & the - Pop music (n) : nhạc Pop.

(217) -series (n): phim truyền hình nhiều tập - import (n): hàng nhập khẩu - contest (n): cuộc thi -contestant = participant: người tham gia - (to) perform: trình diễn T introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation & gives example. - T models (3 times) and helps Ss to repeat (2 times). - T checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - T writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - T corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. - T helps Ss to practice the vocabulary b.Check vocab. "What and Where" c.Open prediction. T gives a question to ask Ss to predict the answer. news What are popular T.v programs?. pronunciation - Ss copy the words.. - Ss predict guess. - Ss work in groups of 5 or 6. Key: Pop music, imports are programs.. contests, popular. - students read the text again and answer some questions by playing “lucky numbers” Key: 1. Activity 2: Teenagers like to listen to -T asks ss to read the text again and answer the the latest pop music and following questions. see the shows of the 1.) What do teenagers like to hear favorite artists. and see? 2. They perform their latest 2.) What do bands and singers song on TV perform on T.V? 4. There are contest of 3.) LN knowledge, contest of 4.) What contests are these on T.V? folk music, games, 5.) Who are the contesttants in sports... contest programs? 5. The contestants are 6.) Can T.V viewers join in the students, workers or contests and answer questions? family members. 7.) What do imports usually 8. 7. Imports usually include? include police and 8.) Why do T,V staions all over the hospital series. world show these programs? 8. Because they can buy 9.) List some foreign series you 9, them cheaply have known? 10.) Ln Ss work individually -> 3. Post-reading.(7m) share with a partner. B4 P.146 (text book) 1. around 6. like T asks Ss to work individually - in pairs - in groups. -T corrects. 2. watch 7. station 3. listen 8. receive 4. series 9. cities 2. While-reading.(18m) Activity 1: -T asks Ss to read the text and check their prediction.. 5. show IV.Consolidation :(1m) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(1m) Learning by heart all content.. 10. possible.

(218) -. Doing exercises in workbook. Preparing new lesson:Written test 45 minutes.. Pre: 01/04/2015 Tea: 02/04/ 2015. Period: 89. WRITTEN TEST 4 Time : 45 minutes.. A . Objectives -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to consolidate the knowledge from unit 12to unit 14. I.Knowledge. -The present simple. The simple past. -Too/so-neither/either. -Like/prefer. -Adjectives and adverbs. -Modal verbs II. Skill -Writting skill B. Proceduce. * MATRIX NhËn biÕt Th«ng hiÓu VËn dông Chủ đề Tæng sè: TL TL TL TN TN TN 4 2 6 1,0 1,0 2,0 I. Listen 2. II. Reading III. Language focus. 2 1,0. 1,0 8 2,0. IV. Writing Tæng sè:. 14 5,0. 10 4,0. 2 1,0. 4 2,0. 4 2 ,0. 2 0,5 6 2,5. 4 2,0 14 5,0 6 2,5 30 10. Code 1 I . Listening: (2đ ) 1/Lắng nghe và điền từ còn thiếu vào chổ trống(1đ): Today television (1)………….... an important part in many people's lives. It informs people of current events, the latest developments of science and politics. It also offers many different (2)………….. that are both amusing and educative. There are good programs .(3). ………………….. children such as "The Garden of Fairy Tales", "Mischierous Boys" and cartoon films, which draw adults' attention, too. "Show Me The Funny" is one of many people's favorite programs as well. People often laugh (4).................... when they see this program. There is also a variety of story films and you can make a free choice of the films you like watching in a certain Tvchannel. 2/Lắng nghe và chọn true(T) hoặc false (F)(1đ):.

(219) ……………1. Television informs people of current events. ……………2. Many of TV programs are not amusing and educative. II.- Chọn và khoanh tròn câu trả lời đúng nhất A, B, C hoặc D (2đ): Câu 1: She is a ......................... girl. A. care B. carelessly C. carefully D. careless Câu 2: Did Liz ................................. any gifts in Nha Trang? A. buys B. bought C. buy D. to buy Câu 3: How ...................... is she? She is 40 kilos. A. heavy B. high C. weight D. height Câu 4: We enjoy ................................. soccer. A. played B. to play C. play D. playing Câu 5: What kinds of ................... do you like? – I like programs about teenagers. A. films B. programs C. books D. music Câu 6: ....................... swimming? That’s OK. A. Let’s B. How about C. Shall we D. Will we Câu 7: I am a teacher and she is, ............................. . A. either B. neither C. too D. so Câu 8: What would you like .....................? – Cowboy movies. A. to watch B. to play C. to listen to D. to read III.- Cho hình thức hoặc thì đúng của động từ trong ngoặc (1đ): 1. You should (visit) ............................ your grandmother. 2. I (watch) ......................... a football match on TV last night. 3. They (play) ..................... chess at the moment. 4. She always (go) ...................... to bed late. IV.- Đặt câu hỏi cho phần gạch chân (2 điểm): 1. He goes to Nguyen Du School. Which .............................................................................................................. 2. Lan is one meter 50 centimeters tall. How................................................................................................................. 3. She has a toothache. What................................................................................................................. 4. Yesterday I went to Dong Ba market. Where............................................................................................................... V.- Cho hình thức đúng của từ ở trong ngoặc (1 điểm): 1. You should brush your teeth .............................. (REGULAR) 2. Hai is a .............................. boy. (HELP) VI.- Đọc đoạn văn sau trả lời các câu hỏi (2 điểm):.

(220) ....... A Frenchman, Jacques Cousteau (1910-1997) invented a deep-sea diving vessel in the early 1940s. In the vessel, he could explore the oceans of the world and study underwater life. Now, we can explore the oceans, using special TV cameras as well. We can learn more about the undersea world thanks to this invention. Questions: 1. When did Jacques Cousteau die? .................................................................................................................... 2. When did he invent the deep-sea diving vessel? .................................................................................................................... True or false. T /. F. 3. We can not learn more about the undersea world.. ……………... 4.we can explore the oceans, using special TV cameras as well.. ……………... Code 2 I . Listening: (2đ ) 1/Lắng nghe và điền từ còn thiếu vào chổ trống(1đ): Today television (1)………….... an important part in many people's lives. It informs people of current events, the latest developments of science and politics. It also offers many different (2)………….. that are both amusing and educative. There are good programs .(3). ………………….. children such as "The Garden of Fairy Tales", "Mischierous Boys" and cartoon films, which draw adults' attention, too. "Show Me The Funny" is one of many people's favorite programs as well. People often laugh (4).................... when they see this program. There is also a variety of story films and you can make a free choice of the films you like watching in a certain Tvchannel. 2/Lắng nghe và chọn true(T) hoặc false (F)(1đ): ……………1. Cowboy films draw adults' attention. ……………2. Many of TV programs are both amusing and educative. II.- Chọn và khoanh tròn câu trả lời đúng nhất A, B, C hoặc D (2đ): Câu 1: What kinds of ................... do you like? – I like programs about teenagers. A. films B. programs C. books D. music Câu 2: ....................... swimming? That’s OK. A. Let’s B. How about C. Shall we D. Will we Câu 3: I am a teacher and she is, ............................. . A. either B. neither C. too D. so Câu 4: What would you like .....................? – Cowboy movies. A. to watch B. to play C. to listen to D. to read Câu 5: She is a ......................... girl. A. care B. carelessly C. carefully D. careless Câu 6: Did Liz ................................. any gifts in Nha Trang? A. buys B. bought C. buy D. to buy Câu 7: How ...................... is she? She is 40 kilos..

(221) A. heavy B. high C. weight D. height Câu 8: We enjoy ................................. soccer. A. played B. to play C. play D. playing III.- Cho hình thức hoặc thì đúng của động từ trong ngoặc (1đ): 1. They (play) ..................... chess at the moment. 2. She always (go) ...................... to bed late. 3. You should (visit) ............................ your grandmother. 4. I (watch) ......................... a football match on TV last night .IV.- Đặt câu hỏi cho phần gạch chân (2 điểm): 1. She has a headache. What................................................................................................................. 2. Yesterday I went to Dong Ba market. Where............................................................................................................... 3. He goes to Nguyen Du School. Which .............................................................................................................. 4. Lan is one meter 50 centimeters tall. How................................................................................................................. V.- Cho hình thức đúng của từ ở trong ngoặc (1 điểm): 1. Hai is a .............................. boy. (HELP) 2. You should brush your teeth .............................. (REGULAR) VI.- Đọc đoạn văn sau trả lời các câu hỏi (2 điểm): ....... A Frenchman, Jacques Cousteau (1910-1997) invented a deep-sea diving vessel in the early 1940s. In the vessel, he could explore the oceans of the world and study underwater life. Now, we can explore the oceans, using special TV cameras as well. We can learn more about the undersea world thanks to this invention. Questions: 1. When was Jacques Cousteau born? ................................................................................................................... 2. What did he invent in the early 1940s ? .................................................................................................................... True or false 3. we can explore the oceans, using special TV cameras as well. 4.We can not learn more about the undersea world.. T /. F. . …………….. ……………...

(222) BÀI KIỂM TRA HỌC KÌ II MÔN: TIẾNG ANH 7. Thời gian làm bài: 45 phút Họ, tên thí sinh:............................................................ ...................... Lớp ......................... Trường THCS ......................................... .......... I . Listening: (2đ ) 1/Lắng nghe và điền từ còn thiếu vào chổ trống(1đ):. Đề số 1.

(223) Today television (1)………….... an important part in many people's lives. It informs people of current events, the latest developments of science and politics. It also offers many different (2)………….. that are both amusing and educative. There are good programs .(3). ………………….. children such as "The Garden of Fairy Tales", "Mischierous Boys" and cartoon films, which draw adults' attention, too. "Show Me The Funny" is one of many people's favorite programs as well. People often laugh (4).................... when they see this program. There is also a variety of story films and you can make a free choice of the films you like watching in a certain Tvchannel. 2/Lắng nghe và chọn true(T) hoặc false (F)(1đ): ……………1. Television informs people of current events. ……………2. Many of TV programs are not amusing and educative. II.- Chọn và khoanh tròn câu trả lời đúng nhất A, B, C hoặc D (2đ): Câu 1: She is a ......................... girl. A. care B. carelessly C. carefully D. careless Câu 2: Did Liz ................................. any gifts in Nha Trang? A. buys B. bought C. buy D. to buy Câu 3: How ...................... is she? She is 40 kilos. A. heavy B. high C. weight D. height Câu 4: We enjoy ................................. soccer. A. played B. to play C. play D. playing Câu 5: What kinds of ................... do you like? – I like programs about teenagers. A. films B. programs C. books D. music Câu 6: ....................... swimming? That’s OK. A. Let’s B. How about C. Shall we D. Will we Câu 7: I am a teacher and she is, ............................. . A. either B. neither C. too D. so Câu 8: What would you like .....................? – Cowboy movies. A. to watch B. to play C. to listen to D. to read III.- Cho hình thức hoặc thì đúng của động từ trong ngoặc (1đ): 1. You should (visit) ............................ your grandmother. 2. I (watch) ......................... a football match on TV last night. 3. They (play) ..................... chess at the moment. 4. She always (go) ...................... to bed late. IV.- Đặt câu hỏi cho phần gạch chân (2 điểm): 1. He goes to Nguyen Du School. Which .............................................................................................................. 2. Lan is one meter 50 centimeters tall. How................................................................................................................. 3. She has a toothache. What..................................................................................................................

(224) 4. Yesterday I went to Dong Ba market. Where............................................................................................................... V.- Cho hình thức đúng của từ ở trong ngoặc (1 điểm): 1. You should brush your teeth .............................. (REGULAR) 2. Hai is a .............................. boy. (HELP) VI.- Đọc đoạn văn sau trả lời các câu hỏi (2 điểm): ....... A Frenchman, Jacques Cousteau (1910-1997) invented a deep-sea diving vessel in the early 1940s. In the vessel, he could explore the oceans of the world and study underwater life. Now, we can explore the oceans, using special TV cameras as well. We can learn more about the undersea world thanks to this invention. Questions: 1. When did Jacques Cousteau die? .................................................................................................................... 2. When did he invent the deep-sea diving vessel? .................................................................................................................... True or false. T /. F. 3. We can not learn more about the undersea world.. ……………... 4.we can explore the oceans, using special TV cameras as well.. ……………... BÀI KIỂM TRA HỌC KÌ II MÔN: TIẾNG ANH 7. Thời gian làm bài: 45 phút Họ, tên thí sinh:............................................................ ...................... Lớp ......................... Trường THCS ......................................... .......... I . Listening: (2đ ) 1/Lắng nghe và điền từ còn thiếu vào chổ trống(1đ):. Đề số 2.

(225) Today television (1)………….... an important part in many people's lives. It informs people of current events, the latest developments of science and politics. It also offers many different (2)………….. that are both amusing and educative. There are good programs .(3). ………………….. children such as "The Garden of Fairy Tales", "Mischierous Boys" and cartoon films, which draw adults' attention, too. "Show Me The Funny" is one of many people's favorite programs as well. People often laugh (4).................... when they see this program. There is also a variety of story films and you can make a free choice of the films you like watching in a certain Tvchannel. 2/Lắng nghe và chọn true(T) hoặc false (F)(1đ): ……………1. Cowboy films draw adults' attention. ……………2. Many of TV programs are both amusing and educative. II.- Chọn và khoanh tròn câu trả lời đúng nhất A, B, C hoặc D (2đ): Câu 1: What kinds of ................... do you like? – I like programs about teenagers. A. films B. programs C. books D. music Câu 2: ....................... swimming? That’s OK. A. Let’s B. How about C. Shall we D. Will we Câu 3: I am a teacher and she is, ............................. . A. either B. neither C. too D. so Câu 4: What would you like .....................? – Cowboy movies. A. to watch B. to play C. to listen to D. to read Câu 5: She is a ......................... girl. A. care B. carelessly C. carefully D. careless Câu 6: Did Liz ................................. any gifts in Nha Trang? A. buys B. bought C. buy D. to buy Câu 7: How ...................... is she? She is 40 kilos. A. heavy B. high C. weight D. height Câu 8: We enjoy ................................. soccer. A. played B. to play C. play D. playing III.- Cho hình thức hoặc thì đúng của động từ trong ngoặc (1đ): 1. They (play) ..................... chess at the moment. 2. She always (go) ...................... to bed late. 3. You should (visit) ............................ your grandmother. 4. I (watch) ......................... a football match on TV last night .IV.- Đặt câu hỏi cho phần gạch chân (2 điểm): 1. She has a headache. What................................................................................................................. 2. Yesterday I went to Dong Ba market. Where............................................................................................................... 3. He goes to Nguyen Du School. Which ...............................................................................................................

(226) 4. Lan is one meter 50 centimeters tall. How................................................................................................................. V.- Cho hình thức đúng của từ ở trong ngoặc (1 điểm): 1. Hai is a .............................. boy. (HELP) 2. You should brush your teeth .............................. (REGULAR) VI.- Đọc đoạn văn sau trả lời các câu hỏi (2 điểm): ....... A Frenchman, Jacques Cousteau (1910-1997) invented a deep-sea diving vessel in the early 1940s. In the vessel, he could explore the oceans of the world and study underwater life. Now, we can explore the oceans, using special TV cameras as well. We can learn more about the undersea world thanks to this invention. Questions: 1. When was Jacques Cousteau born? ................................................................................................................... 2. What did he invent in the early 1940s ? .................................................................................................................... True or false. T /. 3. we can explore the oceans, using special TV cameras as well. 4.We can not learn more about the undersea world.. Pre: 02/04/2015 Tea: 03/04/ 2015 Period: 90 TEST CORRECTION. F. . …………….. ……………...

(227) A./ OBJECTIVES: I. Knowlege: - Helps Ss to examinize and evaluate their learning - Helps T to consolidate the knowledge in Unit 12,13and 14. II. Skills: Writing, reading, vocab. and grammar practice. III.Teaching aid & Preparation : * Teacher's : Lesson plan; test papers. * Student's : notebooks, books B./ PROCEDURES: I. Settlement: Greets and checks attendance II. Control: - Gives out the testing paper. - Controls the class. III. COLLECTION: - Asks Ss to hand in the tests and evaluates the lesson. - Asks them to revise the knowlege at home for the test correction Code 1. I . Listening: (2đ ) 1/Lắng nghe và điền từ còn thiếu vào chổ trống(1đ): Today television plays an important part in many people's lives. It informs people of current events, the latest developments of science and politics. It also offers many different programs that are both amusing and educative. There are good programs for children such as "The Garden of Fairy Tales", "Mischierous Boys" and cartoon films, which draw adults' attention, too. "Show Me The Funny" is one of many people's favorite programs as well. People often laugh happily when they see this program. There is also a variety of story films and you can make a free choice of the films you like watching in a certain Tvchannel. 2/Lắng nghe và chọn true(T) hoặc false (F)(1đ): ……T………1. Television informs people of current events. ……F………2. Many of TV programs are not amusing and educative. II.- Chọn và khoanh tròn câu trả lời đúng nhất A, B, C hoặc D (2đ): Câu 1: She is a ......................... girl. A. care B. carelessly C. carefully D. careless Câu 2: Did Liz ................................. any gifts in Nha Trang? A. buys B. bought C. buy D. to buy Câu 3: How ...................... is she? She is 40 kilos. A. heavy B. high C. weight D. height Câu 4: We enjoy ................................. soccer. A. played B. to play C. play D. playing Câu 5: What kinds of ................... do you like? – I like programs about teenagers. A. films B. programs C. books D. music Câu 6: ....................... swimming? That’s OK. A. Let’s B. How about C. Shall we D. Will we Câu 7: I am a teacher and she is, ............................. . A. either B. neither C. too D. so.

(228) Câu 8: What would you like .....................? – Cowboy movies. A. to watch B. to play C. to listen to D. to read III.- Cho hình thức hoặc thì đúng của động từ trong ngoặc (1đ): 1. You should visit your grandmother. 2. I watched a football match on TV last night. 3. They is playing chess at the moment. 4. She always goes to bed late. IV.- Đặt câu hỏi cho phần gạch chân (2 điểm): 1. He goes to Nguyen Du School. Which school does he go to? 2. Lan is one meter 50 centimeters tall. How tall is Lan? 3. She has a toothache. What is the matter with her? 4. Yesterday I went to Dong Ba market. Where did you go Yesterday? V.- Cho hình thức đúng của từ ở trong ngoặc (1 điểm): 1. You should brush your teeth regularly. 2. Hai is a helpful boy. VI.- Đọc đoạn văn sau trả lời các câu hỏi (2 điểm): ....... A Frenchman, Jacques Cousteau (1910-1997) invented a deep-sea diving vessel in the early 1940s. In the vessel, he could explore the oceans of the world and study underwater life. Now, we can explore the oceans, using special TV cameras as well. We can learn more about the undersea world thanks to this invention. Questions: 1. When did Jacques Cousteau die? -He died in1997 2.When did he invent the deep-sea diving vessel? - He invented a deep-sea diving vessel in the early 1940s. True or false. T /. F. 3. We can not learn more about the undersea world.. ………F……... 4. we can explore the oceans, using special TV cameras as well.. ………T……...

(229) Code 2 I . Listening: (2đ ) 1/Lắng nghe và điền từ còn thiếu vào chổ trống(1đ): Today television plays an important part in many people's lives. It informs people of current events, the latest developments of science and politics. It also offers many different programs that are both amusing and educative. There are good programs for children such as "The Garden of Fairy Tales", "Mischierous Boys" and cartoon films, which draw adults' attention, too. "Show Me The Funny" is one of many people's favorite programs as well. People often laugh happily when they see this program. There is also a variety of story films and you can make a free choice of the films you like watching in a certain Tvchannel. 2/Lắng nghe và chọn true(T) hoặc false (F)(1đ): ………F……1. Cowboy films draw adults' attention. ………T……2. Many of TV programs are both amusing and educative. II.- Chọn và khoanh tròn câu trả lời đúng nhất A, B, C hoặc D (2đ): Câu 1: What kinds of ................... do you like? – I like programs about teenagers. A. films B. programs C. books D. music Câu 2: ....................... swimming? That’s OK. A. Let’s B. How about C. Shall we D. Will we Câu 3: I am a teacher and she is, ............................. . A. either B. neither C. too D. so Câu 4: What would you like .....................? – Cowboy movies. A. to watch B. to play C. to listen to D. to read Câu 5: She is a ......................... girl. A. care B. carelessly C. carefully D. careless Câu 6: Did Liz ................................. any gifts in Nha Trang? A. buys B. bought C. buy D. to buy Câu 7: How ...................... is she? She is 40 kilos. A. heavy B. high C. weight D. height Câu 8: We enjoy ................................. soccer. A. played B. to play C. play D. playing III.- Cho hình thức hoặc thì đúng của động từ trong ngoặc (1đ): 1. They are playing chess at the moment. 2. She always goes to bed late. 3. You should visit your grandmother. 4. I watched a football match on TV last night .IV.- Đặt câu hỏi cho phần gạch chân (2 điểm): 1. She has a headache. What is the matter with her? 2. Yesterday I went to Dong Ba market. Where did you go yesterday?.

(230) 3. He goes to Nguyen Du School. Which school does he go to? 4. Lan is one meter 50 centimeters tall. How tall is Lan? V.- Cho hình thức đúng của từ ở trong ngoặc (1 điểm): 1. Hai is a helpful boy. 2. You should brush your teeth regularly. VI.- Đọc đoạn văn sau trả lời các câu hỏi (2 điểm): ....... A Frenchman, Jacques Cousteau (1910-1997) invented a deep-sea diving vessel in the early 1940s. In the vessel, he could explore the oceans of the world and study underwater life. Now, we can explore the oceans, using special TV cameras as well. We can learn more about the undersea world thanks to this invention. Questions: 1. When was Jacques Cousteau born? - He was born in 1910. 2. What did he invent in the early 1940s ? - He invented a deep-sea diving vessel in the early 1940s. True or false. T /. F. 3. we can explore the oceans, using special TV cameras as well.. . ……T………... 4.We can not learn more about the undersea world.. ……F………... C. CONSOLIDATION: D. HOMEWORK:. Review some knowlrge they learnt Asks Ss to prepare for the next lesson.

(231) Tea: /04/ 2013 Period : 89. WRITTEN TEST 4 Time : 45 minutes.. A . Objectives -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to consolidate the knowledge from unit 12to unit 14. I.Knowledge. -The present simple. The simple past. -Too/so-neither/either. -Like/prefer. -Adjectives and adverbs. -Modal verbs II. Skill -Writting skill.

(232) B. Proceduce. *- Ma trËn: Chủ đề. NhËn biÕt TN. TL. Th«ng hiÓu TN. TN. TL. 2,0. I.Listening. 4 2,0 4 2,0. 8. 4 2,0 12 4,0. 2,0 4 2,0. IV. Writing Tæng sè:. Tæng sè: 2,0. II. Reading III. Language focus. TL. VËn dông. 6 4,0. 12 4,0. 4 2,0. 4 2,0 22 10. Number 1 I: Listen. Then tick (Ö ) what these people ate and drank yesterday. (2 pts) Name Rice Noodles Vegetables Chicken Soda Fruit juice Lan Ba Hung Nga II. Choose the best answer to complete the sentences. ( 2pts): 1.I like apple. - ............ A. So do I B. Neither do I C. I do neither D. I like milk, either 2. Binh is a ..... student in my class. A. badly. B. well. C. good. D. goodly. C. play. D. Played. 3.Would you like .... …….volleyball ? A. Playing. B. to play. 4. We ........ to Ho Chi Minh city last summer holiday. A. went. B. goes. C. to go. D. go. 5. I don’t like mangoes and ............ ..does my mom. A. neither. B. either. C. so. D. too. B. quick. C.slow. D. good. 6. My sister runs ........ A. quickly. 7. I didn’t have dinner .................... home yesterday. a. by b. with c. at d. for 8. Very few people ...................... TV sets 30 years ago. a. have b. has c. had d. having III.Give the correct form of the verbs in blankets. (2 points).

(233) 1. They prefer .........................(do) aerobics. 2. Last Monday, I .....................( go) to the zoo. 3. I must ..............................(go) to the dentist. 4. Miss Nga usually............................. ( start) her work at seven. IV. Rewrite the sentences without changing their meaming. (2ps) 1. Nam drives carefully.  Nam is a ....................................................................................................................... 2. Shall we go to the cinema?.  Let’s................................................................................................................................. 3. He is a quick runner.  He runs.......................................................................................................................... 4.She ought to see a dentist. She should………………………………………………………………………….. V. Reading the passge and put True (T) False (F) for these statements(2ps) . When I was in secondary school. I played football. Our team played with many other secondary schools in our city.Crowds of fans always came to watch the football and enjoy the competition. Usually , we played outdoors, but if it rained, we competed indoors. Last year, we played twenty games and were very successful. We had eighteen wins and two loses because our team lost only two games. We received fisrt prize. The fans were very happy, and our parents took many photographs of us with our prize. 1. When I was in secondary school. I played soccer. 2. Crowds of the fans always came to watch the football. 3.They don’t enjoy the competition. 4. They played outdoors when the weather was bad Number 2 I: Listen. Then tick (Ö ) what these people ate and drank yesterday. (2 pts) Name Rice Noodles Vegetables Chicken Soda Fruit juice Lan Ba Hung Nga II. Choose the best answer to complete the sentences. ( 2pts): 1. We ........ to Ha Noi last summer holiday. A. went. B. goes. C. to go. D. go. 2. I don’t like mangoes and ............ ..does my mom. A. neither. B. either. C. so. D. too. 3. My sister runs ........ A. quickly. B. quick. C. slow. 4.I like apple. - ............ A. So do I B. Neither do I 5. Binh is a ..... student in my class. A. badly. B. well. C. I do neither. C. good. 6.Would you like .... ………………volleyball ?. D. good D. I like milk, either D. goodly.

(234) A. Playing. B. to play. C. play. D. Played. 7. Very few people ...................... TV sets 30 years ago. a. have b. has c. had d. having 8. I didn’t have dinner .................... home yesterday. a. by b. with c. at d. for III.Give the correct form of the verbs in blankets. (2 points) 1. I must ..............................(go) to the dentist. 2. Miss Binh usually............................. ( start) her work at seven. 3. They prefer .........................(do) aerobics. 4. Last Monday, I .....................( go) to the zoo IV. Rewrite the sentences without changing their meaming. (2ps) 1. He is a quick runner.  He runs...................................................................................................................... 2.She ought to see a dentist .She should …………………………………………………………………….. 3. Hung drives carefully.  Hung is a ........................................................................................................... 4. Shall we go to the cinema?.  Let’s................................................................................................................... V. Reading the passge and put True (T) False (F) for these statements(2ps) . When I was in secondary school. I played football. Our team played with many other secondary schools in our city.Crowds of fans always came to watch the football and enjoy the competition. Usually , we played outdoors, but if it rained, we competed indoors. Last year, we played twenty games and were very successful. We had eighteen wins and two loses because our team lost only two games. We received fisrt prize. The fans were very happy, and our parents took many photographs of us with our prize. 1. When I was in secondary school. I played volleyball. 2.They usually played outdoors. 3. Crowds of the fans always came to watch movies. 4.They enjoy the competition..

(235) 45 minute Test :No4-A Full name:...................................................... Mark: Class 7 I: Listen. Then tick (Ö ) what these people ate and drank yesterday. (2 pts) Name Rice Noodles Vegetables Chicken Soda Fruit juice Lan Ba Hung Nga II. Choose the best answer to complete the sentences. ( 2pts): 1.I like apple. - ............ A. So do I B. Neither do I C. I do neither D. I like milk, either 2. Binh is a ..... student in my class. A. badly. B. well. C. good. D. goodly. C. play. D. Played. 3.Would you like .... …….volleyball ? A. Playing. B. to play. 4. We ........ to Ho Chi Minh city last summer holiday. A. went. B. goes. C. to go. 5. I don’t like mangoes and ............ ..does my mom.. D. go.

(236) A. neither. B. either. C. so. D. too. B. quick. C.slow. D. good. 6. My sister runs ........ A. quickly. 7. I didn’t have dinner .................... home yesterday. a. by b. with c. at d. for 8. Very few people ...................... TV sets 30 years ago. a. have b. has c. had d. having III.Give the correct form of the verbs in blankets. (2 points) 5. They prefer .........................(do) aerobics. 6. Last Monday, I .....................( go) to the zoo. 7. I must ..............................(go) to the dentist. 8. Miss Nga usually............................. ( start) her work at seven. IV. Rewrite the sentences without changing their meaming. (2ps) 1. Nam drives carefully.  Nam is a ....................................................................................................................... 2. Shall we go to the cinema?.  Let’s................................................................................................................................. 3. He is a quick runner.  He runs.......................................................................................................................... 4.She ought to see a dentist. She should………………………………………………………………………….. V. Reading the passge and put True (T) False (F) for these statements(2ps) . When I was in secondary school. I played football. Our team played with many other secondary schools in our city.Crowds of fans always came to watch the football and enjoy the competition. Usually , we played outdoors, but if it rained, we competed indoors. Last year, we played twenty games and were very successful. We had eighteen wins and two loses because our team lost only two games. We received fisrt prize. The fans were very happy, and our parents took many photographs of us with our prize. 1. When I was in secondary school. I played soccer. 2. Crowds of the fans always came to watch the football. 3.They don’t enjoy the competition. 4. They played outdoors when the weather was bad.

(237) 45 minute Test :No4-B Full name:...................................................... Mark: Class 7 I: Listen. Then tick (Ö ) what these people ate and drank yesterday. (2 pts) Name Rice Noodles Vegetables Chicken Soda Fruit juice Lan Ba Hung Nga II. Choose the best answer to complete the sentences. ( 2pts): 1. We ........ to Ha Noi last summer holiday. A. went. B. goes. C. to go. D. go. 2. I don’t like mangoes and ............ ..does my mom. A. neither. B. either. C. so. D. too. 3. My sister runs ........ A. quickly. B. quick. C. slow. 4.I like apple. - ............ A. So do I B. Neither do I 5. Binh is a ..... student in my class. A. badly. B. well. C. I do neither. C. good. D. good D. I like milk, either D. goodly. 6.Would you like .... ………………volleyball ? A. Playing. B. to play. C. play. D. Played. 7. Very few people ...................... TV sets 30 years ago. a. have b. has c. had d. having 8. I didn’t have dinner .................... home yesterday. a. by b. with c. at d. for III.Give the correct form of the verbs in blankets. (2 points) 5. I must ..............................(go) to the dentist. 6. Miss Binh usually............................. ( start) her work at seven. 7. They prefer .........................(do) aerobics. 8. Last Monday, I .....................( go) to the zoo IV. Rewrite the sentences without changing their meaming. (2ps) 1. He is a quick runner.  He runs...................................................................................................................... 2.She ought to see a dentist .She should …………………………………………………………………….. 3. Hung drives carefully.  Hung is a ........................................................................................................... 4. Shall we go to the cinema?..

(238)  Let’s................................................................................................................... V. Reading the passge and put True (T) False (F) for these statements(2ps) . When I was in secondary school. I played football. Our team played with many other secondary schools in our city.Crowds of fans always came to watch the football and enjoy the competition. Usually , we played outdoors, but if it rained, we competed indoors. Last year, we played twenty games and were very successful. We had eighteen wins and two loses because our team lost only two games. We received fisrt prize. The fans were very happy, and our parents took many photographs of us with our prize. 1. When I was in secondary school. I played volleyball. 2.They usually played outdoors. 3. Crowds of the fans always came to watch movies. 4.They enjoy the competition.. Teaching Date : /04/2013. Period 90. TEST REMARK. I. Objectives By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to remember the old structures and find out their mistakes in the test to corrects II. Language contents -The present simple. The simple past. -Too/so-neither/either. -Like/prefer. -Adjectives and adverbs. III. Techniques: Asking and answering, pair work, chatting. IV. Teaching aids: textbook, 45 minutes test. V. Procedures T and Ss’ activities 1. Warm-up T: asks Ss to comment the 45 minutes by themselves. Ss: comment. 2. New lesson a. Presentation T: asks Ss to retell grammar structures. Ss: answer. T: comments and gives the corrects answer. Ss: take note and check their tests b. Practice T: asks Ss to base on the structures correcting the test.. Contents 1.The present simple 2. The simple past. 3. So+auxiliary verbs+S S+auxiliary verbs+too 4.Neither+uxiliary verbs +S S+uxiliary verbs + not+either 5.Adjectives . S + be + adjective . S+ be + a/an+ adjective+Noun. 6.Adverbs. S +V+adv. S+adv+V...

(239) S +V +O +adverb. S + be+ adjective+ that clause 7.Like +V-ing/ to-inf…. 8.Prefer+V-ing/ to-inf…. * KEYS Ss: work in pairs part1 Ss: comment - T: corrects Ss: take note Ss: writes on the board part2 Ss: comment T: corrects their mistakes Ss: take note. Ss: ask and answer in pairs part3 Ss: comment 1S: writes on the board T: gives the corrects answers Ss: take note. Ss: discuss in pairs part4 1S: writes the complete sentence on the board Ss: comment T: gives the corrects answer. Ss: take note.. I / (2,0marks) Lan: Noodles,Vegetable. Ba: Rice,Soda Hung: Noodles,Fruit juice Nga: Rice,Chicken II / 2.0(marks) No 1: 1.A 2. C 3. B 4. A 5.A 6.CA 7.C 8.C No 2: 1. A 2.A 3.A 4.A 5.C 6.B 7.C 8.C III / 2,0 (marks) No 1: 1.doing 2. went 3. go 4.starts No 2: 1.go 2.starts 3.doing 4.went IV. 2,0 (marks) No 1: 1.Nam is a careful driver. 2.Let’s go to the cinema. 3.He runs quickly.. 4.She should see a dentist. No 2: 1He runs quickly.. 2.She should see a dentist 3.Hung is a careful driver. 4.Let’s go to the cinema.. Ss: discuss in pairs part 5 to write the sentences. Ss: comment T: gives the corrects answer. Ss: take note.. 3. Consolidation T: asks some questions ( ask Ss close their books and the test ). V. (2marks) No 1: 1.T 2.T 3. F 4.F No 2: 1.F 2.T 3. F 4.T - Learn by heart the structures again..

(240) Ss: answer. T: reviews the main points and asks Ss to learn the lesson carefully for the next test. Ss: listen and remember 4. Homework T: asks Ss to: Ss: listen and take note -prepare new lesson.. Tapescript (The teacher reads twice) Yesterday, Lan had noodles and vegetables for lunch. She didn’t drink anything. Ba ate rice and drank soda. Hung had noodles and fruit juice. Nga only ate rice and chicken. Answer key Question 1: (0.25 point for each correct answer) Name Rice Noodles Vegetables Chicken Ö Ö Lan Ö Ba Ö Hung Ö Ö Nga. Soda. Fruit juice. Ö Ö.

(241) Pre: 05/04/2015 Tea: 06/04/ 2015 Period: 91 Unit 15 : GOING OUT Lesson 1: VIDEO GAMES < A1 > A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to talk aboutvideo games and their effects. I.Knowledge. - Video gamesand their effects. - Practicing with "should/ shouldn’t". II. Skill -Reading and speaking skill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision III.New lesson Teacher’s activities Students’activities 1. Presentation.(15ms) a.Pre teach. - amusement center: - addictive (adj.) - arcade (n) - T introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation & gives - Ss repeat the words in chorus & in individual and correct the mistakes example. - T models (3 times) and helps Ss to - Ss give the meaning & the pronunciation repeat (2 times). - Ss copy the words - T checks S’s reading in individual and corrects the mistakes. - T writes the words on the Bb and checks the meaning, the pronunciation. - T corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. - T helps Ss to practice the vocabulary. b.Checking vocab. R.O.R c.Presentation dialogue. A1 P.147 * Set the scene: Nam usually goes to the - Ss listen to and repeat the dialogue amusement center. Listen to the * Model sentences: conversation between Nam and Lan. - T asks Ss to listen to and repeat the - Don t spend too much of your time in the arcade. dialogue. - No. I won t * Formation: Don’t + Verb.... * Use: Used to advice someone not to 2. Practice.(24ms) do something "Word cue drill".

(242) a) play video game for a short time. Example: b) spend lot of money on -You should play video game for a short video games. time. c) go to the amucement center -You shouldn’t spend lot of money on often. video games. d) spend little time in video ..........etc. game. -Now answer . Ask Ss ask and answer questions. a. Nam is going to the amusement center. Ss work in groups to write full sentences. b. He is going to play video games. c. He goes there about once a week. d. No, he doesn’t spen much money. e. He usually stays for about an hour. f. F.Because he can be addictive to video games. g. He’ll do his homework later. 3. Production.(3ms) - Exercise 2 work book) T asks Ss to work in groups to write full sentences. -T corrects. IV.Consolidation :(2ms) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(1m) Learning by heart all content. Doing exercises in workbook. Preparing new lesson:Unit 15: A2. Pre: 08/04/2015 Tea: 09/04/ 2015 Period: 92 Unit 15 : GOING OUT Lesson 2: VIDEO GAMES < A2 > A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the details about video game. I.Knowledge. - Video games. II. Skill - Reading skill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting -.

(243) II- Revision -"Slap the board"(5ms) addictive spend. amusement center arcade. III.New lesson Teacher’s activities 1Pre-reading.(15ms) a.Pre teach. - inventor (n) - dizzy (adj.) - social skill (n) - (to) protect an sb/ st against st : -(to) develop - Premises (n) T introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation & gives example. - T models (3 times) and helps Ss to repeat (2 times). - T checks S’s reading in individual and corrects the mistakes. - T writes the words on the Bb and checks the meaning, the pronunciation. - T corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. - T helps Ss to practice the vocabulary. b.Check vocab. "What and Where" c.T/F statements prediction. 1.All children play video game in arcade 2.Children shouldn’t spend much time on video game for a long time because they become dizzy and tired. 3.Children should play outdoors. 4.Children mustn’t forget to do other things. * Set the scene: Some young people play video games. You will read some opinions about playing video games - T asks Ss to read the statements (on poster) and work in pairs to predict they are true or false. 2.While -reading.(17ms) Activity 1: -T asksSs to read the text and check their prediction. Activity 2: -T asks Ss to read the text again and do A2 (a - d)-text book P.148. T asks Ss to read the text again and complete the sentences on page 148149. - T calls on some Ss to call out their answers.. play outdoors Students’activities. Ss repeat the words in chorus & in individual and correct the mistakes - Ss give the meaning & the pronunciation - Ss copy the words.. -Ss enjoy the game. - Ss read the statements (on poster) and work in pairs to predict they are true or false.. Ss read the text on page 148 and check their prediction. * Answers keys: a. F c. T b. T d. T - Ss read the text again and do the task A2 - Some Ss to call out their answers. *Answer given a-D: Many young people play video games. b-A: Some inventors of video games become very rich. c-D: The doctor thinks all children should take part in outdoor activities with their friends. d-B: The doctor says you should spend little time playing video games..

(244) - T gives feed back and corrects 3.Post -reading.(5ms) Ask Ss to ask and answer the questions. a.Do you like playing video games? b.How often do you play video games? IV.Consolidation :(2ms) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(1m) Learning by heart all content. Doing exercises in workbook. Preparing new lesson:Unit 15: B1-2. Teaching: /0 /2012. Period: 92. Unit 15 : GOING OUT Lesson 2: VIDEO GAMES < A2-3 > A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the details about video game. I.Knowledge. - Video games. II. Skill - Reading skill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision -"Slap the board"(3ms) addictive spend. amusement center arcade. III.New lesson Teacher’s activities 1. Pre-reading.(15ms) a.Pre teach. - inventor (n) - dizzy (adj.) - social skill (n) - (to) protect an sb/ st against st : -(to) develop - Premises (n) T introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation & gives example. - T models (3 times) and helps Ss to repeat (2 times). - T checks S’s reading in individual and. play outdoors Students’activities. Ss repeat the words in chorus & in individual and correct the mistakes - Ss give the meaning & the pronunciation - Ss copy the words..

(245) corrects the mistakes. - T writes the words on the Bb and checks the meaning, the pronunciation. - T corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. - T helps Ss to practice the vocabulary. b.Check vocab. "What and Where" c.T/F statements prediction. 1) All children play video game in arcade 2) Children shouldn’t spend much time on video game for a long time because they become dizzy and tired. 3) Children should play outdoors. 4) Children mustn’t forget to do other things. * Set the scene: Some young people play video games. You will read some opinions about playing video games - T asks Ss to read the statements (on poster) and work in pairs to predict they are true or false. 2. While -reading.(17ms) Activity 1: -T asksSs to read the text and check their prediction.. -Ss enjoy the game. - Ss read the statements (on poster) and work in pairs to predict they are true or false.. Ss read the text on page 148 and check their prediction. * Answers keys: a. F c. T b. T d. T. - Ss read the text again and do the task A2 - Some Ss to call out their answers. Activity 2: *Answer given -T asks Ss to read the text again and do a-D: Many young people play video A2 (a - d)-text book P.148. games. T asks Ss to read the text again and b-A: Some inventors of video games complete the sentences on page 148become very rich. 149. c-D: The doctor thinks all children - T calls on some Ss to call out their should take part in outdoor answers. activities with their friends. - T gives feed back and corrects d-B: The doctor says you should spend little time playing video games.. 3. Post-reading.(7ms) A3 P.149-text book T asks Ss to work individually - in pairs - in groups. -T corrects. -. * Gap –filling A 3 (P149- textbook) - Ss complete the passage with words in the box individually then share with partners. 1. be 6. use 2. have 7. can 3. is 8. will 4. identify 9. buy 5.are 10. show IV.Consolidation :(2ms) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(1m) Learning by heart all content. Doing exercises in workbook. Preparing new lesson:Unit 15: B1-2 THE END.

(246) Pre: 09/04/2015 Tea: 10/04/ 2015 Period: 93 Unit 15 : GOING OUT Lesson 3: IN THE CITY <B1-2> A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the details about life in the city and copare city and village life styles. I.Knowledge. - life in the city and copare city and village life styles. II. Skill - Reading skill. III. Teaching aids - Poster B. Proceduce..

(247) I.Greeting II- Revision -"Jumbled words"(3ms) ctproet =? (Answer key:protect,develope,country,noise,traffic) pedevelo =? ycoutrn =? snoie =? ictraff =? III.New lesson Teacher’s activities Students’activities 1. Pre-reading.(15ms) a.Pre teach. The rest (n) - awake (adj) - (to) scare: - (to) get used to - (to) hate: T introduces the words by explaining the - Ss repeat the words in chorus and in meaning, using the situation and gives individual and correct the mistakes example. - Ss give the meaning & the - T models (3 times) and helps Ss to pronunciation repeat (2 times). - Ss copy the words. - T checks S’s reading in individual and corrects the mistakes. - T writes the words on the Bb and checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - T corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. - -- T helps Ss to practice the vocabulary. b.Checking vocab. "Slap the board" -Ss enjoy the game. c.T/F statements prediction" - Ss read the statements (on poster) and 1) Hoa goes to the school work in pairs to predict they are true or theater club twice a week. false. 2) When Hoa lived in the village, she knew all the *Answer key: people in her 1) F neighborhood. 2) T 3) Lan lived near quiet road. 3) F 4) The noise never keep Lan 4) F awake at night. Ss read the text again and answer the * Set the scene: There are many questions. different between the city and life in - Ss work in open pairs and close pairs the country. You will read the text about those. * key: - T asks Ss to read the statements (on a. She goes to the school theater club poster) and work in pairs to predict they once a week. The rest of the week she are true or false. usually stays at home in the evening. 2. While-reading.(17ms) b. No, she doesn’t like the city. Activity 1: c. Before, Hoa lived in a village near -T asksSs to read the text and check their Hue. prediction. d. She liked living there because she Activity 2: knew all people in her neighborhood; -T asks Ss to read the text again and the village was quiet and there was answer the questions. a-f P.151 (text only a little traffic. book). e. She doesn’t like the city because it is T asks Ss to read the text again and noisy and the roads are busy. answer the questions. f. She hates crossing the road most - T asks Ss to work in pairs to find out because bikes, motorbikes and cars.

(248) the answers of the questions a- f on page come from every direction, and they 151. scare her. - T gives feed back and calls on Ss to answer the questions. Ss work in groups of 5 or 6 to discuss - T checks and writes the answers on the about life in the city and life in the Bb. country by answer these questions. - T asks Ss work in open pairs and in Answer possible: close pairs - I don’t like the city much because life 3.Post-reading.(7ms) there is noisy, the air is polluted and the -T asks Ss to work in group to discuss roads are busy. the question: - I like the peaceful most because life in Questions: the country is quite, the air is fresh and 1.What do you do in the evening? the neighbors are very friendly 2. Do you like the city or the country? Why? Or why not? 3. What do you like most about the city? Why? 4. What do you like most about the country? Why -T controls and corrects. IV.Consolidation :(2ms) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(1m) Learning by heart all content. Doing exercises in workbook. Preparing new lesson:Unit 15: B3,4.

(249) Pre: 12/04/2015 Tea: 13/04/ 2015 Period: 94 Unit 15 : GOING OUT Lesson 4: IN THE CITY <B3,4> A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the details about Hoa’s life in the city. I.Knowledge. - Hoa’s life in the city. II. Skill - Reading skill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting "sing a song" II- Revision -"Matching"(3ms) a.the traffic from every direction b.the road busy c.the noise too many d.the neighbors expensive e.cars, motorbikes,bikes noisy and busy e.eating out keep people awake at night III.New lesson Teacher’s activities Students’activities 1. Pre-reading.(5ms) a.Pre teach. -(to) socialize -(to) cost -public library - T introduces the words by explaining the - Ss repeat the words in chorus & in meaning, using the situation & gives individual and correct the mistakes example. - Ss give the meaning & the - T models (3 times) and helps Ss to repeat pronunciation (2 times). - Ss copy the words. - T checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - T writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - T corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. - T helps Ss to practice the vocabulary b.Checking vocab. R.O.R c.Open prediction. -T asks Ss to predict activities Hoa did in -Ss enjoy the game. the evening. 2. While-reading.(10ms) -Ss predict activities Hoa did in the Activity 1: evening. -T asks Ss to read the text and check their prediction. Activity 2: -Ss read the text and check their -T asks Ss to read the text again and prediction..

(250) practice with "Answer given". 1) bike -Ss read the text again and practice with 2) table tennis "Answer given". 3) playing chess Example : 4) with her friends 1) What did Hoa’s uncle buy 5) thousands of book her? 3.Post-reading.(5ms) 2) ....etc. B1 + B2 (work book) P.96 -Ss work in groups to write full T asks Ss to work in groups to write full sentences and then copare city and village sentences and then copare city and village lifestyle. lifestyle. Example: -T corrects. -In the city the traffic is busy, but in the 1. Pre-listening.(8ms) country it is not busy........... -Lead-in: -Ss listen and anwers. T asks some questions: Expected: What did you do yesterday? Yesterday, I went out with my friends. Did you play soccer yesterday? We ate, chatted.... Did you do your homework? .... ... -T asks Ss to predict and match names to -Ss predict and match names to the the pictures (B4 P.152). pictures (B4 P.152). Ba picture a -Ss listen carefully and take notes the Hoa b main ideas. Nga c *Answer key: Lan d Ba play table tennis (Ba-b) An e Nga saw a movie (Nga-d) Nam f Lan went to a restaurant (Lan-f) 2. While-listening.(7ms) Hoa played chess. (Hoa-a) -T turn on the tape and ask Ss to listen Nam litened to CDs (Nam-c) carefully and take notes the main ideas. An watched a soccer match (An-e) 3.Post-listening.(5ms) B3 P.97 (work book) T corrects. IV.Consolidation :(1m) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(1m) Learning by heart all content. Doing exercises in workbook. Preparing new lesson:Unit 15: B5. Pre: 15/04/2015 Tea: 16/04/ 2015 Period: 95. Unit 15 : GOING OUT Lesson 5: IN THE CITY <B5>. A/ Aim: -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the details of the passage. B/ Procedure: * Revision: "Kim's game".(7ms) - Let Ss look at the words for 30 seconds Ss work in groups then write the words on the board. Video, study, education, country. - Feedback.. 1Pre-reading.(10ms) .a. Vocabulary: Burger (n) (picture). individual and correct the mistakes - Ss give the meaning & the pronunciation.

(251) tire (n) (picture) In addition to (example) Pain (n) (question) In a hurry(example) -b.Checking vocabulary:What and Where.. - Ss copy the words.. - Ss work in groups : A - B. c.T/F statements prediction" 1.I had a nice evening. 2.I went to the zoo. 3.I didn’t like the price. And My tier bike was flat. 4.I won’t go out again in a hurry. 2..While-reading.(18ms) - Ask Ss to read the passage then check T/F. - Ask Ss to compare their tast with the key answer. 1.F 2.F 3.T 4.T. 3.Post-reading.(7ms) -T asks Ss to read the passage again and. -. Ss work in groups. Write their .answer. - Suggested answers:. Individual work. then translate in to Viet Namese. IV/ Homework:.(3ms) - Learn new words by heart. -. Prepare unit 16A1,2. Pre: 16/04/2015 Tea: 17/04/ 2015 Period: 93 Unit 15 : GOING OUT Lesson 5: IN THE CITY <B4> Period: 95 A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the details about activities students did yesterday. I.Knowledge. - Activities students did yesterday. II. Skill - Listening skill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting "sing a song" II- Revision -"Kim’s game"(3ms) (using pictures B4 P.152 -text book ) III.New lesson Teacher’s activities Students’activities 3. Pre-listening.(15ms).

(252) -Lead-in: T asks some questions: What did you do yesterday? Did you play soccer yesterday? Did you do your homework? ... -T asks Ss to predict and match names to the pictures (B4 P.152). Ba picture a Hoa b Nga c Lan d An e Nam f 4. While-listening.(17ms) -T turn on the tape and ask Ss to listen carefully and take notes the main ideas.. -Ss listen and anwers. Expected: Yesterday, I went out with my friends. We ate, chatted.... .... -Ss predict and match names to the pictures (B4 P.152).. -Ss listen carefully and take notes the main ideas. *Answer key: Ba play table tennis (Ba-b) Nga saw a movie (Nga-d) Lan went to a restaurant (Lan-f) Hoa played chess. (Hoa-a) Nam litened to CDs (Nam-c) An watched a soccer match (An-e). 5. Post-listening.(7ms) B3 P.97 (work book) T corrects. IV.Consolidation :(2ms) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(1m) Learning by heart all content. Doing exercises in workbook. Preparing new lesson:Unit 16: A1-2 THE END -.

(253) Pre:16/04/2015 Tea: 17/04/ 2015 Period: 96. Unit 16 : PEOPLE AND PLACE Lesson 1: FAMOUS PLACE IN ASIA <A1-2>. A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to talk about names of the coutries in Asia and their capital cities, use "Where is that?/ It’s in.....". I.Knowledge. - Using "Where is that?/ It’s in.....". - Names of the coutries in Asia and their capital cities. II. Skill - Reading and speaking skill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision -"Matching"(5ms) (A2-P.155 -text book ) Bangkok Chine Beijing Laos Kuala Lumpur Thailand Phnom Penh Myanmar Vientiane Indonesia Yangon Cambodia Jakarta Malaysia III.New lesson Teacher’s activities Students’activities 1. Presentation.(15ms) a.Pre teach. -postcard -capital -pilot -region -(to) fly - Ss repeat the words in chorus & in T introduces the words by explaining the individual and correct the mistakes meaning, using the situation & gives - Ss give the meaning & the example. pronunciation - T models (3 times) and helps Ss to - Ss copy the words. repeat (2 times). - T checks S’s reading in individual & corrects the mistakes. - T writes the words on the Bb & checks the meaning & the pronunciation. - T corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. - T helps Ss to practice the vocabulary b.Checking vocab. "What and Where".

(254) c.Presentation dialogue. A1 P.154 d.Comprehension questions. a- f (text book ) P.154 T gives a game "Hang man" to ask ss to practice. e.T sets a sence to give the model sentence.. -Ss enjoy the game.. -. Ss read the text again and answer the questions.. Model sentences: S1: Where does ba’s uncle fly to? S2: He flies to Bangkok S1: Where is that? S2: It’s in Thailand. -Ss practice well. Example exchange: S1: Where does Ba’s uncle fly to? S2: He flies to Phnompenh. S1:Where is that? S2: It’s in Cambodia. ....etc.. 2. Practice.(15ms) "Word cue drill" 3) Bongkok/ Thailand 4) Vientiane/Lao 5) Jakarta/ Indonesia 6) Beijing/chine 7) Kuala Lumpur/Malaysia 3. Production.(7ms) A3 P.100 ( work book ) T asks Ss to work in pairs to -Ss work in pairs to practice speaking. practice speaking. IV.Consolidation :(2ms) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(1m) Learning by heart all content. Doing exercises in workbook. Preparing new lesson:Unit 16: A3,4 -. Pre: 19/04/2015 Tea: 20/04/ 2015 Period: 97 Unit 16 : PEOPLE AND PLACE Lesson 2: FAMOUS PLACE IN ASIA <A3,4> A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the details about a schedules of a fly. I.Knowledge. A schedules of a fly. II. Skill - Listening skill. B. Proceduce..

(255) I.Greeting "sing a song"(3ms) II- Revision III.New lesson Teacher’s activities I:1.Pre -listening.(7ms) -Open prediction: T gives a poter with some information. -T asks Ss to predict. Days Places Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday 1. While-listening.(10ms) -T turns on the tape to ask Ss to listen carefully and check their prediction.. Students’activities -Ss listen and predict the place.. -Ss listen carefully and check their prediction. Answer key: Days Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday. . II:1.Pre -reading.(7ms) Pre teach. -Open prediction. 1) South east Asia has many attractions. 2) We could visit many new monuments. 3) We can see shadow puppet shows in Thailand. 4) There are thousands of kilometers of beaches. 2.While-reading.(10ms) Activity 1: -T asks Ss to read the text and check their prediction. Activity 2: "Wh-questions" -T asks Ss to read the text again and answer the questions. 1) The passaga mentions three kinds of tourist attractions. What are they? 2) What is the famous ancient temple in Jave? 3) Where can you see shadow puppet shows?. Places Bangkok and Singapore Singapore Jakarta Bali Bali Hongkong Back to Ha Noi. -Ss work in groups to practice. -Ss read 4 sentences and predict which sentences are T/f?. -Ss read the text and check their prediction. *Answer key: 1) T 2) F 3) F 4) T. -Ss read the text again and answer the questions..

(256) 4) Where can you see famous traditional dances? 5) What can you see in the ocean? 3.Post -reading.(5ms) -T asks Ss to list some kinds of attractions in Viet Nam you may prefer. -T corrects.. -Ss list some kinds of attractions in Viet Nam you may prefer. Example: I may prefer the beaches. I may prefer the food. .......etc.. IV.Consolidation :(3ms) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(2ms) Learning by heart all content. Doing exercises in workbook. Preparing new lesson:Unit 16: B1. Pre: /04/2015 Tea: /04/ 2015 Period: 98. Unit 16 : PEOPLE AND PLACE Lesson 3: FAMOUS PEOPLE <B1> A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the details about famous people and events in Viet Nam and practice with " I prefer...../because..". I.Knowledge. -Practicing with " I prefer...../because..". - Famous people and events in Viet Nam. II. Skill - Reading skill B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision -"Brainstorming"(5ms) Famous peolpe in Viet Nam Uncle Ho. III.New lesson Teacher’s activities 1. Pre -reading.(15ms) a.Pre teach. -general -battle -(to) lead -(to) defeat -powerful -kind T introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation & gives example. - T models (3 times) and helps Ss to. Students’activities. - Ss repeat the words in chorus & in individual and correct the mistakes - Ss give the meaning & the pronunciation.

(257) repeat (2 times). - T checks S’s reading in individual and corrects the mistakes. - T writes the words on the Bb and checks the meaning, the pronunciation. - T corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. - T helps Ss to practice the vocabulary. b.Checking vocab. R.O.R c.T/F statements prediction. - a) - f) B1 P.158 2. While-reading.(15ms) -T asks Ss to read the text and check heir prediction.. 4.Post -reading .(5ms) Ss asks to retell content of the text. -T cotrols and corrects.. - Ss copy the words.. -Ss practice the vocabulary. -Ss read the text and check heir prediction. *Answer key: a) F b) F c) T d) F e) T f) F Individual. .. IV.Consolidation :(3m) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(2m) Learning by heart all content. Doing exercises in workbook. Preparing new lesson:Unit 16: B2,4. Pre: /04/2015 Tea: /04/ 2015 Period: 99 Unit 16 : PEOPLE AND PLACE.

(258) Lesson 4: FAMOUS PEOPLE <B2,4> A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the details about famous people and their biography. I.Knowledge. - Famous people and their biography. II. Skill - Reading skill, listening skill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision III.New lesson Teacher’s activities I:1.Pre-speaking.(3ms Ask Ss to guess content of the dialogue- P.158 -text book. .2.while-speaking.(9ms T asks Ss to work in pairs to practise speaking. -T cotrols and corrects. 1.like 2.prefer 3.guess 4 favorite II:1.Pre-reading.(10ms) a.Pre teach. -inventor/ to invent -electric light bulb -power station -motion picture -fairy tale -(to) found -(to) form -(to) declare -indochinese Communist Party -independence - T introduces the words by explaining the meaning, using the situation & gives example. - T models (3 times) and helps Ss to repeat (2 times). - T checks S’s reading in individual and corrects the mistakes. - T writes the words on the Bb and checks the meaning, the pronunciation. - T corrects & asks Ss to copy the words. b.Checking vocabulary. "What and Where" c.Open prediction. -T gives two questions and asks Ss to give the answer. 1) Who is Thomas Edison? 2) Who is Hans Christian Andersen? 2.While-reading.(15ms) Activity 1: -T asks Ss to read the text and check their prediction. Activity 2:. Students’activities Pair work. - Ss repeat the words in chorus & in individual and correct the mistakes - Ss give the meaning & the pronunciation - Ss copy the words.. -Ss enjoy the game. -Answer the questions.. -Ss read the text and check their prediction -Ss to read the text again and answer the questions..

(259) -T asks Ss to read the text again and answer the questions. 1) When and where was Thomas Edition born? 2) What is his famous invention? 3) What did he establish in New York city? 4) How many things did he invent? 5) When didi he die? 6) When and where was Hans Christian Andersen born? 7) Who did he want to be ? 8) What did he write? 9) What did he become most fanous for/ -T gives a game "Nooughts and Crosses" to ask ss to practice well. 3.Post-reading(3ms) Ask Ss to read the text gain. T-feedback. -Ss read and listen to the information and fill the year and the place to complete the sentences.. IV.Consolidation :(3ms) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(2ms) Learning by heart all content. Doing exercises in workbook. Preparing new lesson:Unit 16: B5. Pre: / /2015 Tea: / / 2015 Period: 100. Unit 16 : PEOPLE AND PLACE Lesson 5: FAMOUS PEOPLE <B5>. A/ Aim: Having Ss know more about the guat man – Ho Chi Minh by listening skill. Practising more writing, speaking skills. B/ Procedure: I- Pre- listening: "Open prediction" - Ask Ss to think of Ho Chi Minh. Ss think and say. Moscow 1983 HoChiMin - Ask Ss to look at the picture of page 1890 161. Kim Lienhhhh hhh 1969 II- While – listening: - Ask Ss to listen to the tape. Ss listen twice - Ask Ss to compare with their partners. Ss compare. - Ask Ss to compare with the answer * Suggested answers: keys. Events year place.

(260) - Call some Ss to read.. Date of birth 1890 Kimlien Left Vietnam 1911 Saigon Work in hotel 19005 London Went to another 1917 Paris Country 1923 Moved again Founded VN Communist party 1930 Quang Chau Formed Vietminh front 1941 VN Became president 1945 VN Died 1969 HN - Ss retell.. III- Post-listening: - Ask Ss to retell about uncle Ho's life. - Remark and give marks. - Ask Ss to review. - Correcting. - Ss write in groups. IV- Homework: 1. Write about uncle Ho's life. 2. Do exercises of B5. 3. Review English 7.. Pre: / /2015 Tea: / / 2015 Period: 101 Unit 16 : PEOPLE AND PLACE. LANGUAGE FOCUS 5 A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the details about the biography of Uncle Ho. I.Knowledge. -The biography of Uncle Ho. II. Skill - Reading and speaking skill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision III.New lesson Teacher’s activities Students’activities I.PRESENT PROGRESSIVE TENSE. (15ms) - T asks Ss to do the task 1 (68- language - Ss do the task 1 in individual. focus 2) by completing the sentences, use - Ss present their keys. - Ss copy down. the verbs in bracket. *The keys: It’s six thirty in the evening. Lan is - T asks Ss to read their keys. doing her homework. She is writing an T corrects and comments and asks English essay. Mr. Thanh is reading a newspaper and Mrs. Quyen is cooking Ss to copy down..

(261) dinner. Liem and Tien, Lan’s brothers are playing soccer in the back yard. Liem is kicking the ball and Tien is running after it - Ss do the task 2 in individual. - Ss present their keys in pairs. II/ THIS and THAT, THESE and - Ss copy down. THOSE(15ms) - T asks Ss to do the task 2 (68- language *The keys: a) - This room is very untidy. focus 2) by completing the sentences, use the verbs in bracket. - Sorry. Mom b) - Put this bag away. - T asks Ss to present their keys in pairs. -That isn’t my bag, Mom. This is my bag T corrects and comments and c) - Put those dirty socks in the washing asks Ss to copy down. basket. - These socks? - No. Those socks on the bed. d) - Throw away those comics. - But I like these comics. Mom. III.ADVERB OF FREQUENCY(10ms) T asks Ss to look at the table and write sentences about Ba in individual. - T calls Ss to write their keys on the Bb - T corrects, comments and asks Ss to copy down.. - Ss write sentences about Ba in individual. - Ss write their keys on the Bb. - Ss copy down. * The keys: - Ba seldom rides a bike to school. - Ba always practices the guitar after school. - Ba usually does his homework in the evening. - Ba sometimes plays computer games.. IV.Consolidation :(3ms) Teacher asks students to speak again the main of this content. V.Homework :(2ms) Learning by heart all content. Doing exercises in workbook. Preparing new lesson:Review( from unit 1 to unit 16) THE END.

(262) Pre:. / /2015. Tea:. / / 2015. Period: 102. REVIEW. A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to remind all knowledge from unit 1 to unit 8. I.Knowledge. -The future tense -Future simple tense & Question with “Would..?” & Vocabulary. II. Skill - Reading and speaking drill B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision III.New lesson. Teacher’s activities Students’activities 1.PRESENTATION(15ms) Shark attack: - Introduces the game & explains the way to play & divides the class into 2 groups to play - Playing the game in 2 groups. the game. - Commenting the game. - Helps Ss to play the game. - Corrects & comments. * The words for the game: 1. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ (Television). 2. _ _ _ _ _ (chair). 3. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ (Picture). 4. _ _ _ _ _ _ (Stove). 2.PRACTICE(20ms) 5. _ _ _ _ _ (Table) -Introduces the requirement & Asks Ss to give the form & use of the future simple tense then - Giving the form & use of the work in pairs to write things they will do or will future simple tense. not do tomorrow. - Working in pairs to write * Form: S + Will/shall + V. things will do or will not do * Use: Talk about things will do in the future. tomorrow. - Asks Ss to compare the keys. - Comparing the keys & give the -Asks Ss to practice in pairs. keys by practicing in pairs. - Corrects & comments. - Correcting the keys.. Word cue drill: A1/ P19-20.. I will see a movie but he won’t watch TV. He will write to his grandmother but he won’t meet Minh..

(263) - Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss to practice. - Reads the first modal for example & asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual. - Asks Ss to make sentences for the next. - Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in groups & in pairs . - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.  Cues: -go to the movie /☺ -go shopping /☺ -listen to music /☻ - go out for dinner /☺ -play video games /☻. - Repeating in chorus & in individual. - Making sentences for the next cues. - Practicing in groups & in pairs . - Correcting the pronunciation. * Example exchange: S1: Would you like to go for a walk ? S2: Yes, I’d love to./ I’m sorry. I can’t.. 3.PRODUCTION(8ms) - Asks Ss the questions & requires them to answer. - Corrects S’s answers & comments. * Questions: a. What time do your classes start ? b. What time do they finish ? c. How many lessons do you have on Mondays ? d. How many hours do you do your homework ? e. When will you have a vacation ? f. How long does your vacation last ?. - Answering the questions. -Correcting the pronunciation. a. My classes start at 7.00. b. They finish at 11.15. c. I have five lessons on Monday. d. It takes two hour for me to do my home work . e. I will have a vacation in June. f. It will last in three months.. IV. Consolidation.(1m) -T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson. V.Homework.(1m) -Doing again all exercises in your notebook. -Preparing: review 2.

(264) Pre:. / /2015. Tea: / / 2015 Period: 103 REVIEW A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to consolidate the knowledge I.Knowledge. -The present simple. II. Skill -Reading and speaking drill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision. III. New lesson. Teacher’s activities 1.Present simple tense. a. With (to) be: -T asks ss to remember the way to use the structure,use. -T calls some ss to go to the board and write. -T controls and corrects with ss. -T asks Ss to give the structures and the way to use them. Structure: Khẳng định: S + (to) be +(a/an) + O. Phủ định: S + (to) be-not +(a/an) + O. Nghi vÊn:(to) be + S +a/an + O ?. Tr¶ lêi: Yes, S + (to)be No, S + (to) be-not -T asks ss to give more example .Example: 1.They are students. 2.He isnot an engineer. 3. Are they students ? Yes, they are. No, they aren’t T controls and corrects. Notes: I + am She,He,It + is You, They, We + are 2.Exercise: . Put the verbs in the correct answer: - Introduces the way to practice & devides the class into 2 groups to practice. - Helps Ss to practice. -Calls ss to go to the board write the answer. - Corrects & comments 1. She...................(to)be not ) a student. 2...............she a good student ? ((to) be) 3. I...................a farmer. ((to)be) 4. They.............nurses. ((to)be) 5. Mr.Nam andMrs. Nga..................... workers. ((to)be-not). Students’activities -Ss remember and answer the question of teacher.. -Ss give examples. + He is a teacher. + Nam isnot a student. + Is she tall? Yes, she is/ No, she isn’t. ...etc - Ss take notes.. - Ss copy the notes and learn by heart.. -Ss work individual then share with your partners. Expected: 1.She isn’t a student. 2.Is she a good student? 3. I’m a farmer. 4.They are nurses. 5.Mr.Nam and Mrs.Nga aren’t workers. -Ss go to the board write the answer - Correcting the answer keys..

(265) 3. Present simple tense. a. With regular verbs. -T asks ss to remember the way to use the structure,use. -T calls some ss to go to the board and write. -T controls and corrects with ss. -T asks Ss to give the structures and the way to use them. Structure: Khẳng định: S + V(s/es) + O. Phủ định: S + don’t/doesn’t + V(inf) + O. Nghi vÊn: Do/ Does + S + V(inf) + O ?. Tr¶ lêi: Yes, S + do/does No, S + don’t/ doesn’t. -T asks ss to give more example b.Example: 1.They play chess. 2.He works in a hospital. 3. Does nam like oranges? Yes, he does No, he doesn’t. T controls and corrects. Notes: She,He,It + V(s/es) You, They, We + V(inf) 4.Exercise: a.Put the following verbs in simple presnt. -T aks ss to work in groups of 4 to do the exercises. -T asks ss the way to do. - T calls ss to go to the board write the answer. -T comment and correct. 1. The swimming bath..................(open) at 9:00 and ..............(close) at 18:30 every day. 2.I have a car but I.................(not-use) it very often. 3.I.......................(play) the piano, but I...................(not-play) very well. 4.I don’t understand the word”decide”. What.........................(“decide”/ mean)? 5.I ............................(work) in a bank. Nam.........................(work) in an office.. -Ss remember and answer the question of teacher.. -Ss give examples. + He teaches in a school.. + Nam doesn’t play volleyball.. + Do you want to learn English? Yes, I do/ No,I don’t. ...etc - Ss take notes.. - Ss copy the notes and learn by heart.. Practicing in groups. -Expected: 1. opens........closes 2.don’t use 3.play.........don’t play. 4.does the “decide” mean? 5.work..........doesn’t work...... -Ss go to the board write the answer. - Correcting the answer keys.. IV. Consolidation -T calls some Ss to read again the model sentences and th cocept check. V.Homework. -Preparing the simple present tense . -Preparing the present progressive tense ..

(266) Pre:. / /2015. Tea: / / 2015 Period: 104. REVIEW A . Objectives . -By the end of this lesson, students will be able to remind all knowledge from unit 1 to unit 8. I.Knowledge. -Preposition of place; Must & Can; Question words. -Yes / No question with Present progressive -The present progressive tense -Adjectives and adverbs -Prepositions. II. Skill - Reading and speaking drill. B. Proceduce. I.Greeting II- Revision III.New lesson. Teacher’s activities Students’activities I.PRESENTATION 1. Yes/ No question of Present * Mapped dialogue: - Practicing the dialogue in chorus; in progressive groups & in pairs. - Corrects the pronunciation & comments. - Introduces the dialogue & helps Ss to * * Example exchanges: S1: Are you watching TV ?. practice in chorus. - Asks Ss to practice the dialogue in S2: No, I’m not. S1: Are you listening to the radio ? groups & in pairs. - Check S’s practicing the dialogue in S2: No, I’m not. S1: Are you reading ?. groups & in pairs. - Corrects the pronunciation & S2: No, I’m not. S1: What are you doing ? comments. S2: I’m playing video games..

(267) … TV ? … radio ? …reading ? What ….?. x x x …video games.. 2. Preposition of place: * Listen & Draw:. -Working in pairs to look at the picture & use the Preposition of place in the box to complete the paragraph. - Comparing the keys & give the keys.. - Reads the text & Asks Ss to listen to the text & draw the position of things that they hear. - Reads the text again & Asks Ss to compare & give the picture they drew. - Corrects & comments. * “There is a house. Behind the house there are mountains. To the left of the house there is a tree. In front of the house there is a river. To the right of the house a man is riding a bike.” II.PRACTICE 1.. Question words: - Grid.. - Practicing in groups, using the past simple to talk about their vacation. - Introduces the topic & asks Ss to practice in - Giving the answers. groups, using the past simple to talk about their - Correcting the pronunciation. vacation. - Asks Ss to give the answers. - Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments. * Example exchanges: S1: Where does he live ?. S1: What is his name ?. S2: In Hue. S2: John. S1: What time does he get up ?. S1: How old is he ? S2: Five-thirty.. S2: He is thirty-five.. S1: What time does he come home ?. S1: What does he do ?. S2: One o’clock S2: Hoe is a teacher. John 35 Teacher Hue 05.30 13.00 Hoa 21 Farmer Ha Tinh 04.00 18.00 Binh 12 student HCMC 06.00 15.30 III.PRODUCTION 1. Must & Can: Noughts & Crosses: -Working in groups to answer the questions about the road signs with Must & Can. - Introduces the example exchange & helps Ss to - Comparing the keys. work in groups to answer the questions about the - Correcting the keys. road signs with Must & Can. - Asks Ss to compare the keys. - Corrects & comments the game. * Example: S1: What does this sign mean ? S2: You [ must slow down ]. [ can park here ]. 2.The present progressive tense. T asks Ss to remind. *Answer key. S + (to)be + V-ing + O.. -Ss renind and show the way to give the.

(268) S + (to)be-not + V-ing + O. (To)Be + S + V-ing + O ? Ex: S1:What is he doing? S2: He is playing football. -"Word cue drill" a)Lan/walk to school b)They/go to school by bus. c)We/play computer game. d)She/travel to work. e)He/sing a song. Ex: S1: What is Lan doing? S2: She is walking to school. .....etc 3.Adjectives. T asks Ss to show the way to use & structure (short adjectives and long adjectives). Ex: 1)Lan is taller than Hoa. Mai is the tallest. 2)This pen is more expensive than that pen. The dress "C" is the most expensive. -"picture drill" (T asks Ss depend on ex 5 P.40 in text book). Ex: -A toy is cheaper than a ball. -A ball is cheaper than a car. -A toy is the cheapest. .....etc. 4.Adverbs of frequency.) -Exercise 5 P.71 (text book) Ex: Ba never goes to the cafeteria at lunch time. .........etc T controls and corrects. 5. Prepositions -Exercise4 P.39 (text book). use and the structure.. -Take notes. -Ss practice well.. -Ss show the way to use & structure (short adjectives and long adjectives).. -Ss practice well.. -Ss renind and show the way to give the use and the structure. -Ss practice well. -Ss renind and show the way to give the use and the structure. -Ss practice well.. IV. Consolidation -T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson. V.Homework. - Study the grammar & the modal sentence & do the exercises at home. -Preparing: written test (The second term examination) Period: 105 The second term examination.

(269)

GIAO AN ANH 7

Tài liệu liên quan

Tài liệu bạn tìm kiếm đã sẵn sàng tải về